# Shareuhack.com Knowledge Base (EN - LLM Optimized)
Generated: 2026-02-24T17:27:12.385Z
Protocol: https://llms.txt (Draft Concept)
Description: Technical documentation and how-to guides from Shareuhack.com (en).
Language: en

---

## Index
- [Cursor vs Claude Code vs Windsurf vs OpenCode: The Definitive 2026 AI Coding Tool Comparison](#cursor-vs-claude-code-vs-windsurf-2026)
- [OpenCode vs Anthropic Case: The Open vs Closed Debate Over AI Coding Tools in 2026](#opencode-anthropic-legal-controversy-2026)
- [The Complete Guide to Making LINE Stickers with AI: Step-by-Step Process and the Truth About Earnings](#ai-line-sticker-passive-income)
- [AI-Era PM Skill Upgrade Roadmap — From 'Using ChatGPT' to Systematic AI Competency](#ai-pm-skill-roadmap-2026)
- [AI Presentation Tools Comparison 2026: Gamma, Beautiful.ai, Canva, NotebookLM, and Copilot Reviewed](#ai-presentation-tools-comparison)
- [The Complete Guide to Claude Code Costs: Lessons from the OpenClaw OAuth Lockout on Choosing Between Pro, Max, and API](#openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost)
- [2026 PMP Certification Guide: Exam Changes, Study Strategy & An Honest Assessment of Whether It's Worth It](#pmp-certification-guide-2026)
- [What Is Drop Servicing? A Complete Guide to This Low-Cost Business Model in the AI Era](#what-is-drop-servicing)
- [GitHub Trending Weekly 2026-02-18: Official AI Toolchains, Skills Ecosystem Forming, Backend Engineering Strikes Back](#github-trending-weekly-2026-02-18)
- [AI Textbook Automation Workflow for Developers: Claude Code + Pandoc](#ai-textbook-automation-developers)
- [No-Code AI Personal Textbook: The Complete Learner's Guide](#ai-textbook-generator-no-code)
- [Self-Hosted AI Assistant Guide: OpenClaw vs. NanoClaw vs. Nanobot vs. PicoClaw Security & Performance Comparison (2026)](#openclaw-alternatives-guide)
- [How to Plan Travel with AI: Real-World Experience and a Complete Avoid-Pitfalls Guide](#ai-travel-planning-guide)
- [2026 Crypto Card Guide: From S-Tier God Cards to "Look But Don't Touch" Options](#2026-crypto-card-guide)
- [Claude Code UX Researcher: Automated Competitor Benchmarking with AI Agents](#claude-code-ux-researcher)
- [Multi-AI Orchestration: Combining Specialized Tools for High-Quality Content](#multi-ai-collaboration-workflow)
- [OpenClaw Setup Guide 2026: Is It Worth the Security Risk? Honest Decision Framework](#should-i-setup-an-openclaw)
- [Zero-Maintenance Feedback: Building a Telegram + AI Vision Triage Bot](#telegram-feedback-bot-ai-vision)
- [Ikyu.com Booking Guide: Japanese vs International Version & Why It Beats Official Sites](#why-ikyu-often-beats-official-hotel-sites)
- [The PRD Revolution: A High-Efficiency Offline-First Git-like Workflow](#claude-code-prd-workflow)
- [PM Workflow Revolution: Integrating Claude Code, Skills & Sub-Agents (English Version)](#pm-workflow-revolution-claude)
- [2026 Affiliate Marketing Guide: Platform Commissions, Real Income Data & Survival Strategies for the AI Era](#what-is-affiliate-marketing)
- [How to Apply for a Refund of Agoda Foreign Transaction Fee?](#how-to-get-agoda-transaction-fee-back)
- [3 Secrets of the Law of Attraction: Attract What You Love!](#law-of-attraction)
- [Complete Beginner's Guide to Meditation: How to Meditate Successfully with 5 Science-Backed Steps](#meditation-101)
- [Must-Know Free and Practical Project Management Tools - Slack/Trello/Todoist](#nice-free-tools-for-managing-your-work-and-life)
- [Transform Your Life with Daily Rituals: Learn to Create Meaningful Practices](#sense-of-ritual-best-practice)
- [Why the Eisenhower Matrix Keeps Failing You — and How to Fix It in 2026](#use-time-matrix-to-make-life-easier)
- [Master Your Money and Life: Top Tips from Amazon’s Bestsellers](#learn-to-financial-freedom-from-amazon-bestsellers)
- [Best resources for learning negotiation](#best-resources-to-learn-negotiation)
- [How to Land a Front-End Engineer Job in 3 Months](#how-to-become-a-frontend-engineer)
- [Here's how you can crack the PMP exam!](#how-to-get-pmp-2021)

---

## Cursor vs Claude Code vs Windsurf vs OpenCode: The Definitive 2026 AI Coding Tool Comparison <a id="cursor-vs-claude-code-vs-windsurf-2026"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/cursor-vs-claude-code-vs-windsurf-2026
Date: 2026-02-20
Tools: Cursor, Claude Code, Windsurf, OpenCode
Concepts: AI Coding Tools, Agentic IDE, Context Window, SWE-bench, Open Source vs Closed Source

### Summary
A comprehensive comparison of Cursor, Claude Code, Windsurf, and OpenCode — covering pricing, real-world benchmarks, the Anthropic OAuth crackdown, and a decision framework to help you pick the right tool.

### Content
# Cursor vs Claude Code vs Windsurf vs OpenCode: The Definitive 2026 AI Coding Tool Comparison

In 2026, AI coding tools are no longer a question of "should I use one?" — it's "which one should I use?" Cursor, Claude Code, Windsurf, and OpenCode each have loyal followings, with features iterating monthly, wildly different pricing models, and the Anthropic third-party crackdown adding another layer of complexity. This article covers design philosophy, real-world test scenarios, pricing breakdowns, and ecosystem analysis to help you make the best decision for your workflow.

---

## TL;DR

- **Cursor**: The most polished IDE experience — fastest Tab completions, best for developers who prefer the VS Code ecosystem
- **Claude Code**: A terminal-native AI agent — hits 80.9% on SWE-bench with Opus 4.5, ideal for large-scale refactors and automated tasks
- **Windsurf**: The cheapest agentic IDE at $15/month — Cascade maintains persistent project context, great for budget-conscious developers
- **OpenCode**: Fully open-source (MIT License), supports 75+ models, 100K+ GitHub stars — perfect for developers who demand model freedom and privacy
- **The best 2026 strategy is combining tools**: Match different tools to different tasks rather than going all-in on one

---

## 1. Quick Comparison Table

| Feature | Cursor | Claude Code | Windsurf | OpenCode |
|---------|--------|-------------|----------|----------|
| **Positioning** | AI IDE (VS Code fork) | Terminal AI Agent | Agentic IDE | Open-source AI coding agent |
| **Pricing** | $20/mo Pro / $60 Pro+ / $200 Ultra | $20/mo Pro / $100-200/mo Max / API pay-as-you-go | $15/mo Pro | Free (BYO API Key) / Zen pay-as-you-go / Black $20-200/mo |
| **Interface** | GUI (VS Code) | Terminal (CLI) | GUI (custom IDE) | TUI + Desktop App + IDE extensions |
| **Context Window** | Nominally 200K+, effective ~70-120K | 200K (fully utilized) | Cascade persistent context | Depends on underlying model |
| **Model Support** | Claude / GPT-4o / Gemini etc. | Claude family only | Multi-model | 75+ providers (including local models) |
| **SWE-bench** | — | 72.7–80.9% (model-dependent) | — | Depends on underlying model |
| **Open Source** | No | No | No | MIT License |
| **GitHub Stars** | — | — | — | 100K+ |

> **Note**: Pricing and features are current as of February 2026. AI tools iterate rapidly — always check official sites for the latest information.

---

## 2. Design Philosophy: Four Fundamentally Different Approaches

Understanding these four tools starts with recognizing that their **design philosophies** are fundamentally different.

### Cursor: Adding AI Where You Already Work

Cursor is a VS Code fork whose core strategy is to give you **AI capabilities without changing your habits**. Your shortcuts, extensions, and settings all carry over. Tab completions, Cmd+K inline edits, and Composer multi-file refactors are all integrated directly into the IDE.

This "layer AI on top of an existing experience" approach has helped Cursor reach over 1 million users, with more than 360,000 paid subscribers. For most developers, the learning curve is essentially zero.

But this also means limitations: Cursor is fundamentally still an editor, with AI as an "add-on feature." In scenarios requiring cross-file, long-running autonomous execution, its agentic capabilities fall short.

### Claude Code: AI *Is* the Interface

Claude Code takes the opposite approach: **no GUI — the terminal is everything**. You give it natural language instructions, and it reads code, writes code, runs tests, and fixes bugs on its own.

From real-world usage, Claude Code clearly outperforms other tools on large refactoring tasks. Its 200K context window is genuinely usable (unlike some tools that advertise 200K but effectively handle only 70-120K), with token efficiency roughly 5.5x better than Cursor. Paired with Claude Opus 4.5, it achieves an 80.9% SWE-bench Verified score — the highest of any publicly benchmarked system. Even with Sonnet 4, it scores 72.7%.

The trade-off: the pure terminal experience has a higher learning curve, there's no live preview, and developers unfamiliar with the CLI will need an adjustment period. Plus, it only supports Claude models — you're locked into the Anthropic ecosystem.

### Windsurf: The Budget Agentic IDE

Windsurf bills itself as "the world's first agentic IDE." Its key differentiator is **Cascade** — an AI system that maintains persistent understanding of your entire project context. Unlike other tools that reload context with each conversation, Cascade remembers what you've done before.

The Wave 13 update added Parallel Multi-Agent Sessions, letting you run multiple AI agents on different tasks simultaneously. Arena Mode lets you blind-test output quality across different models.

At $15/month — 25% cheaper than Cursor — it's compelling for budget-conscious individual developers. However, its community size and extension ecosystem are much smaller than Cursor's.

### OpenCode: Model Freedom and Open-Source Conviction

OpenCode is the only fully open-source tool of the four (MIT License), developed by Anomaly Innovations (the team behind SST/Serverless Stack). As of February 2026, it has accumulated over 100K GitHub stars and surpassed 2.5M monthly active developers (per official data).

Its core proposition is **model freedom**: support for 75+ LLM providers, from Claude and GPT to Gemini and even Ollama local models. You're not locked into any single AI vendor. The architecture uses Go with Bubble Tea TUI, following a client/server model with support for remote Docker execution.

OpenCode also offers a Desktop App and IDE extensions (VS Code, Cursor, JetBrains, Zed, Neovim, Emacs) — the broadest coverage of any tool here.

However, OpenCode's performance depends entirely on your chosen model. It doesn't optimize models itself, so running the same task may be considerably slower than Claude Code (benchmark data shows 16 min 20 sec vs 9 min 09 sec). It also lacks instant rollback — you'll need to manage that yourself with git.

---

## 3. Real-World Scenario Comparison: What's Each Tool Best At?

Spec sheets only tell part of the story. Based on multiple independent test reports and hands-on experience, here's how each tool performs across different scenarios.

### Scenario 1: Frontend UI Development (React/Next.js Components)

| Tool | Rating | Notes |
|------|--------|-------|
| **Cursor** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Tab completions + live preview — the smoothest frontend dev experience |
| **Claude Code** | ⭐⭐⭐ | Generates complete components, but no live preview — requires switching to the browser |
| **Windsurf** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Cascade understands inter-component relationships, though UI output occasionally has flaws |
| **OpenCode** | ⭐⭐⭐ | Depends on the underlying model; IDE extension mode approaches Cursor's experience |

**Verdict**: For frontend UI work, Cursor's real-time completions and VS Code ecosystem (ESLint, Prettier, DevTools) are unmatched.

### Scenario 2: Large-Scale Refactoring (20+ Files)

| Tool | Rating | Notes |
|------|--------|-------|
| **Cursor** | ⭐⭐ | Composer can handle it, but beyond 10 files it tends to lose track and miss changes |
| **Claude Code** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | 200K context + high autonomy — large refactors are its home turf |
| **Windsurf** | ⭐⭐⭐ | Cascade's persistent context helps, but stability still falls short of Claude Code |
| **OpenCode** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Performs well with Claude models, and the open-source ecosystem makes CI/CD integration easy |

**Verdict**: Choose Claude Code for large refactors. The 200K real context window and high token efficiency make the biggest difference here.

### Scenario 3: Bug Fixing and Debugging

| Tool | Rating | Notes |
|------|--------|-------|
| **Cursor** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Cmd+K quickly pinpoints issues — great for small-scope fixes |
| **Claude Code** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Autonomously reads logs, runs tests, and iterates on fixes — strongest self-directed capability |
| **Windsurf** | ⭐⭐⭐ | Plan Mode helps clarify the debugging approach |
| **OpenCode** | ⭐⭐⭐⭐ | Terminal-native + model switching lets you pick the right model for different bug types |

**Verdict**: Quick bugs? Cursor. Complex bugs? Let Claude Code investigate autonomously.

### Scenario 4: Comprehensive Development Test (Refactoring, Debugging, and Testing)

Based on the [Builder.io benchmark report](https://www.builder.io/blog/opencode-vs-claude-code) (for a fair comparison, **both tools were configured to use the Claude Sonnet 4.5 model**), comparing Claude Code and OpenCode in handling complex development tasks:

- **Cross-file variable rename**: Both completed in about 3 minutes. However, OpenCode blindly replaced everything including comments, whereas Claude Code preserved conceptual descriptions in comments, modifying only the code logic and demonstrating more nuanced text comprehension.
- **Debugging (fixing a hidden type error)**: Both perfectly identified and fixed the bug within 40 seconds.
- **Refactoring shared logic**: Both successfully extracted the common function (taking about 2-3 minutes).
- **Writing unit tests from scratch**: This is where their design philosophies diverged the most:
  - **Claude Code**: Built for speed. Wrote 73 tests and verified they passed, taking **3 minutes and 12 seconds**.
  - **OpenCode**: Built for thoroughness. Wrote 94 tests, automatically ran `pnpm install` to ensure a clean environment, and executed the entire project's 200+ tests to ensure no regressions occurred, taking **9 minutes and 11 seconds**.

**Verdict**:
- **Claude Code**: Built for speed. Reaches the finish line in the shortest time possible, suitable for rapidly advancing projects.
- **OpenCode**: Built for thoroughness. Operates on the assumption that the environment is chaotic and performs comprehensive checks, ideal for scenarios demanding high test coverage and stability.

---

## 4. Pricing Deep Dive: What Will You Actually Pay?

Pricing is what developers care about most — but also where they're most easily misled. The sticker price and your actual spend can be very different.

### Pricing Structure by Tool

#### Cursor

| Plan | Monthly Cost | What You Get |
|------|-------------|-------------|
| Free | $0 | Basic completions, 50 slow premium requests |
| Pro | $20/mo ($16 annual) | Unlimited completions + $20 monthly credit pool |
| Pro+ | $60/mo | 3x Pro credits + Background Agents |
| Ultra | $200/mo | 20x Pro credits + early access to new features |
| Teams | $40/user/mo | Pro + SSO + admin console |

> **Important change**: Cursor switched to **credit-based billing** in June 2025. The $20/month Pro plan includes a $20 credit pool — using premium models like Claude Sonnet 4.5 or GPT-5 burns credits faster. Your actual experience may vary depending on model choice.

#### Claude Code

| Plan | Monthly Cost | What You Get |
|------|-------------|-------------|
| Pro | $20/mo | Includes Claude Code usage (shared with claude.ai) |
| Max 5x | $100/mo | 5x Pro usage |
| Max 20x | $200/mo | 20x Pro usage |
| API | Pay-as-you-go | Average ~$6/day (Anthropic data: 90% of developers stay under $12/day) |

> **Watch out**: Pro/Max plan quotas are shared with the claude.ai web interface and Desktop app. If you chat frequently on the web, your Claude Code quota gets squeezed. For a deeper analysis, see [Claude Code Cost Guide](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost).

#### Windsurf

| Plan | Monthly Cost | What You Get |
|------|-------------|-------------|
| Free | $0 | 25 credits/month + unlimited SWE-1 Lite |
| Pro | $15/mo | 500 credits/month (~$20 value) + SWE-1 model |
| Teams | $30/user/mo | Pro + centralized billing + admin controls |

Windsurf has the cheapest paid plan of the four — 25% less than Cursor. It also uses a credit system, with premium model usage consuming credits.

#### OpenCode

| Plan | Cost | What You Get |
|------|------|-------------|
| Core tool | Free | MIT open-source, bring your own API key |
| OpenCode Zen | Pay-as-you-go | Curated model gateway, per-token billing (at-cost + processing fee) |
| Black 20 | $20/mo | Access to all major models (Claude, GPT, Gemini, etc.) |
| Black 100 | $100/mo | 5x Black 20 usage |
| Black 200 | $200/mo | 20x Black 20 usage (limited availability) |

OpenCode's free tier is genuinely free — but you need your own LLM API key. Zen is the at-cost option with no markup, just a processing fee. Black is a subscription model similar to Cursor/Claude Max, providing direct access to multiple models without needing your own keys.

### Monthly Cost Estimates: Three Usage Levels

Assuming Claude Sonnet 4 as the primary model (input $3/MTok, output $15/MTok):

| Usage Level | Cursor | Claude Code | Windsurf | OpenCode (BYO Claude API Key) |
|-------------|--------|-------------|----------|-------------------------------|
| Light (~30 min/day) | $20 (Pro sufficient) | $20 (Pro sufficient) | $15 | ~$30-60/mo (API costs) |
| Moderate (2-3 hrs/day) | $20-60 (Pro or Pro+) | $100-200 (Max) | $15 (may run out of credits) | ~$120-180/mo (API costs) |
| Heavy (6+ hrs/day) | $60-200 (Pro+ or Ultra) | $200+ (Max 20x or API) | $15+ (need add-on credits) | ~$300-500/mo (API costs) |

> In TWD (1 USD ≈ 32 TWD): Cursor Pro ≈ 640 TWD/mo, Windsurf Pro ≈ 480 TWD/mo, Claude Code Max 20x ≈ 6,400 TWD/mo.

**Key insights**:

1. **Light users**: Windsurf at $15 is the best deal, or Cursor at $20 for the most complete IDE experience
2. **Moderate users**: Claude Code Max 5x ($100) is the value sweet spot
3. **Heavy users**: Claude Code Max 20x ($200) is much cheaper than equivalent API usage; OpenCode + API actually becomes the most expensive at heavy usage
4. **Zero budget**: OpenCode free + free models (e.g., Ollama running CodeLlama locally) is the only option, but the performance gap is significant

---

## 5. The Ecosystem Battle: Anthropic's Crackdown and Open vs Closed

On January 9, 2026, Anthropic deployed server-side protections to block all unauthorized OAuth token access. This was more than a technical incident — it marked a watershed moment for the AI tools ecosystem.

### What Happened?

OpenCode (formerly OpenClaw) had been spoofing Claude Code's HTTP headers, allowing users to access Claude models using their Claude Pro/Max subscription OAuth tokens. Combined with an automated loop technique the community dubbed "Ralph Wiggum," users could run AI agents overnight non-stop, causing infrastructure costs to balloon.

Anthropic's response was blunt: block all third-party OAuth access and temporarily suspend some accounts.

> **Full analysis**: [Claude Code Cost Guide: How the OpenClaw OAuth Ban Helps You Choose Between Pro/Max/API](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost)

### Community Reactions

- **DHH** (Ruby on Rails creator) publicly called it a "terrible policy"
- **George Hotz** (tinygrad founder) wrote [Anthropic is making a huge mistake](https://geohot.github.io/blog/jekyll/update/2026/01/15/anthropic-huge-mistake.html)
- **OpenAI** moved to work with OpenCode on Codex integration, welcoming it to connect with GPT-series models
- OpenCode committed `973715f` (titled "anthropic legal requests"), officially removing Claude OAuth support and switching to OpenAI Codex, GitHub, GitLab, and other alternative providers

### What This Means for Developers

This incident made the "open vs closed ecosystem" choice very real:

| Dimension | Closed Ecosystem (Claude Code) | Open Ecosystem (OpenCode) |
|-----------|-------------------------------|--------------------------|
| **Model Quality** | Claude family — currently highest coding benchmarks | Depends on which model you choose |
| **Stability** | Anthropic controls everything — can cut access at will | Open-source community maintained, but depends on external APIs |
| **Cost** | Subscription pricing is predictable, but Max plans aren't cheap | API pay-as-you-go — can get more expensive at heavy usage |
| **Privacy** | Your code goes through Anthropic's servers | Local model option available — fully offline |
| **Vendor Risk** | Heavily dependent on Anthropic's policies | Can switch models anytime |

**Pragmatic take**: The crackdown showed that betting everything on a single ecosystem carries real risk. Even if you're happy with Claude Code today, it's worth familiarizing yourself with at least one alternative. For more alternatives, see [OpenClaw Alternatives Guide](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide).

---

## 6. Tool Combination Strategies: 2026 Best Practices

Based on real-world experience, the best 2026 strategy isn't picking one tool — it's **combining tools based on the task at hand**.

### Recommended Combinations

#### Combo A: Primary IDE + Refactoring Specialist (Most Popular)

- **Daily development**: Cursor (Tab completions + frontend preview)
- **Large refactors / automation**: Claude Code (200K context + agentic capabilities)
- **Monthly cost**: $20 + $20-200 = $40-220/mo

#### Combo B: Budget Priority

- **Daily development**: Windsurf ($15, feature-complete enough)
- **Special tasks**: OpenCode + Claude API key (on-demand)
- **Monthly cost**: $15 + API usage

#### Combo C: Open-Source Conviction + Maximum Flexibility

- **Primary tool**: OpenCode (IDE extension mode integrated into VS Code)
- **Model selection**: GPT-4o for everyday tasks (cheaper), Claude Sonnet 4 for critical work (best results)
- **Monthly cost**: Pure API costs — pay only for what you use

#### Combo D: All-In on the Anthropic Ecosystem

- **Only tool**: Claude Code Max 20x
- **Pros**: No need to manage multiple tools — just focus on coding. Paired with the [Claude Code PRD Workflow](/posts/claude-code-prd-workflow), productivity is exceptional
- **Risk**: Fully locked into Anthropic's ecosystem — vulnerable if policies change again
- **Monthly cost**: $200/mo

### How to Choose: Decision Flowchart

1. **Are you comfortable in the terminal?**
   - Yes → Consider Claude Code or OpenCode
   - No → Consider Cursor or Windsurf

2. **Do you care about model freedom?**
   - Yes → OpenCode
   - No → Cursor or Claude Code

3. **What's your primary task?**
   - Frontend UI → Cursor
   - Large refactors → Claude Code
   - Mixed tasks → Combine tools

4. **Budget constraints?**
   - Free → OpenCode + local models
   - <$20/mo → Windsurf
   - $20-50/mo → Cursor or Claude Code Pro
   - Unlimited → Claude Code Max + Cursor (Combo A)

---

## 7. Risk Disclosure: Limitations of AI Coding Tools

Before committing to any AI coding tool, you need to understand these risks.

### 1. AI Is Not Infallible

Every AI coding tool hallucinates. Even with top SWE-bench scores, production code can contain bugs, security vulnerabilities, or logic errors. **Never blindly accept AI output** — code review remains essential.

### 2. Ecosystem Lock-In Risk

- **Cursor**: A VS Code fork — if VS Code pivots or Cursor the company has issues, your extensions and settings can migrate back to VS Code
- **Claude Code**: Entirely dependent on Anthropic. The crackdown already proved policies can change overnight
- **Windsurf**: Custom IDE — if the company shuts down, migration costs are the highest
- **OpenCode**: MIT License open-source — lowest risk. Even if the company disappears, the community can fork and maintain it

### 3. Runaway Cost Risk

API pay-as-you-go pricing can spike under heavy usage. Particularly with Claude Code's API mode and OpenCode + commercial model combos — without usage caps, a runaway automation loop can burn through hundreds of dollars in hours.

### 4. Privacy and Compliance

Your code is sent to AI company servers. For projects with strict compliance requirements (finance, healthcare, government), this may be a hard blocker. OpenCode + local models is the only fully offline option, but the performance gap is significant.

### 5. Skill Atrophy

Over-reliance on AI coding tools can lead to fundamental programming skills deteriorating. Consider regular practice without AI assistance to maintain your manual debugging and design abilities.

---

## FAQ

### Q: I'm a beginner with budget for only one tool. Which should I pick?

**Cursor.** It has the lowest learning curve (VS Code base), the most complete IDE integration, and the $20/month Pro plan covers everything you need. Once you're more comfortable with AI-assisted development, you can evaluate whether you need Claude Code's agentic capabilities.

### Q: Claude Code and OpenCode are both terminal tools. What's the difference?

The biggest difference is **model lock-in vs model freedom**. Claude Code only works with Claude models, but as Anthropic's own product, it's the most optimized and highest-performing. OpenCode supports 75+ models with maximum flexibility, but performance depends on your chosen model, and it doesn't have Anthropic's deep optimization.

### Q: What exactly makes Windsurf's Cascade better than other tools?

Cascade's core advantage is **persistent context understanding**. Other tools reload context with each new conversation (or require you to provide it manually) — Cascade remembers your previous actions in the project. The longer you work on the same project, the more pronounced this advantage becomes.

### Q: Will Anthropic crack down on more things?

Nobody can predict for certain, but the trend suggests Anthropic is tightening its ecosystem. If you're heavily reliant on Claude models but don't want to be locked in, OpenCode + Claude API key is a compromise — you pay normal API fees, and Anthropic has no reason to block that.

### Q: Is OpenCode really free? Are there hidden costs?

The OpenCode tool itself is MIT License, completely free. The hidden cost is **LLM API fees**. If you use Claude or GPT-4o, costs depend on usage volume. The only truly free setup is running local open-source models via Ollama (like CodeLlama or DeepSeek Coder), but there's a noticeable performance gap compared to commercial models.

### Q: Can these tools be used together? Will they conflict?

Absolutely — no conflicts. Cursor and Windsurf operate at the IDE level, while Claude Code and OpenCode operate at the terminal level. They run independently. OpenCode even offers a Cursor extension, letting you use OpenCode inside Cursor.

---

## Conclusion: There's No Best Tool — Only the Best Combination

In the 2026 AI coding tool landscape, each of the four contenders has a clear niche:

- Want the **smoothest IDE experience** → Cursor
- Want the **strongest AI autonomy** → Claude Code
- Want the **cheapest complete solution** → Windsurf
- Want the **most model freedom** → OpenCode

But more importantly, the Anthropic crackdown taught us one thing: **don't put all your eggs in one basket.**

The most pragmatic strategy is combining tools by scenario while ensuring you're familiar with at least one alternative. The AI tools ecosystem is still evolving rapidly — today's best choice might not work in six months. Staying flexible matters more than picking the "right" tool.

**Next steps**:
1. Start with your biggest pain point and try one tool for a week
2. Read the [Claude Code Cost Guide](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost) to understand the cost structure
3. If you want to try an open-source option, check out the [OpenClaw Alternatives Guide](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide)

---

## OpenCode vs Anthropic Case: The Open vs Closed Debate Over AI Coding Tools in 2026 <a id="opencode-anthropic-legal-controversy-2026"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/opencode-anthropic-legal-controversy-2026
Date: 2026-02-20
Tools: OpenCode, Claude Code, OpenCode Zen, OpenCode Black
Concepts: AI 編程工具, 開源 vs 封閉生態, vendor lock-in, OAuth 認證, 開發者工具選擇

### Summary
After hitting 100K GitHub stars, OpenCode had its Claude OAuth access revoked by Anthropic — triggering a significant open vs closed debate in AI coding tools. Full breakdown, community reactions, and developer strategies.

### Content
# OpenCode vs Anthropic Case: The Open vs Closed Debate Over AI Coding Tools in 2026

At 2:20 AM UTC on January 9, 2026, Anthropic activated server-side protections, restricting third-party tools from accessing Claude models via OAuth. Over the following six weeks, Anthropic updated its requirements for projects like OpenCode, ultimately leading to the removal of all Claude OAuth code on February 19. This sequence of events — from technical blocking to updated documentation — targeted the fastest-growing open-source AI coding project on GitHub: OpenCode.

This wasn't just a technical lockout. It reflected a core debate of 2026 in AI developer tools: should model companies get to dictate which tools developers use? When you're paying $200 a month, are you buying access to the model — or are you locked into a specific interface?

This article reconstructs the full timeline, offers a balanced analysis of both sides, and provides actionable strategies you can use right now.

## TL;DR

- OpenCode is the fastest-growing open-source AI coding tool of 2026 (100K+ GitHub stars, 2.5M monthly active developers), supporting 75+ model providers
- Anthropic's existing ToS already prohibited non-API-Key automated access; after OpenCode spoofed Claude Code's HTTP headers, Anthropic activated technical blocking on January 9 and formally banned third-party OAuth via legal documentation on February 19, forcing OpenCode to remove its Claude OAuth code the same day
- The community split: critics argued "you trained your models on our code, now you block open-source tools"; defenders said spoofing identity is a clear violation
- OpenAI publicly sided with OpenCode, allowing Codex subscriptions for third-party tools — a deliberate strategic contrast
- Best developer strategy: don't bet on a single provider — leverage multi-model switching to spread your risk

## What Is OpenCode? The Story Behind 18,000 Stars in Two Weeks

Before we get into the controversy, let's be clear about what OpenCode actually is.

OpenCode is an open-source AI coding agent built by Anomaly Innovations (formerly the SST / Serverless Stack team). Written in Go, it runs in the terminal using the Bubble Tea TUI framework. It launched in June 2025, MIT-licensed, fully open-source.

Its core value proposition is straightforward: **model freedom**. Unlike Claude Code, which only works with Claude, OpenCode supports over 75 LLM providers — Anthropic Claude, OpenAI GPT, Google Gemini, AWS Bedrock, Groq, Ollama local models — virtually every provider you can think of. In other words, you're not locked in to any single model company.

It's not limited to the terminal, either. Beyond the CLI TUI, OpenCode offers a Desktop App and extensions for VS Code, Cursor, JetBrains, Zed, Neovim, and Emacs — covering almost every mainstream development environment.

The growth numbers speak for themselves:

- Launched June 2025 → surpassed 100K GitHub stars by January 2026
- Gained 18,000 stars in two weeks in January 2026; the full jump from 39,800 to 71,900 took roughly a month
- Peak single-day gain of 2,087 stars (January 12), briefly surpassing Claude Code's total star count
- As of February 2026, monthly active developers reached 2.5 million

This kind of growth isn't just about a good product. A significant catalyst was the controversy we're about to cover.

## The Full Story: Why Did Anthropic Lock Out OpenCode Overnight?

### Existing Policy and the Spoofing Technique

One crucial fact to establish first: Anthropic's Consumer ToS (effective October 8, 2025) **already contained relevant restrictions**. Section 2 explicitly prohibits sharing account credentials, and Section 3.7 states that "except when accessing the Services via an Anthropic API Key or where Anthropic otherwise explicitly permits it," users are prohibited from accessing services through automated or non-human means. In other words, the January 9 blocking wasn't a new policy — it was **enforcement of existing terms**. Anthropic had always intended third-party services to use API Key billing, not subscription OAuth pass-through.

With that context, early versions of OpenCode did something Anthropic found unacceptable: they spoofed the `claude-code-20250219` beta HTTP header, tricking Anthropic's servers into believing requests came from the official Claude Code CLI. This meant Anthropic subscribers (particularly those on the $200/month Max plan) could access Claude models through OpenCode while Anthropic's servers had no idea the requests weren't from their own product.

### The "Ralph Wiggum" Catalyst

Things escalated rapidly after OpenCode v1.0 launched in December 2025. The community invented a technique called "Ralph Wiggum" — essentially stuffing Claude into a `while true` bash loop, letting it autonomously modify code over and over until all tests pass.

How extreme did it get? One developer reportedly completed a $50,000 development contract for under $300 in API costs. Run it overnight, wake up to finished code.

The problem: these infinite-loop agent sessions were all running on the $200/month "unlimited" Max subscription. The equivalent usage at API pay-per-use rates would easily exceed $1,000/month. Anthropic's infrastructure costs were surging while subscription revenue couldn't come close to covering them.

### Lockout Timeline

| Date | Event |
|------|-------|
| October 8, 2025 | Anthropic Consumer ToS takes effect — Section 2 (no credential sharing) and Section 3.7 (no non-API-Key automated access) already cover the relevant restrictions |
| Mid-2025 | OpenCode accesses Anthropic OAuth by spoofing Claude Code headers |
| December 2025 | OpenCode v1.0 launches; "Ralph Wiggum" automation technique goes viral |
| January 5, 2026 | GitHub Issue #6930 filed: OAuth usage violates Anthropic ToS |
| January 9, 2026, 02:20 UTC | Anthropic deploys server-side protections, blocking all unofficial OAuth access (enforcing existing policy) |
| January 9–10, 2026 | Thariq Shihipar acknowledges some accounts were incorrectly auto-banned by abuse filters; bans reversed |
| January 15, 2026 | George Hotz publishes "Anthropic is making a huge mistake" |
| Late January 2026 | OpenAI publicly supports OpenCode; OpenCode launches Black plan |
| February 18, 2026 | Thariq posts: "Apologies, this was a docs clean up…nothing is changing" |
| February 19, 2026 | Anthropic updates documentation with new "Authentication and credential use" section, formally prohibiting OAuth in third-party tools; same day, OpenCode commit `973715f` ("anthropic requests") removes all Claude OAuth code |

### Anthropic's Official Position

After the January 9 incident, Anthropic's Thariq Shihipar stated that they had "tightened our safeguards against spoofing the Claude Code harness," explaining that unauthorized harnesses introduce bugs and usage patterns that Anthropic cannot properly diagnose. When third-party wrappers malfunction, users typically blame the model itself — directly undermining platform trust.

Anthropic's core stance is that **this was not a new policy, but enforcement of existing terms**. On February 18, Thariq reiterated: "We haven't changed anything here," calling the February 19 documentation update "a docs clean up." However, he drew a clear line on usage: personal local development and experimentation are encouraged, but "if you're building a business on top of the Agent SDK, you should use an API key instead."

On February 19, 2026, Anthropic updated its service terms with a new "Authentication and credential use" section explicitly stating: OAuth tokens from Free, Pro, and Max plans may not be used with third-party tools or the Agent SDK. Teams looking to integrate Claude must use API Key authentication with pay-per-use billing. The same day, OpenCode's Dax Raad (thdxr) committed `973715f`, removing all Claude OAuth code — including the spoofed `claude-code-20250219` header, the built-in Anthropic auth plugin, and an Anthropic-specific prompt file.

## Community Polarization: Who's Actually Right?

What makes this controversy fascinating is that neither side is entirely wrong.

### The Critics

Ruby on Rails creator DHH posted on X: "Terrible policy for a company built on training models on our code, our writing, our everything. Please change the terms, @DarioAmodei."

This struck a nerve with many developers — Anthropic's models were trained on open-source code from the internet, yet the company now blocks open-source tools from accessing those models.

George Hotz (geohot) was more blunt: he predicted the lockout wouldn't drive users back to Claude Code, but would instead "convert people to other model providers." AWS Hero AJ Stuyvenberg quipped that Anthropic was "speedrunning the transition from forgivable startup to despised corporation."

GitHub Issue #6930 garnered 147+ reactions, and the Hacker News thread hit 245+ points. Multiple $200/month Max subscribers reported immediate downgrades or cancellations.

The core argument is clear: I'm paying $200 a month — I should have the right to choose my preferred interface for the model I'm paying for.

### The Defenders

But the other side deserves a hearing, too.

Developer Artem K pointed out that Anthropic's response "is the gentlest it could've been — just a polite message instead of nuking your account or retroactively charging you at API prices." Compared to how other platforms handle ToS violations, Anthropic simply blocked access without banning accounts or issuing retroactive charges — a relatively restrained approach.

The more fundamental issue: OpenCode was essentially impersonating another product. It spoofed Claude Code's identity to bypass authentication, which would be a violation on any platform. Anthropic has every right to protect its private API endpoints, just as any service provider would protect its authentication systems.

And subscription pricing is built on the assumption of "reasonable usage." Infinite-loop agent workloads completely break the economic model — this isn't a use case Anthropic envisioned when designing its pricing.

### The Overlooked Middle Ground

OpenCode was technically in violation, yes — but is Anthropic's walled-garden strategy actually smart from a business perspective? According to consumer chatbot traffic statistics, Claude's market share sits at just 1.07%. With market share already this small, pushing third-party tool users away raises a real question: is Anthropic protecting margins or accelerating churn?

The answer may lie in how competitors responded.

## OpenAI's Strategic Countermove: The Open Alliance Takes Shape

Within weeks of Anthropic's lockout, OpenAI made a telling move: it publicly "defected."

OpenAI didn't just allow its Codex subscriptions to work in OpenCode — it extended the same support to OpenHands, RooCode, Pi, and other open-source tools. Starting with OpenCode v1.1.11+, users can natively connect their ChatGPT Plus/Pro subscriptions to use OpenAI models via the `/connect` command.

Google Gemini similarly supports third-party integrations through its open API. An "open alliance" is forming, with Anthropic cast as the "closed" counterpart.

This looks a lot like a recurring script in tech history: iOS vs Android. Apple chose a closed ecosystem with controlled experiences; Android chose openness and let the ecosystem evolve freely. Android ultimately captured over 70% of global market share.

Of course, the AI model market and the smartphone market aren't perfectly comparable. Claude's benchmark performance in code generation (SWE-bench Verified 80.9% — still the highest single-model score) remains the strongest reason developers choose it. But as other models close the gap (GPT-5.2 at 80.0%, MiniMax M2.5 at 80.2%), the moat of model capability keeps getting shallower.

When that moat narrows enough, ecosystem openness becomes the new deciding factor. And Anthropic's current strategy is losing ground on exactly that dimension.

## Developer Playbook: What Should You Do Right Now?

Industry trends aside, let's get to the most practical question: how should you adjust your development workflow?

### Cost Comparison

| Plan | Monthly Cost | Model Selection | Tool Freedom | Best For |
|------|-------------|----------------|--------------|----------|
| Claude Code (Max subscription) | $100–$200 | Claude only | Official CLI only | Heavy Claude users |
| OpenCode + API Key | Pay-per-use | 75+ | Full freedom | Multi-model switching |
| OpenCode Zen | From $20 top-up | Multi-model | Full freedom | Light users, cost-sensitive |
| OpenCode Black | $20/$100/$200 | Multi-model (incl. Claude) | Full freedom | All-in-one solution |

OpenCode Zen's pricing model is worth noting: it resells model access at cost (no markup), charging only the credit card processing fee (4.4% + $0.30). Starts at $20 top-up, auto-reloads when balance runs low, with no monthly lock-in.

### Decision Framework

Choose based on your actual needs:

- **You primarily rely on Claude Sonnet/Opus and don't want to manage other models** → Stay on Claude Code Max. It has the tightest integration, and Anthropic is continuously enhancing Claude Code's capabilities.
- **You want the flexibility to switch between multiple models** → OpenCode + individual API keys. You can switch between Claude, GPT, and Gemini within the same tool based on the task.
- **You're optimizing for the lowest possible cost** → OpenCode Zen pay-as-you-go. Pay only for the tokens you actually use.
- **You want a Max-like "unlimited" experience while keeping tool freedom** → OpenCode Black $200/month plan, offering 20x base usage.

### Migration Notes

The basic migration from Claude Code to OpenCode is straightforward: install → set up API Key → start using. But a few things to watch for:

- **Custom instructions**: Claude Code's `CLAUDE.md` rules need to be manually ported to OpenCode's corresponding configuration
- **MCP Server compatibility**: OpenCode supports MCP, but specific server integrations may differ in implementation
- **Session history**: OpenCode uses local SQLite storage; Claude Code's history can't be directly migrated

## Risk Disclosure and Precautions

Before making any decisions, be aware of these risks:

**Model quality risk**: Claude still leads SWE-bench Verified at 80.9% (Claude Opus 4.5). Switching to other models may mean noticeable quality drops on certain tasks. That said, the gap is narrowing — GPT-5.2 (80.0%) and MiniMax M2.5 (80.2%) are extremely close.

**ToS compliance risk**: OpenCode Black routes Claude access through an enterprise API gateway. While this technically uses the API (not OAuth), Anthropic could tighten policies further. Don't assume what works today will work forever.

**Cost overrun risk**: API pay-per-use billing can spike dramatically with automated agents. If you're running "Ralph Wiggum"-style unattended loops, set daily/weekly usage caps. An agent loop without limits is the fastest way to burn money.

**Open-source sustainability**: OpenCode is maintained by Anomaly Innovations with commercial revenue support, but long-term maintenance of any open-source project is never guaranteed. Watch its commit frequency, community activity, and business model health.

**Data security**: OpenCode markets itself as privacy-first, storing session data in local SQLite. However, when using any third-party model provider, your code snippets are still sent to the provider's servers. If your project involves sensitive code, verify each provider's data handling policies.

## FAQ

### Is OpenCode free?

The core tool is completely free, MIT-licensed. There's no additional charge for using your own API keys. The paid offerings are OpenCode Zen (pay-as-you-go model gateway, starting at $20 top-up) and OpenCode Black ($20/$100/$200 monthly plans).

### Can OpenCode still use Claude models after the lockout?

Yes, but only via Anthropic API Keys (pay-per-use). The OAuth subscription pathway has been permanently blocked, and Anthropic's updated service terms from February 19, 2026 formally prohibit it. The OpenCode Black plan provides Claude access through an enterprise API gateway — using API billing rather than OAuth.

### Is OpenCode's coding performance worse than Claude Code?

It depends on the model you use. Builder.io's benchmark shows Claude Code is faster (9 min 9 sec vs OpenCode's 16 min 20 sec), but OpenCode scored higher on test coverage (94 vs 73 tests). OpenCode itself is just the shell — actual performance depends on the underlying model. If you're running Claude Sonnet inside OpenCode, the model capability is theoretically identical.

### Will my Claude Max subscription be affected?

If you only use the official Claude Code CLI and claude.ai, you're completely unaffected. However, if you previously used OAuth tokens through third-party tools like OpenCode, your account may have been flagged. Anthropic has stated it reserves the right to take enforcement action without prior notice.

### Is it hard to migrate from Claude Code to OpenCode?

The basic migration is simple: install OpenCode → set up your API Key → start using it. But if you heavily rely on Claude Code's custom instructions (`CLAUDE.md`), MCP server integrations, or specific workflow automations, those need to be manually reconfigured. OpenCode has its own configuration system with slightly different syntax.

## Conclusion

This controversy isn't just about one tool getting blocked. It reflects a fundamental question for the AI era: **who controls the developer toolchain?**

Anthropic has reasonable business concerns — identity spoofing is a genuine violation, and unrestricted agent usage is genuinely expensive. But with OpenAI and Google embracing openness, the cost of a walled-garden strategy is rising. As the capability gap between models continues to shrink, ecosystem openness will become an increasingly important competitive dimension.

For you, the most important takeaway is this: **don't let your workflow get locked in to any single provider.** Whether you currently use Claude Code, OpenCode, Cursor, or something else, maintain the flexibility to switch. Set up API keys with multiple providers so your toolchain won't collapse overnight because of any single company's policy change.

This isn't a critique of Anthropic or any specific company. It's a basic strategy for protecting yourself in a fast-moving ecosystem.

**Further Reading**:
- What are the costs after the lockout? See [Claude Code Cost Guide: Choosing Between Pro/Max/API](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost)
- Evaluating whether to self-host an AI Agent? Read [Should You Set Up OpenClaw? A Decision Guide](/posts/should-i-setup-an-openclaw)
- Looking for safer alternatives? Check out [Self-Hosted AI Assistant Guide: OpenClaw vs NanoClaw vs Nanobot vs PicoClaw](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide)

---

## The Complete Guide to Making LINE Stickers with AI: Step-by-Step Process and the Truth About Earnings <a id="ai-line-sticker-passive-income"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-line-sticker-passive-income
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: ChatGPT, Midjourney, Canva, remove.bg
Concepts: AI Image Generation, LINE Creators Market, Passive Income, Digital Creation

### Summary
ChatGPT has made creating stickers effortless, but making money from them is a different story. This guide breaks down the revenue split, AI labeling policies, and the full publishing workflow so you can decide before you start.

### Content
# The Complete Guide to Making LINE Stickers with AI: Step-by-Step Process and the Truth About Earnings

ChatGPT can generate an adorable sticker character in seconds, and the process of publishing on LINE Creators Market isn't complicated either. "Make passive income with AI stickers" sounds great — but "being able to make them" and "being able to make money from them" are two very different things.

Over 7.5 million creators are competing on this platform, your cut is only 35% of the sale price, and AI-generated stickers get automatically flagged by the platform. These are the things most tutorials won't tell you — and exactly what you need to know before you start.

This guide doesn't just teach you how to make stickers. It helps you do the math on whether it's worth doing at all.

## TL;DR

- ChatGPT / Midjourney can quickly generate sticker images, but there's still background removal, formatting, and sizing work between generation and publishing
- LINE allows AI stickers, but they'll be **automatically labeled as AI-generated**, and infringing on existing IP is strictly prohibited
- Creators take home roughly **35%** of the sale price (on a NT$30 / ~$1 USD sticker set, you get about NT$10.5 / ~$0.35)
- Real earnings from a small creator: ~4,000 sets sold over 14 months ≈ NT$28,300 (~$900 USD) — far from "passive income"
- Treat it as a "fun AI experiment" rather than an "income stream" and you'll have a much better experience

## Let's Look at the Numbers First — Can AI Stickers Really Generate Passive Income?

Before spending time learning the tools, let's answer the most important question: how much can you actually earn selling LINE stickers?

### Revenue Split Breakdown

The LINE sticker revenue split isn't as simple as "sell a set, keep the money." There are two layers of fees:

1. **Apple / Google takes 30% first** (for in-app purchases)
2. **LINE takes 50% of what's left**

So for a sticker set priced at NT$30 (~$1 USD):

```
NT$30 (sale price)
→ Apple/Google takes 30% = NT$21 remaining
→ LINE takes 50% = NT$10.5 remaining
→ You actually receive: NT$10.5 (~$0.35 USD, roughly 35% of the sale price)
```

> **Note**: If a buyer purchases through the LINE STORE website (not in-app), the Apple/Google cut doesn't apply, so the split is better. But the vast majority of purchases happen in-app.

### Earnings Projection Table

| Sets Sold | NT$30 × 35% | Your Earnings |
|-----------|-------------|---------------|
| 100 sets | NT$10.5 × 100 | NT$1,050 (~$33 USD) |
| 500 sets | NT$10.5 × 500 | NT$5,250 (~$165 USD) |
| 1,000 sets | NT$10.5 × 1,000 | NT$10,500 (~$330 USD) |
| 5,000 sets | NT$10.5 × 5,000 | NT$52,500 (~$1,650 USD) |

Real-world case: A Taiwanese creator shared that over 14 months, they sold about 4,000 sets and actually received NT$28,300 (~$900 USD). What does that mean? An average monthly income of about NT$2,021 (~$63 USD) — roughly the cost of a nice dinner.

### Market Reality

- **Over 7.5 million** registered creators globally (LINE Creators Market 10th anniversary data, 2024)
- **Over 1 million** creators in Taiwan alone
- Only **198 creators** worldwide have achieved cumulative sales exceeding 100 million JPY (LINE 8th anniversary data, 2022)
- Revenue is extremely concentrated at the top; the vast majority of creators earn close to zero

> **Practical advice**: If your motivation is "passive income," LINE stickers will almost certainly fall short of your expectations. But if your motivation is "having fun, learning AI tools, and maybe earning a little pocket money," then it's absolutely worth trying. Your mindset determines your experience.

## The 5-Step Workflow — From AI Image Generation to LINE Publication

### Step 1: Character Design and Prompt Engineering

The biggest challenge with AI stickers isn't "generating one image" — it's "generating 8-40 images with a consistent style."

**ChatGPT (GPT-4o) — Best for Beginners**

GPT-4o supports generating transparent-background PNGs directly, and its conversational interface lets you iteratively refine your character. In practice, its biggest advantage is character consistency: when generating the same character with different expressions within a single conversation, GPT-4o is noticeably more stable than Midjourney, saving beginners significant time on revisions.

Prompt example:
```
請幫我設計一個 LINE 貼圖角色：一隻穿著西裝的柴犬上班族。
風格：簡約手繪線條、Q版、白色背景。
請生成以下 8 個表情動作，保持角色外觀一致：
1. 開心打招呼 2. 加油打氣 3. 累到趴在桌上
4. 驚訝 5. 比讚 6. 生氣（可愛版）
7. 哭哭 8. 說謝謝
每張圖透明背景，正方形比例。
```

**Midjourney — For Unique Visual Styles**

Superior image quality and style variety compared to ChatGPT, but character consistency is a real weakness. You'll need the `--cref` (character reference) parameter to maintain consistency, and the learning curve is steeper.

**Free Alternatives**

If you just want to test the waters: Microsoft Designer (free) and Adobe Firefly (with free credits) can both generate decent sticker-style images, but they're weaker on character consistency and background control.

### Step 2: Background Removal and Image Processing

LINE stickers require **PNG format with transparent backgrounds**. Even when you specify a transparent background in your prompt, AI-generated images sometimes still have faint background residue.

**Recommended Free Background Removal Tools**

- **Canva** (free tier): Built-in background removal, intuitive interface, great for batch processing
- **remove.bg**: One-click removal with excellent results, but the free version only allows low-resolution downloads (625x400px) — high quality requires a paid plan
- **PhotoRoom**: Mobile app, great for quick background removal on the go

> **Tip**: If you're using ChatGPT GPT-4o, you can request "transparent background, sticker style" directly in your prompt. In most cases, you'll get a transparent-background PNG right away, skipping the removal step entirely.

### Step 3: Layout and Sizing

LINE stickers have strict size requirements:

| Asset | Dimensions | Notes |
|-------|-----------|-------|
| Main Image | 240 × 240 px | The representative image in the sticker shop |
| Sticker | Max 370 × 320 px | Width and height must be even numbers; leave 10px transparent margin on all sides |
| Tab Image | 96 × 74 px | The small icon shown in the chat sticker selector |

**How Many Stickers to Include**

You can choose 8, 16, 24, 32, or 40 stickers (must be a multiple of 8). Beginners should start with **8** — it's the lowest barrier and lets you validate the process quickly. You can always add more or release a sequel based on feedback.

Use **Canva** or **Figma** to create templates at the required dimensions, place your background-removed images, verify margins, and export as PNG.

### Step 4: Publishing on LINE Creators Market

1. **Register**: Go to [LINE Creators Market](https://creator.line.me/) and log in with your LINE account — registration is free
2. **Create new sticker set**: Click "New Submission" → "Stickers," then upload your main image, tab image, and all sticker images
3. **Fill in the details**:
   - Sticker set title (include English, plus local languages for your target markets)
   - Description text
   - Tags — this is critical for SEO and directly affects search visibility
4. **AI usage declaration**: If you used AI tools, **you must check the "Uses AI" option**. LINE will automatically display an AI label on the purchase page
5. **Select sales regions and pricing**: Minimum NT$30 (~$1 USD)
6. **Submit for review**

### Step 5: Review and Handling Rejections

Review typically takes a few hours to 2 days. Common rejection reasons:

- **Poor image quality**: Blurry images, rough edges, background not cleanly removed
- **Repetitive content**: The 8 stickers have overly similar compositions or expressions
- **Sensitive content**: Violence, discrimination, or politically charged elements
- **Copyright concerns**: Characters too similar to well-known IP

Don't panic if you get rejected — just fix the issues and resubmit. LINE will tell you the specific reason for rejection.

## AI Sticker Tool Comparison

| Tool | Strengths | Weaknesses | Best For | Monthly Cost |
|------|-----------|------------|----------|-------------|
| ChatGPT (GPT-4o) | Conversational workflow, strong character consistency, transparent backgrounds | Fewer style options | Beginners, fast production | $20 |
| Midjourney | Diverse styles, high image quality | Poor character consistency, steeper learning curve | Unique visual aesthetics | From $10 |
| Microsoft Designer | Free, easy to use | Inconsistent quality, weak consistency | Testing the waters at zero cost | Free |
| Adobe Firefly | Commercially safe (trained on licensed data) | Limited free credits | Creators concerned about copyright risk | Free/Paid |

> **Practical choice**: If you already have a ChatGPT Plus subscription, just use GPT-4o — no need to spend extra. It's the most beginner-friendly option for character consistency and ease of use.

## Strategies to Improve Your Odds

Standing out among 7.5 million creators isn't easy, but there are ways to boost your visibility:

**1. Pick the Right Niche**

Avoid saturated categories like "cute cats" and "cute dogs." Try instead:
- Workplace humor ("Inner thoughts during meetings," "Countdown to quitting time")
- Cultural and regional humor (local slang, holiday-specific stickers)
- Community-specific language (developer humor, healthcare worker memes, teacher life)
- Couple / relationship daily life (an evergreen market)

**2. Title and Tag SEO**

Your sticker title and tags directly affect search results. Research trending search terms in the LINE sticker shop and naturally incorporate keywords into your title and tags.

**3. Volume Strategy**

A single set of 8 stickers is unlikely to go viral. A more realistic approach: release multiple sets featuring the same character ("Shiba Office Worker Vol.1," "Vol.2"...) to build character recognition. AI tools make the marginal cost of each new set extremely low.

**4. Social Media Promotion**

Don't just publish and wait. Share your stickers and the creation process on Instagram, Threads, Twitter/X, Reddit, and other platforms. "Stickers made with AI" is inherently shareable content with built-in novelty.

## Risk Disclosure and Important Considerations

### The AI Label Effect

LINE automatically displays an AI label on the purchase page of AI-generated stickers, and LINE reserves the right to determine whether content is AI-generated on its own. While there's no public data on exactly how the AI label affects sales, consumers may be less inclined to buy — especially when there's an abundance of "hand-drawn feel" stickers to choose from.

### Copyright and Intellectual Property Risks

LINE's review guidelines explicitly prohibit infringing on third-party intellectual property, including the use of cartoon characters, celebrity likenesses, brand trademarks, and other protected elements. When using AI to generate images, avoid prompts like "Ghibli style" or "Disney character" that may produce infringing content.

Additionally, images generated purely from AI prompts are currently not protected by copyright in the United States. This means your stickers could theoretically be copied by others with no legal recourse. If you make substantial creative modifications to the images (such as recoloring or adding hand-drawn elements), you may be able to claim protection. Legal positions vary by country and are still evolving.

### Sunk Cost Risk

- ChatGPT Plus costs $20/month
- Time invested in creation and promotion each month
- Expected income may be zero

If you spend 3 months, invest $60 in tool costs and dozens of hours, yet only earn $15 in revenue, that's a losing investment. Be honest with yourself before you start: are you doing this for fun, or for money?

### Extreme Market Saturation

7.5 million creators competing for limited attention. New sticker sets get a very brief window of exposure after launch, and without external promotion, they're virtually impossible to discover organically. LINE's search and recommendation algorithms heavily favor popular stickers that already have sales momentum.

### Platform Policy Changes

LINE can adjust its AI sticker policies, revenue splits, or review standards at any time. Starting February 2015, LINE stopped absorbing the Apple/Google 30% platform fee on behalf of creators, dropping the creator's effective share from 50% to roughly 35% of the sale price. Platform rules can change without warning — putting all your eggs in one basket is inherently risky.

## FAQ

**Q1: Does it cost money to publish AI stickers on LINE?**

A: No. Registration and publishing on LINE Creators Market are completely free — all you need is a LINE account. The only cost is the AI tool you use (e.g., ChatGPT Plus at $20/month), but there are free alternatives you can use to try it at zero cost.

**Q2: How long does it take to make and publish a sticker set?**

A: Once you're familiar with the workflow, about 2-4 hours for a set of 8 stickers (including image generation, background removal, formatting, and submission). Your first attempt may take an entire afternoon since you'll be learning the process and iterating on prompts. Review typically takes a few hours to 2 days.

**Q3: Can I use AI stickers on platforms other than LINE?**

A: The images you generate can be freely reused, but the sticker format uploaded to LINE Creators Market is LINE-specific. If you want to also publish on WhatsApp Stickers or Telegram Stickers, you'll need to handle the formatting and submission process separately for each platform.

**Q4: Do I need to know Chinese or Japanese to sell stickers?**

A: Not at all. LINE Creators Market supports English, and you can fill in sticker names and descriptions in English. That said, adding Japanese or Chinese titles is recommended since LINE's biggest sticker markets are Japan, Taiwan, and Thailand — multilingual listings can significantly expand your reach.

**Q5: Do I need to pay taxes on LINE sticker income?**

A: Yes. In most countries, sticker income is considered taxable income and should be reported accordingly. However, given that most small creators earn very little, the actual tax impact is usually minimal. Keep your LINE payment records for documentation. Note that you need to accumulate at least JPY 1,000 (~$7 USD) before you can request a payout.

## Conclusion

AI has reduced the barrier to "making stickers" to nearly zero — ChatGPT can generate a character in seconds, and a full set of 8 stickers can be done in two to three hours. But the barrier to "making money from stickers" remains high: 7.5 million creators, a 35% revenue share, and the potential impact of the AI label — these realities don't disappear just because the tools got easier.

If your goal is "have fun + learn AI image generation + maybe earn a little pocket money," this is a great weekend project. Along the way, you'll pick up skills in prompt engineering, image processing, and platform publishing — and that experience has value in itself.

If your goal is "stable passive income," you need much more realistic expectations — or you'd be better off investing your time in a side project with a higher return on effort.

Go ahead and make your first set of 8 stickers. Validate at the lowest possible cost whether you actually enjoy the process — because with earnings this modest, "enjoying the process" is the only reason you'll stick with it.

---

## AI-Era PM Skill Upgrade Roadmap — From 'Using ChatGPT' to Systematic AI Competency <a id="ai-pm-skill-roadmap-2026"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-pm-skill-roadmap-2026
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini, Cursor, Claude Code, NotebookLM, Zapier
Concepts: AI PM, 技能路線圖, Prompt Engineering, AI 工作流, 機率性思維, 職涯轉型

### Summary
98% of PMs use AI, but only 39% have received systematic training. This dual-track roadmap helps you upgrade your AI skills from 'start today' to '12 months out,' covering both enhancing your current role and transitioning into AI product management.

### Content
# AI-Era PM Skill Upgrade Roadmap — From "Using ChatGPT" to Systematic AI Competency

You use AI every day to write PRDs, summarize meetings, and run competitive analyses — but let's be honest, does that mean you actually "know AI"? According to a 2025 General Assembly survey, 98% of PMs already use AI at work, yet only 39% have received systematic AI training. As AI takes over more of the tasks that define PM work, where does your irreplaceability lie? This article offers a dual-track roadmap: whether you want to supercharge your current role with AI or transition into AI product management, you'll find a concrete action plan from "what you can do today" to "where you'll be in 12 months."

## TL;DR

- **Using AI ≠ understanding AI.** 98% of PMs use it, but only 39% have systematic training — that gap is your upgrade opportunity
- **Two tracks to choose from:** Track A "AI-Enhanced PM" boosts your current workflow; Track B "AI-Native PM" transitions you into managing AI products
- **60% of AI PMs come from non-technical backgrounds** — the real barrier is judgment, not coding
- Each phase pairs specific tools with hands-on exercises — not vague advice to "go learn AI"

## The Current State — How Big Is the PM AI Skills Gap?

Let's start with the numbers: according to a General Assembly survey of 117 PMs (across the US, UK, Canada, and Singapore), **98% of PMs use AI at work, averaging 11 times per day**, with the top 10% using it up to 25 times daily. Productboard's report echoes this trend — 100% of surveyed product teams use AI tools, with 94% using them daily.

But usage doesn't equal competence. **Only 39% of PMs have received systematic, job-specific AI training** — another 19% received only generic training, and 19% covered just the basics. Even more alarming: **66% of PMs admit to using unapproved shadow AI tools** — meaning most people are using AI in the wild, without systematic methodology or organizational support.

You might use Claude to write PRDs every day, but can you explain the principles behind prompt engineering when asked? You might use AI for competitive analysis, but can you tell which outputs are hallucinations and which are reliable?

Here's the real issue: **AI can generate PRDs, analyze data, and create presentations — when all of this can be automated, what's left of a PM's core value?**

The answer isn't panic. According to the General Assembly survey, 26% of PMs worry about eventually being replaced, but from what I've observed, the real risk isn't "AI replacing PMs" — it's **PMs who use AI well replacing those who don't**. The same survey shows that 75% of PMs using AI can focus more on strategic work, and 40% report working fewer hours. AI isn't here to steal your job; it's here to force you to level up.

## The Dual-Track Roadmap — First, Figure Out Which Path You're Taking

Before learning any new skill, answer one question: **Do you want to use AI to excel at your current PM job, or do you want to transition into managing AI products?**

These two paths require fundamentally different skill sets. I break them into two tracks:

### Track A: AI-Enhanced PM (Using AI to Supercharge Your Current Role)

- **Who it's for:** PMs who enjoy their current role and want to boost efficiency and output quality
- **Core skills:** Prompt Engineering, AI workflow design, data literacy, AI-assisted decision making
- **Goal:** Use AI to become a "one-person product team," redirecting saved time toward higher-value strategic thinking

### Track B: AI-Native PM (Managing AI Products)

- **Who it's for:** PMs looking to transition to AI product lines, or those at companies developing AI features
- **Core skills:** ML fundamentals, probabilistic thinking, AI ethics and safety, model evaluation
- **Goal:** Hold your own in conversations with ML engineers and define success metrics for AI features

### Side-by-Side Comparison

| Dimension | Track A: AI-Enhanced | Track B: AI-Native |
|-----------|---------------------|-------------------|
| Prerequisites | Any software PM can start | Requires willingness to learn technical basics |
| Learning curve | Results in 1-3 months | 6-12 months |
| Salary impact | +20-30% competitiveness on current salary | AI PM median base salary ~$200K (US market) |
| Risk | Low (incremental improvement) | Medium (requires transition investment) |

> **Salary note:** According to Axial Search's analysis of 592 AI PM job postings, the median US AI PM base salary is approximately $200,500. In Taiwan, Yourator's 2025 survey indicates entry-level AI PM salaries of TWD 800K-1.2M, mid-level at TWD 1.2M-2M, and senior at TWD 2.5M+.

### How to Choose?

- If you're **satisfied with your current role + want immediate results** → Track A
- If you're **interested in AI products + willing to invest 6+ months** → Track B
- If you're **unsure** → Start with Track A for 3 months, build your AI intuition, then decide

The two tracks aren't mutually exclusive. In fact, starting with Track A is the best warm-up for Track B — your hands-on experience using AI on the front lines becomes the most valuable intuition when managing AI products.

## Track A Skill Tree — 3 Phases from "User" to "Architect"

### Phase 1: AI User (Month 1-2)

The goal here is simple: **go from "casual usage" to "methodical usage."**

**Core skills:**
- Structured Prompt Writing (role setting, task decomposition, output format control)
- Multi-model comparison mindset (ChatGPT vs Claude vs Gemini each excel at different things)
- AI output quality judgment (identifying hallucinations, assessing completeness, cross-validation)

**Tools:** ChatGPT, Claude, Gemini

**Hands-on exercise:** Take a requirement you're currently working on, feed it to all three models, compare the outputs, and document your judgment criteria. The point isn't "which model is better" — it's training your intuition for evaluating AI output quality.

From my experience, the biggest reason PMs get stuck at this phase is relying on just one model — it's like making decisions based on a single person's competitive analysis.

### Phase 2: AI Workflow Designer (Month 3-6)

Level up from "using AI for individual tasks" to "designing AI-driven workflows."

**Core skills:**
- AI workflow chaining (multi-step task automation)
- Prompt templatization (building a reusable prompt library)
- AI + existing tool integration (Jira, Notion, Confluence, Slack)

**Tools:** Claude Code / Cursor, MCP (Model Context Protocol), Zapier AI

**Hands-on exercise:** Fully automate a recurring weekly task with AI. For example, Sprint Review summaries — pull completed stories from Jira, generate a summary with AI, auto-format, and post to Slack. This kind of task might have taken you 2 hours before; automated, it takes 5 minutes.

For a concrete example of PM workflow transformation, check out [this hands-on guide to Claude-powered PM workflows](/posts/pm-workflow-revolution-claude).

### Phase 3: AI Collaboration Architect (Month 6-12)

Level up from "personal AI usage" to "designing AI collaboration systems for your team."

**Core skills:**
- Sub-agent design (decomposing complex tasks for multiple AIs to handle)
- RAG concept application (giving AI access to your team's knowledge base)
- Team AI SOP development (standardizing AI usage to reduce shadow AI risk)

**Tools:** Claude Skills / Custom GPTs, NotebookLM, internal knowledge base + AI integration

**Hands-on exercise:** Design an "AI-assisted requirements review" process for your team — before each review, AI pre-screens requirements against historical data and existing documentation, flags potential risks, and generates a review question checklist. Run it for 2 Sprints, then iterate based on team feedback.

At this stage, your value goes beyond "knowing how to use AI" — you're the person who can **design how AI and humans collaborate**. That's the scarcest capability right now.

## Track B Skill Tree — Transitioning from Software PM to AI PM

### Foundation Building (Month 1-3)

**Core skills:**
- ML fundamentals (supervised, unsupervised, reinforcement learning — you don't need to code them, but you need to explain them)
- Data pipeline concepts (where data comes from, how it's cleaned, how it's labeled)
- Model evaluation metrics (Precision, Recall, F1 Score — knowing when to focus on which)

**Recommended resources:** Andrew Ng's Machine Learning course (free to audit, certificate requires payment), Google ML Crash Course

**The goal at this stage** isn't to turn you into an ML engineer — it's to let you read engineers' technical documents and ask meaningful questions in meetings. For example, when an engineer says "model accuracy is 95%," you should be able to ask: "On what dataset? What's the recall for minority classes?"

### Product Thinking Transformation (Month 3-6)

**Core skills:**
- Probabilistic thinking: shifting from "this feature will definitely do X" to "this feature has a 95% chance of doing X, with a 5% failure rate"
- AI product spec writing: including edge case handling, fallback strategies, confidence score thresholds
- Bias and fairness assessment: does your AI feature perform consistently across different user groups?

**Hands-on exercise:** Take a traditional feature spec you currently own and rewrite it as an AI feature spec. For example, turn "search functionality" into "AI-recommended search" — you'll discover a whole set of things traditional specs never need to define: What counts as a "good recommendation"? How do you handle cold starts? How do you monitor recommendation bias?

This mindset shift is the hardest part. Traditional software PMs are used to determinism — press a button, get a guaranteed action. AI products are different; you need to learn to make product decisions under uncertainty. From my experience working on AI feature development, the most common sticking point is PMs who can't accept that "the model can never be 100% correct," repeatedly asking engineers to fix it to zero errors. Once you redefine "success" with probabilistic thinking — say, "95% accuracy + graceful fallback" — collaboration efficiency with your engineering team skyrockets.

### Advanced Integration (Month 6-12)

**Core skills:**
- AI ethics framework (privacy, transparency, explainability)
- Cost-benefit analysis (API call costs vs. self-hosted models vs. open-source trade-offs)
- AI product Go-to-Market (how do you explain to customers that "AI is sometimes wrong"?)

**Goal:** Independently own an AI feature from 0 to 1 — from problem definition, data strategy, model selection, to post-launch monitoring and iteration.

According to Aakash Gupta's analysis, AI PM job postings doubled in 2025, with over 12,000 new roles globally. The Taiwan market follows suit, with companies like TSMC and MediaTek actively hiring AI PMs. If you're ready, the opportunities are real.

## You Don't Need a CS Degree — Breaking the Technical Barrier Myth

"I'm not from an engineering background — is this even worth learning?" This is probably the concern I hear most often.

The data gives a clear answer: according to Aakash Gupta's analysis of 18,000+ AI PMs, **60% of AI PMs come from non-technical backgrounds** — 34% from design, psychology, and liberal arts, and 18% from business management.

This doesn't mean technical skills are unimportant — it means the core of a PM's AI competitiveness is **judgment**, not coding ability:

- **Judging which problems are worth solving with AI:** Not everything needs AI; identifying high-ROI AI use cases is a PM's core value
- **Judging whether AI output quality meets the bar:** Knowing when to trust and when to question AI's output
- **Judging whether an AI solution's ROI makes sense:** Weighing API costs, maintenance overhead, and user experience gains

The real technical floor isn't "building models" — it's "asking the right questions" and "evaluating the answers." If you can do the core PM job well — understanding user needs, defining problems, measuring outcomes — you already have 80% of an AI PM's core competencies. The remaining 20% is domain knowledge you can fill in over 3-6 months.

## Risk Disclosure

Every roadmap comes with risks. Being honest about them leads to better decisions:

- **Over-reliance risk:** AI output requires human judgment as a safeguard. From experience, blindly trusting AI output without verification will eventually backfire in a critical situation — especially for data analysis and customer insight tasks
- **Shadow AI compliance risk:** 66% of PMs use unapproved AI tools, making confidential data leaks a real threat. Before processing company data with any AI tool, confirm your company's AI usage policy
- **Skills bubble:** "Knowing how to use AI tools" ≠ "understanding AI." ChatGPT's interface might look completely different next year, but structured thinking and judgment don't expire. Invest in mental frameworks, not tool-specific tricks
- **Career investment risk:** Track B requires 6-12 months of dedicated effort, which may impact current job performance. I recommend using 20% of your time for exploration without compromising core KPIs
- **Data currency:** The survey data cited in this article is from 2025. The AI field moves fast — reassess your skill development plan every 6 months

## FAQ

**Q: I can't code at all. Can I still take Track B?**

Yes, but I'd recommend starting with Track A for 3 months to build your AI intuition first. As noted above, 60% of AI PMs come from non-technical backgrounds, but foundational data literacy and logical thinking are essential. If you can work with Excel VLOOKUP and pivot tables, your starting point is already sufficient.

**Q: My company has no AI product line. Is this still useful?**

Track A is immediately valuable for any software PM. Even without AI products, using AI to boost your personal productivity makes you stand out on performance reviews. According to Productboard's report, PMs save an average of 4 hours per task using AI — that's tangible productivity improvement any company can see.

**Q: How quickly will these skills become obsolete?**

Specific tools (particular versions of ChatGPT, Claude) might undergo major changes every six months, but the underlying capabilities — structured thinking, AI output judgment, workflow design — remain effective long-term. Reassess your tool stack quarterly, but you won't need to relearn the core frameworks.

**Q: How do I convince my manager to support my AI learning?**

Lead with data: PMs save an average of 4 hours per task using AI. I'd suggest completing Track A Phase 1 on your own first, producing concrete results (like an automated Sprint Review workflow), then presenting those results when proposing a systematic learning plan. Showing results first, then asking for resources, is far more persuasive than the other way around.

## Conclusion

In the AI era, a PM's core value isn't about "whether you can use AI tools" — it's about "whether you can design how AI and humans work together." Tools change, models iterate, but your judgment and workflow design capabilities only become more valuable over time.

The dual-track roadmap lets you choose a path based on your career goals, but regardless of which track you pick, **you can start today**:

Take a requirement you're currently working on, run it through three different AI models, and document your judgment on each output — what's good, what's problematic, what you'd change. This exercise seems simple, but it trains the most essential capability for PMs in the AI era: **judgment on AI output**.

That's where the upgrade begins.

---

## AI Presentation Tools Comparison 2026: Gamma, Beautiful.ai, Canva, NotebookLM, and Copilot Reviewed <a id="ai-presentation-tools-comparison"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-presentation-tools-comparison
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: Gamma, Beautiful.ai, Canva, NotebookLM, Microsoft Copilot
Concepts: AI 簡報, 生產力工具, 工具比較

### Summary
We tested five AI presentation tools with identical source material, scoring each across output quality, editing effort, export fidelity, and multilingual support — so you can pick the right one fast.

### Content
# AI Presentation Tools Comparison 2026: Gamma, Beautiful.ai, Canva, NotebookLM, and Copilot Reviewed

Making presentations every week, but every AI tool sounds the same on paper? I ran the same 500-word Q4 operations report through five leading AI presentation tools and scored each one across four dimensions: output quality, editing effort, export fidelity, and multilingual support. This review saves you the time of testing each tool yourself and tells you directly which one fits your use case.

> **Note:** This review was originally conducted with a focus on Traditional Chinese language support. The multilingual support scores and commentary reflect those findings, but the patterns generally apply to any non-English language workflow.

## TL;DR

- **Gamma**: Best for getting a solid draft fast, but PPT export has layout issues — better for online sharing than formal meetings
- **Beautiful.ai**: Highest design quality, but no free plan and weak non-English language support — best for English-first teams
- **Canva AI**: Most complete ecosystem, ideal if you already use Canva, but AI output tends to be outline-level
- **NotebookLM**: Completely free with high content accuracy, but export is primarily PDF and editing is limited
- **Copilot + PowerPoint**: The natural choice for enterprise users, but output is outline-style and requires an additional subscription

## Why You Need to Re-evaluate Your AI Presentation Tool Right Now

If your knowledge of AI presentation tools is still stuck in 2024, you're already behind.

**Tome is dead.** Once synonymous with AI presentations and boasting over 20 million users, Tome announced the shutdown of its presentation feature in March 2025, with Tome Slides officially closing on April 30. The founding team has pivoted to an AI-native CRM called Lightfield. Yet a large number of recommendation articles still list Tome — those articles are now completely invalid.

**NotebookLM has emerged as a free dark horse.** Google added presentation generation to NotebookLM in November 2025. It's completely free, generates slides from your own source documents, and delivers content accuracy that far surpasses the generic AI generation of other tools.

**The market is exploding.** The AI presentation generation market is projected to grow from $1.94 billion in 2025 to $4.79 billion in 2029 (CAGR 25.4%). Tools iterate every quarter, which means a review from six months ago is already outdated.

This is why you need a controlled, hands-on test based on the latest versions.

## Testing Methodology: How We Compared Five Tools Fairly

To make the comparison as fair as possible, I designed the following testing protocol:

**Standardized source material**: A roughly 500-word product Q4 operations report summary containing revenue figures, key metrics, team achievements, and next-quarter plans. This topic was chosen because it closely mirrors the everyday presentation needs of most knowledge workers.

**Unified prompt**: "Based on the following content, create a 10-slide presentation in a professional and clean style, including data visualizations."

**Four scoring dimensions** (1–5 points each):

| Dimension | What We Evaluated |
|-----------|-------------------|
| Output Quality | Layout design, content structure, and visual professionalism |
| Editing Effort | How much manual adjustment is needed after AI generation |
| Export Fidelity | Layout accuracy and format compatibility after PPT/PDF export |
| Multilingual Support | Font rendering, line-breaking, and non-English language comprehension |

## Test Results at a Glance

### Overall Score Comparison

| Tool | Output Quality | Editing Effort | Export Fidelity | Multilingual Support | Total |
|------|---------------|----------------|-----------------|----------------------|-------|
| **Gamma** | 4 | 3 | 2 | 4 | 13/20 |
| **Beautiful.ai** | 5 | 4 | 4 | 2 | 15/20 |
| **Canva AI** | 3 | 3 | 4 | 4 | 14/20 |
| **NotebookLM** | 4 | 2 | 2 | 4 | 12/20 |
| **Copilot + PPT** | 3 | 3 | 5 | 3 | 14/20 |

> **Important caveat**: Scores reflect the out-of-the-box experience. Every tool can produce solid results with enough time invested — the difference is how much time you need to put in.

### Gamma — The AI-Native Contender

Gamma is currently the most widely used AI presentation tool, surpassing 70 million users and $100M ARR as of November 2025.

**Test performance**: Gamma's strength is structural reasoning. Feed it source material and it automatically breaks the content into a logical section hierarchy, then generates matching charts and visual elements. Slides look great inside the Gamma platform — animations are smooth and layouts are clean.

**Multilingual support**: Gamma ranks among the top performers here. It handles non-English content well, demonstrating strong semantic understanding and clean line-breaking for CJK languages in particular.

**Biggest pain point**: PPT export is a serious problem. In testing, charts shifted position, fonts were substituted, and animations disappeared. If your final deliverable is a PPTX file, you will spend significant time fixing the output. The free tier also only provides 400 AI credits — once they're gone, they're gone.

**Best for**: Online sharing, internal communication, and any scenario where you don't need to export a PPT file. Gamma's shareable web link experience is far superior to its exported files.

### Beautiful.ai — The Design Quality Champion

Beautiful.ai's core technology is Smart Slides — you input content, and the system handles layout automatically.

**Test performance**: Design sophistication is the highest of the five tools. Proportions, color pairings, and typographic hierarchy are all polished, requiring almost no manual design adjustments. PPT export fidelity is also comparatively strong.

**Multilingual support**: This is Beautiful.ai's most significant weakness. Font options for non-Latin scripts are extremely limited, parts of the interface remain English-only, and AI-generated non-English content occasionally mixes character sets incorrectly. If your presentations are primarily in English, this is a non-issue. For non-English workflows, it becomes a recurring frustration.

**Pricing barrier**: Beautiful.ai has no free plan — only a 14-day trial. Pro is $12/month (billed annually); Team is $40/month (billed annually).

**Best for**: English-first presentations, teams that prioritize design quality, and professionals willing to pay for a polished tool.

### Canva AI — The Ecosystem Play

Canva's AI presentation feature is part of the broader Canva ecosystem — which is both its greatest strength and its biggest constraint.

**Test performance**: AI-generated output tends to be outline-level. It builds structure and populates basic text, but visual elements are sparse. The real value is that you can immediately pull from Canva's massive template library, image library, and design elements to fill things in. If you're already comfortable in Canva, this workflow is genuinely smooth.

**Multilingual support**: Canva performs well here, offering extensive font options and a fully localized interface across many languages.

**Pricing**: The free plan includes AI features with limited usage (approximately 50 uses/month). Pro is $15/month with usage increased to roughly 500 AI uses/month.

**Best for**: Users already invested in the Canva ecosystem, projects that require diverse design assets, and teams that value template variety.

### NotebookLM — The Free Dark Horse

NotebookLM's presentation feature was one of the surprises of late 2025. Its underlying logic is fundamentally different from the other tools: rather than generating from a prompt, it generates from documents you upload.

**Test performance**: Because output is grounded in actual source material, content accuracy is noticeably higher than other tools. There's no risk of AI hallucinating figures or fabricating data points. The visual design is functional but unremarkable — not impressive, but usable.

**Multilingual support**: Backed by Google's multilingual capabilities, NotebookLM performs well across non-English languages.

**Key limitations**: Export is currently primarily PDF (Google is rolling out PPTX export starting in February 2026). Editing has improved — the Revise feature lets you modify individual slides via AI instructions — but it still lacks the free-form drag-and-edit control of traditional presentation software. The free tier allows up to 10 presentations per day.

**Best for**: Internal reports, study group summaries, teaching materials, and any scenario where content accuracy matters more than visual polish.

### Copilot + PowerPoint — The Enterprise Integration Choice

If your organization already has Microsoft 365 licenses, Copilot is the path of least resistance.

**Test performance**: Copilot-generated presentations are outline-heavy and light on visual elements — think "a solid starting draft" rather than a finished deck. The key advantage is that everything happens natively inside PowerPoint, so export issues simply don't exist.

**Multilingual support**: Moderate. PowerPoint itself handles non-English languages without issue, but Copilot-generated content in non-English languages occasionally produces phrasing that feels slightly unnatural.

**Pricing**: Copilot requires an additional $30/user/month subscription (billed annually) on top of a base Microsoft 365 plan. This is expensive for individual users, but if an organization already has M365 licenses, the incremental cost is more reasonable.

**Best for**: Organizations with existing Microsoft 365 licenses, workflows that require native PPTX output, and teams looking to layer AI onto an existing toolchain.

## Pricing and Plans Compared

| Tool | Free Plan | Personal Plan | Team Plan | Hidden Limits |
|------|-----------|---------------|-----------|---------------|
| Gamma | 400 AI credits (one-time) | Plus $8/mo | Pro $18/mo | Watermark on free tier |
| Beautiful.ai | 14-day trial only | Pro $12/mo (annual) | Team $40/mo (annual) | No permanent free plan |
| Canva AI | Yes (~50 uses/mo) | Pro $15/mo | Teams $10/user/mo | AI usage capped on free |
| NotebookLM | Free (10 decks/day) | Plus $19.99/mo | — | Export format limitations |
| Copilot + PPT | None | ~$30/mo (incl. M365) | Enterprise licensing | Requires separate M365 base plan |

**Value observations:**

- **Zero budget**: NotebookLM (completely free, 10 decks/day covers most users)
- **Low budget**: Gamma Plus ($8/month, full-featured)
- **Design quality priority**: Beautiful.ai Pro ($12/month, but weak non-English support)

## Decision Matrix — Which Tool Is Right for You?

Rather than picking a single "best" tool, here's how to choose based on your actual situation:

**By budget:**

- **$0/month** + no editing needed → **NotebookLM**
- **$0/month** + editing needed → **Gamma free tier** (note: 400 credits is a hard limit)
- **$8–15/month** + non-English primary language → **Gamma Plus**
- **$8–15/month** + English-first + design matters → **Beautiful.ai Pro**
- **$8–15/month** + already using Canva → **Canva Pro**

**By use case:**

| Use Case | Recommended Tool | Reason |
|----------|-----------------|--------|
| Weekly internal status updates | NotebookLM | Free, accurate, no flashy design needed |
| Client proposals | Beautiful.ai or Gamma | High design quality, shareable links |
| Teaching materials / study guides | NotebookLM | Source-grounded, no hallucinations |
| Formal meetings requiring PPT | Copilot + PowerPoint | Native PPT, zero export issues |
| Marketing assets | Canva AI | Rich template library, multiple output formats |
| Rapid prototyping / brainstorming | Gamma | Fastest generation, strongest structure |

**My personal take**: Don't lock yourself into just one tool. In practice, I use NotebookLM (internal reports) + Gamma (quick drafts) + PowerPoint (formal deliverables). Most use cases don't require a paid tool — free plans cover roughly 80% of real-world needs.

## Risks and Caveats

**AI content accuracy**: With the exception of NotebookLM, which generates from your source documents, every other tool's AI can introduce incorrect data or fabricated figures into your slides. Every slide containing numbers must be manually reviewed before use.

**Pricing changes**: AI tool pricing shifts frequently. Canva, for example, recently raised its price from $12.99 to $15/month. All prices in this article are accurate as of February 2026 — verify current pricing on each tool's website before purchasing.

**Free tier limitations**: Gamma's 400 AI credits disappear permanently once used. Think carefully about your usage frequency before investing time in learning the tool.

**Data privacy**: Before uploading confidential company data to any third-party AI tool, verify your organization's security policy. NotebookLM (Google) and Copilot (Microsoft) offer more robust data protection commitments at the enterprise tier; evaluate Gamma's and Beautiful.ai's data handling policies independently.

**Export format limitations**: If your final deliverable must be a PPTX file, neither Gamma nor NotebookLM is a reliable choice at present. Always test exports before relying on any tool for a high-stakes presentation.

## FAQ

**Q: Can AI presentation tools fully replace manual slide creation?**

Not yet. Based on hands-on testing, AI-generated presentations typically require 15–30 minutes of manual adjustment before they're ready to use. The value is in eliminating the "blank page" problem, not in full automation. Treat these tools as fast draft generators rather than finished-output machines, and your expectations will be appropriately calibrated.

**Q: Which tool handles non-English languages best?**

Gamma and Canva are tied at the top. Gamma has stronger AI comprehension of non-English semantic content; Canva offers more extensive font options and a more thoroughly localized interface. Beautiful.ai has the weakest non-English support of the five and is not recommended for teams whose primary language is not English.

**Q: Is the free plan enough? When should I upgrade?**

If you're making one or two presentations per week, NotebookLM (free) is sufficient. If you're generating presentations daily, or need more refined design and export options, Gamma Plus ($8/month) or Canva Pro ($15/month) are reasonable upgrades.

**Q: Can I generate in an AI tool and then edit the output in PowerPoint?**

Yes, but the experience varies significantly. Beautiful.ai has the best PPT export fidelity; Canva's export is also solid; Gamma's export suffers from significant layout shifts that require substantial cleanup; NotebookLM currently focuses on PDF export, with PPTX support rolling out gradually.

## Conclusion

The AI presentation tool landscape in 2026 looks completely different from a year ago. Tome has exited the market, NotebookLM has entered, and Gamma has surpassed 70 million users — the competitive map is being redrawn at speed.

No single tool is perfect. Beautiful.ai has the best design but the weakest non-English support. Gamma generates the fastest but has export problems. NotebookLM is free but limited in editing. **The best strategy isn't finding the "best" tool — it's combining tools based on your specific scenarios.**

My recommendation: start from your most common presentation use case, try NotebookLM and Gamma on their free plans, and spend 30 minutes running your own actual source material through each one. You'll find your answer faster than reading any review.

---

## The Complete Guide to Claude Code Costs: Lessons from the OpenClaw OAuth Lockout on Choosing Between Pro, Max, and API <a id="openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: Claude Code, OpenClaw, Anthropic API
Concepts: Claude Code, OAuth Authentication, API Pricing, AI Agent Orchestration, Subscription vs Pay-per-use

### Summary
After Anthropic blocked third-party OAuth access, which Claude Code plan is right for you — Pro, Max, or API Key? A full cost comparison and decision framework.

### Content
# The Complete Guide to Claude Code Costs: Lessons from the OpenClaw OAuth Lockout on Choosing Between Pro, Max, and API

In January 2026, Anthropic shut down all third-party tools accessing Claude Code via OAuth tokens overnight. The OpenClaw community erupted. Behind this controversy lies a question every Claude Code user should be able to answer: **What's the real difference between a subscription (Pro/Max) and an API Key? And which plan is right for you?**

This article covers the full story, Anthropic's official policy, and a practical cost analysis to give you a clear decision framework.

---

## TL;DR

- **Anthropic has explicitly banned** third-party tools from using OAuth tokens — OpenClaw and similar tools must use API Keys
- **Pro ($20/mo)** suits light exploration, **Max ($200/mo)** suits daily heavy development, **API** suits teams and automation
- Per Anthropic's official data, 90% of developers spend less than $12/day on API usage (~$360/mo), making Max 20x the better deal for most individual developers
- The biggest subscription trap: **opaque usage limits** + **shared quota across claude.ai / Claude Code / Desktop**
- The key isn't "which is cheaper" — it's "what's your usage pattern"

---

## 1. The OpenClaw Craze and the OAuth Lockout

### What Is OpenClaw?

OpenClaw (nicknamed "Lobster AI" in some communities) is a self-hosted AI agent orchestration platform with over **180,000+ GitHub stars** as of February 2026. It connects to external LLMs (Claude, GPT, DeepSeek, etc.) via a local gateway, letting users command AI agents through messaging platforms like Signal, Telegram, and Discord.

### Why Did It Go Viral?

The driving force boils down to one word: **savings**.

Some users discovered they could use the OAuth token from their Claude Pro/Max subscription (`CLAUDE_CODE_OAUTH_TOKEN`) to bypass API billing, enjoying virtually unlimited token usage for a flat monthly fee. With the Max 20x plan at $200/month versus equivalent API usage that could exceed $1,000/month, the price gap was over 5x.

Once this "loophole" spread — combined with OpenClaw removing Claude Code's rate limits and enabling overnight automation loops — the community exploded.

### Timeline of Events

| Date | Event |
|------|-------|
| September 2025 | `CLAUDE_CODE_OAUTH_TOKEN` authentication issues first appear on GitHub Issues |
| January 5–9, 2026 | Anthropic progressively deploys technical safeguards, blocking third-party OAuth access |
| January 9, 2026 02:20 UTC | Anthropic engineer publicly states: "tightened our safeguards against spoofing the Claude Code harness" |
| January 12, 2026 | Previously banned accounts are unbanned; users can DM to request restoration |
| February 2026 | Official clarification: OAuth tokens must not be used with unofficial tools |

Community reaction was intense. DHH called the move "very customer hostile," the Hacker News thread garnered 245+ points, and the related GitHub Issue received 147+ reactions.

---

## 2. Anthropic's Official Policy: What You Can and Can't Do

### Policy Red Lines at a Glance

Based on Anthropic's Terms of Service and latest updates, the rules are clear:

**What's allowed:**
- Using the **official Claude Code CLI** with a Pro/Max subscription (this is the intended use case)
- Using an **API Key** with any third-party tool (OpenClaw, Cursor, etc.), billed per usage

**What's not allowed:**
- Using an **OAuth token** with third-party tools — even if you have a paid Pro/Max subscription

The key ToS clause states: "accessing the service through automated or non-human means, unless using an Anthropic API Key or with explicit permission." OAuth tokens are officially scoped to the Claude Code CLI only.

### How Does Anthropic Enforce This?

Anthropic implemented **client fingerprinting** to detect whether requests come from the official Claude Code client. Non-official clients receive this error:

> "This credential is only authorized for use with Claude Code and cannot be used for other API requests"

### The Agent SDK Situation

It's worth noting that the Claude Agent SDK currently **only supports API Keys** — Max subscription billing is not supported. This creates an inconsistency: the CLI can use Max quota, but programmatic calls cannot. For developers integrating automated workflows, this is a real limitation.

---

## 3. Full Cost Comparison: Pro vs. Max vs. API

### Plan Overview

| Plan | Monthly Cost | Claude Code Usage (5hr window) | Use Case | Hidden Limits |
|------|-------------|------|----------|---------------|
| **Pro** | $20/mo | ~45 messages | Light use, learning | Shared quota with claude.ai / Desktop |
| **Max 5x** | $100/mo | ~225 messages | Daily development | 7-day rolling cap |
| **Max 20x** | $200/mo | ~900 messages | Heavy development | 7-day rolling cap |
| **API (Sonnet 4)** | Pay-per-use | Unlimited | Teams / automation | $3 input / $15 output per MTok (million tokens) |
| **API (Opus 4.6)** | Pay-per-use | Unlimited | Highest quality needs | $5 input / $25 output per MTok |

### The Two-Tier Subscription Limit

When using Claude Code on a subscription plan, you'll encounter **two layers of limits**:

**Layer 1: 5-hour rolling window.** Starting from your first message, you get a fixed message quota over 5 hours. Pro gets about 45, Max 5x about 225, and Max 20x about 900. Once depleted, you wait for the window to reset.

**Layer 2: 7-day rolling cap.** Even if you don't max out individual windows, there's a cumulative limit over 7 days. Anthropic expects fewer than 5% of subscribers to hit this cap, but heavy users should be aware.

The easiest trap to fall into is **shared quota**: claude.ai web, Claude Code CLI, and Claude Desktop all draw from the same pool. If you spend 20 minutes chatting on the web in the morning, your Claude Code quota for the afternoon shrinks.

### API Cost-Saving Strategies

API pay-per-use looks expensive at first glance, but two official mechanisms can cut costs dramatically:

- **Batch API**: A flat **50% discount** on both input and output, in exchange for asynchronous processing within 24 hours
- **Prompt Caching**: Cache reads cost just **0.1x** the base input price — a **90% saving**. Combined with Batch API, savings can reach up to 95%

### Cost Estimates for Three Usage Scenarios

According to Anthropic's official data, the average developer spends **$6/day** on Claude Code API usage, with 90% spending under **$12/day**. Community reports on Reddit's r/ClaudeCode and Hacker News largely match this: daily feature work and debugging typically falls in the $5–$15 range, but large-scale refactors or multi-agent workflows can push daily costs to $30–$50.

Here are three typical scenarios:

**Light user (5–10 prompts/day, small fixes)**
- API estimate: ~$2–4/day → $60–120/month
- Best choice: **Pro at $20/month** wins easily

**Daily developer (20–50 prompts/day, feature development)**
- API estimate: ~$6–12/day → $180–360/month
- Best choice: **Max 20x at $200/month** is more cost-effective in most cases

**Heavy / automation user (100+ prompts/day, CI/CD, multi-agent)**
- API estimate: ~$20–50/day → $600–1,500/month
- Best choice: **API Key + Batch/Caching optimization**, since subscription limits become a bottleneck

---

## 4. Decision Framework: Which Plan Should You Choose?

### Decision Tree

Follow your use case through these questions:

1. **Do you need third-party tools or automation?** → Yes → **API Key** (no other option — OAuth can't be used with third-party tools)
2. **Are you a team (5+ people)?** → Yes → Consider **Teams plan** or **API Key**
3. **Do you need precise cost control?** → Yes → **API Key + Caching/Batch**
4. **Is your monthly usage equivalent under $20?** → Yes → **Pro**
5. **Is your monthly usage equivalent $20–$200?** → Yes → **Max 5x or 20x**
6. **Do you frequently hit rate limits?** → Yes → Consider switching to **API Key**

### The Hybrid Strategy

The smartest approach is often a **hybrid**:

- **Daily interactive development** on Max subscription (fixed cost, no bill anxiety)
- **Automation scripts and CI/CD** on API Key (no rate limits, pay-per-use)
- Set workspace spend limits in the Anthropic Console to prevent unexpected API overages

### When to Switch from Max to API

If you find yourself **hitting rate limits at least twice per week**, your Max quota is no longer sufficient. Switching to API usually makes more sense at that point — even if the monthly bill is higher, at least your workflow won't be interrupted by throttling.

---

## 5. Risk Disclosure

Before making your decision, be clear on these risks:

**Compliance risk**: Using OAuth tokens with third-party tools like OpenClaw explicitly violates Anthropic's ToS. Past incidents show accounts can be banned. While previous bans were reversed, there's no guarantee of leniency next time.

**Security risk**: OpenClaw has known critical vulnerabilities. CVE-2026-25253 (CVSS 8.8) is a remote code execution flaw that allows attackers to steal authentication tokens via malicious links. Security researchers estimate tens of thousands to over a hundred thousand OpenClaw instances are exposed on the public internet (figures vary widely depending on scanning methodology). If you use OpenClaw, make sure you've updated to v2026.1.29 or later and properly isolated it on your network.

**Rate limit risk**: Subscriptions cannot guarantee stable throughput. If your workflow depends on uninterrupted AI assistance (e.g., lengthy code refactors), hitting rate limits will break your flow.

**Pricing change risk**: Anthropic may adjust subscription plans, limits, and pricing at any time. Current terms are not locked in.

**Vendor lock-in**: Over-reliance on a single AI provider carries long-term risk. Consider maintaining architectural flexibility to switch models if needed.

---

## FAQ

**Q1: Will I get banned for using Claude Pro/Max with OpenClaw?**

A: **There's a real risk.** Anthropic explicitly blocked this usage in January 2026 and deployed client fingerprinting to detect unofficial clients. While the first wave of bans was reversed, the ToS has since been updated. The likelihood of permanent bans for repeat violations is higher. If you want to use OpenClaw, use an API Key.

**Q2: Will API Key costs really exceed $200/month (Max price)?**

A: **It depends on your usage.** Per Anthropic's official data, 90% of developers spend under $12/day on API — roughly $360/month. But with Prompt Caching (90% savings) and Batch API (50% off), actual costs can drop to $100–200/month. Heavy users without optimization could exceed $500/month.

**Q3: How exactly does the 5-hour usage limit work?**

A: The 5-hour window starts from your **first message** in that window. During this period, Pro gets ~45 messages, Max 5x ~225, and Max 20x ~900. Once used up, you wait for the window to expire. Note that this is a rolling window, not a fixed daily reset.

**Q4: If I only use the official Claude Code CLI, what's the difference between Pro and Max?**

A: The main difference is the **usage multiplier**. Pro is 5x the Free tier, Max 5x is 25x, and Max 20x is 100x. For occasional small fixes, Pro is fine. But for daily use or large-scale refactoring, Pro's quota will be exhausted within hours. The shared quota issue is also more noticeable on Pro — since the base is smaller, web usage eats a larger proportion.

**Q5: Can I get both subscription savings and API flexibility?**

A: Yes — that's the **hybrid strategy** described above. Use Max for daily interactive development (fixed cost, low mental overhead) and API Key for automation and CI/CD (no rate limits, precise billing). Claude Code supports having both a subscription account and an API Key configured simultaneously.

---

## Conclusion

The OAuth gray area is closed. Anthropic's stance is clear: **official tools use subscriptions, third-party tools use API Keys.** There's no third option.

The choice is simpler than it seems. Match it to your usage pattern:

- **Occasional use, mainly learning** → Pro $20/month
- **Daily driver, primary tool** → Max $200/month
- **Automation, team collaboration, or third-party tools** → API Key

If you're unsure, the safest starting point is **Max 5x ($100/month)** — enough for most daily development, with room to upgrade to 20x or switch to API if you hit limits.

For readers interested in setting up OpenClaw itself, check out [this setup decision guide](/posts/should-i-setup-an-openclaw) and [the alternatives security comparison](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide) for full isolation strategies.

---

## 2026 PMP Certification Guide: Exam Changes, Study Strategy & An Honest Assessment of Whether It's Worth It <a id="pmp-certification-guide-2026"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/pmp-certification-guide-2026
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: PMI Study Hall, Udemy, PrepCast
Concepts: PMP Certification, Project Management, PMBOK 8, Agile Methodology, Career Development

### Summary
The PMP exam undergoes a major overhaul in July 2026 — Business Environment weight jumps to 26%, with new AI and ESG topics. This guide covers decision frameworks, ROI analysis, and the latest study strategies.

### Content
# 2026 PMP Certification Guide: Exam Changes, Study Strategy & An Honest Assessment of Whether It's Worth It

The PMP (Project Management Professional) exam is about to undergo its most significant overhaul since 2021, launching in July 2026. The Business Environment domain weight jumps from 8% to 26%, AI and ESG sustainability become official exam topics, and both question count and time allotment have been adjusted.

Faced with these changes, you're probably wondering: should you rush to take the current exam before the changeover, or wait and prepare for the new version? And the more fundamental question — is PMP still worth the investment in 2026?

I passed the PMP back in 2017 and later wrote [a study guide for the 2021 exam version](/posts/how-to-get-pmp-2021). Having watched the exam evolve from PMBOK 6 to 7 and now to 8, the biggest takeaway is this: the exam itself has changed, employers' attitudes toward it have changed, but most PMP prep advice is still stuck in the old paradigm. This guide doesn't presuppose an answer — it gives you everything you need to make your own decision.

## TL;DR

- **Starting July 2026**, the PMP exam aligns with PMBOK 8 — Business Environment weight triples (8% to 26%), with new AI and ESG topics
- **Total investment: $1,500–$3,500** (including training, exam fee, and membership), with a first-attempt pass rate of roughly 65–70%
- Certification holders earn a **median of ~24% more** than non-holders, but PMP is a "door opener," not a guarantee
- **Before July 8, 2026**, you can take the current exam; after that, the new version applies — new study resources launch April 14
- Not everyone needs a PMP — this guide includes a decision framework to help you figure it out

## What's Changing in 2026? Full Side-by-Side Comparison

PMI has confirmed the new PMP exam will launch in **July 2026** (the last day for the current exam is July 8), aligned with PMBOK 8th Edition, released in November 2025. Here's a complete comparison:

| Item | Current Exam (through 7/8/2026) | New Exam (from 7/2026) |
|------|-------------------------------|----------------------|
| Questions | 180 (175 scored + 5 pretest) | **180** |
| Time | 230 minutes | **240 minutes** |
| People Weight | 42% | **33%** |
| Process Weight | 50% | **41%** |
| Business Environment | 8% | **26%** |
| Question Types | Multiple choice, multiple select, matching, drag-and-drop, fill-in-the-blank | All of the above + **chart/graph interpretation** |
| Aligned Material | PMBOK 7 + Process Groups Guide | **PMBOK 8** |

### Three Major New Exam Topics

**1. AI in Project Management**

The new exam content outline explicitly includes AI as a tested topic, covering AI-assisted planning, predictive analytics, automated tracking, and AI ethics considerations.

**2. ESG and Sustainability Integration**

The traditional "iron triangle" (scope, time, cost) evolves to incorporate environmental impact, social responsibility, and ethical decision-making. Candidates need to understand how carbon footprint, social value, and similar factors influence project decisions.

**3. The Modern PMO Evolution**

The exam will assess candidates' understanding of the evolving role of the Project Management Office (PMO), including the shift from a compliance-focused function to a strategic partner.

### PMBOK 8 vs. PMBOK 7

PMBOK 7 replaced PMBOK 6's process-driven approach with a principle-based framework. PMBOK 8 takes this further by integrating AI, sustainability, and other modern topics. The PMBOK 8 digital edition was released on November 13, 2025, with the print edition following in January 2026. PMI members can download the digital version for free from the PMI website.

## Is PMP Still Worth It in 2026? An Honest ROI Analysis

### Salary Data: The Gap Is Real

According to PMI's 2025 Salary Power Survey (14th edition):

- Median annual salary for PMP holders in the U.S.: **$135,000**
- Median annual salary for non-certified PMs in the U.S.: **$109,157**
- Gap of approximately **24%** (~$25,843/year)
- Holders with 10+ years of certification reach a median of **$173,000**

Over **1.4 million** professionals worldwide currently hold the PMP certification.

> **A word of caution**: Correlation is not causation. People who earn the PMP tend to already have significant experience and a commitment to professional development — traits that independently correlate with higher salaries. PMP may be a "correlated factor" rather than the direct cause.

### Total Cost Breakdown: It's More Than Just the Exam Fee

| Cost Item | PMI Member | Non-Member |
|-----------|-----------|------------|
| PMI annual + joining fee (first year) | $164 | — |
| Exam fee | $405 | $655–$675* |
| 35-hour training course | $15–$2,000+ | $15–$2,000+ |
| Study materials (PMBOK, etc.) | Free (member benefit) | $50–$100 |
| Practice exam platform | $0–$150 | $0–$150 |
| **First-attempt total** | **$584–$2,719** | **$720–$2,925** |

*Non-member exam fees vary by region: $675 in the U.S. (increasing August 2025), $655 elsewhere.

**Renewal cost (every 3 years)**: Member $60 / Non-member $150 + the time investment for 60 PDUs

> **Money-saving tip**: Join PMI first ($164 for the first year) — the exam fee discount of $250–$270 alone nearly covers the membership cost, and you get free access to the PMBOK digital edition. Udemy courses on sale typically cost $10–15 and satisfy the 35-hour education requirement — no need to spend thousands on a boot camp.

### What Employers Actually Think

PMP's value varies significantly by industry:

- **Still highly valued**: Consulting firms, government contracts, construction, manufacturing, large enterprises (PMP required for bids or promotions)
- **Increasingly indifferent**: Tech startups, software companies (prefer demonstrated Scrum/Kanban experience and delivery track records)
- **Divided**: Financial services (some require it, some don't care)

## Should You Get Certified? A Three-Minute Decision Framework

Not everyone needs a PMP. Use this framework to decide:

**Strongly recommended**
- You have 3+ years of PM experience, and your target employer or industry explicitly requires PMP
- You work in consulting, government projects, construction, or other certification-heavy sectors
- You're planning an international career move and need a globally recognized PM credential

**Worth considering, but keep expectations realistic**
- You have PM experience but your company doesn't require it — you want to formalize your knowledge
- You're transitioning into PM with some related experience and need a credibility boost

**Consider waiting or exploring alternatives**
- You want to become a PM but lack hands-on experience — build experience first, or start with CAPM
- You're a senior PM and your company doesn't require it — ROI is low; invest your time in practical skills instead
- You work in a pure Scrum environment — PSM (Professional Scrum Master) is a better fit
- You're a freelancer or entrepreneur — clients care about your portfolio, not your certifications

**Alternative Certifications at a Glance**

| Certification | Issuing Body | Focus | Prerequisites | Renewal |
|---------------|-------------|-------|---------------|---------|
| PMP | PMI | Full-spectrum PM | 36–60 months experience | 60 PDUs every 3 years |
| PMI-ACP | PMI | Agile methods | 8 months agile experience (with bachelor's) | 30 PDUs every 3 years |
| PSM I | Scrum.org | Scrum | None | Lifetime validity |
| PRINCE2 | Axelos | Process-driven PM | None | Varies by level |
| Google PM Certificate | Google | PM fundamentals | None | No renewal required |

## "Rush the Current Exam" or "Wait for the New One"? Timeline Strategy

This is the most critical decision for 2026 PMP candidates. Here are the key dates:

```
Now (Feb 2026) → 4/14 New study resources launch → 7/8 Last day for current exam → 7/9 New exam goes live
```

### Rush the Current Exam (before July 8)

**This is right for you if:**
- You've already covered 50% or more of the material
- You're familiar with PMBOK 7 and the Process Groups Guide
- You'd rather not learn the new PMBOK 8 content (AI/ESG/modern PMO)
- You can dedicate enough study time over the next 4–5 months

**Advantage**: Abundant prep materials and practice exams, battle-tested by thousands of candidates
**Risk**: Time pressure is real — if you don't pass on your first attempt, your retake may fall under the new exam content

### Wait for the New Exam (after July 9)

**This is right for you if:**
- You're just starting to prepare, or haven't started yet
- You have some background or interest in AI and sustainability
- You're not under pressure to certify by a specific date
- You're willing to wait for new study materials and practice exams to mature

**Advantage**: More preparation time, and the new exam content better reflects modern PM practice
**Risk**: Fewer study resources and community experience reports in the early months after launch

> **Practical advice**: If you're just starting your prep now (February 2026), the timeline for the current exam is extremely tight. Unless you can study full-time, aim for the new exam instead. PMI launches new study resources on April 14 — that's a good time to begin your prep in earnest.

## 2026 Study Plan (3–4 Month Roadmap)

### Step Zero: Earn 35 Contact Hours of PM Education

This is a hard PMI requirement for exam registration. Every candidate must complete 35 hours of formal PM education. Note: self-study and practice exam hours do not count — it must be a structured course (online courses qualify). CAPM holders are exempt from this requirement.

### Phased Study Plan

Below is a steady-paced roadmap for those studying while working. When I prepared in 2017, I managed to pass within a month while holding a full-time job — but that meant studying every evening after work and most of every weekend. If you'd rather not maintain that intensity, giving yourself 3–4 months is much more manageable.

**Weeks 1–2: Build Your Knowledge Framework**
- Skim through the PMBOK (7 or 8, depending on which exam version you're targeting)
- Understand the exam structure, question types, and domain weights
- Identify your personal weak areas

**Weeks 3–6: Systematic Study**
- Complete a 35-hour online course (this also satisfies the registration requirement). Recommended: [Andrew Ramdayal's PMP 35 PDU Course](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-certification-exam-prep-course-pmbok-6th-edition/) or [Joseph Phillips' PMP Exam Prep Seminar](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-pmbok6-35-pdus/) — both under $15 on Udemy sales
- Study 1–2 hours daily, taking notes and organizing key concepts
- Focus on mastering the reasoning behind situational judgment questions

**Weeks 7–10: Practice Exams + Targeted Review**
- Complete one full-length practice exam (180 questions) per week. Consider the [720-question practice exam set](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-practice-exams-pmbok-guide-6th-edition/), or for the new exam, try the [2026 PMP Mock Practice Tests](https://www.udemy.com/course/2021-pmp-mock-practice-tests/)
- Analyze every wrong answer and focus on weak areas
- Target: consistently scoring 75% or above on practice exams

**Weeks 11–12: Final Sprint**
- Review all missed questions and weak concepts
- Take 1–2 more full-length practice exams
- Schedule your exam date (leave 1–2 weeks of buffer)

### Recommended Study Resources

**Online Courses (with 35-hour certificate)**

| Course | Instructor | Highlights | Exam Version |
|--------|-----------|------------|-------------|
| [PMP Certification Exam Prep Course 35 PDU Contact Hours](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-certification-exam-prep-course-pmbok-6th-edition/) | Andrew Ramdayal | Udemy Bestseller, 4.7 stars, 300K+ students, "PMI Mindset" approach | Current exam |
| [PMP Exam Prep Seminar - Complete Exam Coverage with 35 PDUs](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-pmbok6-35-pdus/) | Joseph Phillips | Long-running classic course, continuously updated | Current exam |

> **Tip**: Udemy courses go on sale for $10–15 nearly every month. If you're targeting the new exam after July, consider waiting until April to purchase — more PMBOK 8-aligned courses will be available by then.

**Practice Exam Platforms**

| Platform | Questions | Price | Highlights |
|----------|-----------|-------|------------|
| PMI Study Hall Plus | Full mock exams + Mini Exams | ~$49–$99 | Official PMI product, closest to real exam thinking, but difficulty runs high |
| PrepCast PMP Exam Simulator | 1,930 questions | ~$139–$149 (90 days) | Industry gold standard for third-party practice exams, detailed explanations |
| [PMP Certification Exam Prep Exam 720 Questions](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-practice-exams-pmbok-guide-6th-edition/) | 720 questions | Udemy sale $10–15 | By Andrew Ramdayal, pairs well with his main course |
| [2026 PMP Mock Practice Tests](https://www.udemy.com/course/2021-pmp-mock-practice-tests/) | 720 questions | Udemy sale $10–15 | Aligned with PMBOK 8, includes AI and sustainability topics |
| [The Complete PMP Exam Simulator 2026](https://www.udemy.com/course/the-complete-pmp-exam-simulator-2026-6-mock-exams/) | 1,080 questions | Udemy sale $10–15 | 6 full-length mock exams, scenario-based questions |

**Exam Language Strategy**

The PMP exam is available in over 15 languages. For non-native English speakers, PMI offers a bilingual aid feature: you select your primary exam language and can enable a secondary translation displayed side by side. This is highly recommended — take the exam in the language you're most comfortable with, and use the secondary English (or other language) display as a reference when terminology is unclear. Note that the new exam launching in July 2026 may initially be available only in English, with additional languages rolling out afterward.

## Risk Disclosure and Caveats

Having tracked the PMP ecosystem since 2018, I've observed a clear shift in how the market views this certification. Here's what you need to know before committing:

**Certification Does Not Equal Competence**

The PMP tests your knowledge of project management concepts — not your ability to actually manage projects. Exam scenarios have "correct" answers, but real-world project management rarely does. Some of the best PMs I've worked with have never held a certification.

**Renewal Is an Ongoing Commitment**

Every 3 years, you need 60 PDUs (Professional Development Units) plus a renewal fee (member $60 / non-member $150). If you're not genuinely committed to continued learning in the PM space, this renewal cycle becomes a burden.

**Employer Attitudes Are Polarizing**

Some tech companies have moved from "PMP required" to "we don't want the PMP mindset." They view the PMBOK framework as too rigid and incompatible with agile delivery. In the job market, PMP is a plus at some companies and a minus at others.

**First-Attempt Pass Rate Is Roughly 65–70%**

PMI stopped publishing official pass rates in 2005, but industry estimates place the first-attempt pass rate at 65–70%. Retake fees are $275 (member) / $375 (non-member). That means roughly 30–35% of candidates need to invest additional time and money.

**AI's Long-Term Impact on the PM Role**

Ironically, while the new PMP exam adds AI as a topic, AI itself is automating parts of traditional PM work — scheduling, progress tracking, risk assessment. The long-term value of the PMP credential depends on how the PM role evolves, and nobody can predict that with certainty right now.

## FAQ

**Q1: Can I take the PMP exam in my native language?**

A: Yes. The current PMP exam supports over 15 languages, including Spanish, Korean, Japanese, Chinese (Traditional and Simplified), French, German, Portuguese, and more. PMI also offers a bilingual aid feature where your primary exam language is displayed alongside a secondary translation. This is highly recommended for non-native English speakers. Note that the new exam launching in July 2026 may initially be available only in English, with other language versions expected to follow.

**Q2: Can I take the PMP without project management experience?**

A: No. PMI requires hands-on experience: four-year degree holders need 36 months of project management experience + 35 hours of PM education; high school/associate's degree holders need 60 months + 35 hours. Experience must have been gained within the last 8 years. If you don't yet meet the requirements, consider starting with the CAPM (Certified Associate in Project Management), which has no experience prerequisite.

**Q3: Will my existing PMP certification remain valid after the 2026 exam change?**

A: Absolutely. PMP certifications are version-independent — it doesn't matter when you passed the exam, your credential carries the same weight. The exam update changes the content being tested, not the certifications already issued. As long as you maintain your credential (60 PDUs every 3 years), your PMP remains fully valid.

**Q4: Should I get PMP, PMI-ACP, or Scrum Master?**

A: It depends on your work environment. PMP covers predictive + agile + hybrid approaches, best for those managing diverse project types. PMI-ACP focuses on agile methods (not limited to Scrum), ideal if you work across multiple agile frameworks. PSM is focused on the Scrum framework, issued by Scrum.org, with lifetime validity and no renewal required. If you can only pick one and your work environment uses a mix of methodologies, PMP offers the broadest coverage.

**Q5: Can I pass the PMP through self-study?**

A: Self-study is absolutely viable. However, you still need 35 contact hours of formal PM education (a hard PMI requirement — self-study doesn't count). The most affordable approach is to purchase a PMI-authorized course on Udemy, which typically costs $10–15 on sale and satisfies the 35-hour requirement. Combined with the free PMBOK digital edition (a PMI membership benefit) and a practice exam platform, you can keep your total spending under $600.

## Conclusion

PMP remains the most widely recognized project management certification in the world in 2026, and the salary advantage for certification holders is real. But it's not a silver bullet — not everyone needs it, and passing the exam doesn't guarantee a promotion or a raise.

Before you decide, come back to three core questions:

1. **Does your target employer or industry value PMP?** If yes, it's worth the investment.
2. **Do you have the time and budget?** A total investment of $1,500–$3,500 plus 3–4 months of preparation — make sure you can commit.
3. **Are you timing it right?** If you're just starting now, aim for the new exam after July.

If all three answers are yes, start your study plan today. Join PMI, download the PMBOK, pick an online course — and manage your exam prep the way you'd manage a project: set clear milestones and weekly targets.

---

## What Is Drop Servicing? A Complete Guide to This Low-Cost Business Model in the AI Era <a id="what-is-drop-servicing"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/what-is-drop-servicing
Date: 2026-02-19
Tools: Fiverr, Upwork
Concepts: Business, Marketing, Productivity

### Summary
Drop servicing is a service arbitrage business model that lets you start a business with minimal skills and capital. But AI is rewriting the rules — here's which niches are dying and which are thriving.

### Content
# What Is Drop Servicing? A Complete Guide to This Low-Cost Business Model in the AI Era

Drop servicing was once considered the lightest way to start a business — no skills required, no inventory, just be a good "service middleman" and pocket the margin. But here's the 2025 reality: AI is eating into demand for basic outsourced services. According to Ramp's data, among companies that used freelancers in 2022, more than half have stopped entirely. Does that mean drop servicing is dead? Not quite. This article breaks down what this business model really looks like in the AI era: which niches you should avoid, which ones are booming, and a step-by-step process you can start today.

## TL;DR

- **Drop servicing = service arbitrage**: You take client orders, outsource to freelancers or use AI tools for delivery, and keep margins of roughly 50% or more
- **AI is a double-edged sword**: Demand for basic services (copywriting, translation, template design) is being eaten by AI, but "AI + human review" hybrid delivery creates new opportunities
- **Startup costs are extremely low**, but the real challenges are client acquisition and quality control
- **Niches worth pursuing in 2025**: AI workflow deployment, AI content quality review, customized local services
- **Not for those seeking fully passive income** — quality management requires ongoing effort

## What Is Drop Servicing? The Business Model Explained

Simply put, drop servicing is **being the middleman for services**. You're the bridge between "people who need services" and "people who provide them": clients pay you, you outsource to freelancers, and you keep the difference.

Here's a concrete example:

> A client needs a company logo and is willing to pay $500. You find a well-rated designer on Fiverr whose quote is $150. You pass the brief to the designer, receive the finished work, and deliver it to the client. **Your gross profit: $350 (70%)**.

The logic is identical to dropshipping, except you're dealing in services instead of products. The key difference:

- **Dropshipping**: Reselling physical products with relatively standardized quality and clear return processes
- **Drop servicing**: Reselling services where every delivery is customized, making quality control significantly harder

This isn't a new concept — ad agencies, consulting firms, and outsourcing brokers have been doing exactly this for years. Drop servicing simply scales it down to a one-person operation.

In terms of market size, the global gig economy reached USD 556.7 billion in 2024, projected to grow to USD 2.15 trillion by 2033. The freelance platforms market is also expanding from USD 7.65 billion in 2025 to a projected USD 16.54 billion by 2030 (CAGR 16.66%). In other words, the supply of freelancers will only keep growing — which means more potential partners for drop servicers.

## Why Drop Servicing Still Works in 2025

You might be wondering: with AI this powerful, does anyone still need outsourced services?

The answer: **yes, but the demand is shifting.**

According to Ramp's research, the share of corporate spending on labor marketplace platforms plummeted from 0.66% in Q4 2021 to 0.14% in Q3 2025. On the surface, outsourcing demand appears to be shrinking. But dig deeper and you'll find that what's shrinking is **basic, AI-replaceable services**, not all outsourcing demand.

Here's why drop servicing remains viable in 2025:

1. **The pain of managing freelancers hasn't gone away.** Finding talent, communicating requirements, reviewing deliverables, handling revisions — these management costs make many SMBs willing to pay a premium for a reliable middleman.

2. **AI lowers delivery costs but increases the middleman's value.** You can use AI for first drafts and have humans do the final quality check, drastically cutting delivery costs while keeping client pricing the same — margins actually go up.

3. **AI skills command a premium.** According to the PwC 2025 Global AI Jobs Barometer, positions requiring AI skills carry a 56% wage premium. If you can offer "AI-powered" service packages, your pricing power is significantly higher than traditional outsourcing.

## Niche Survival Analysis in the AI Era — What to Pursue and What to Avoid

This is the most critical part of the entire article. Pick the wrong niche and your drop servicing business could be wiped out by AI tools within six months.

### Avoid: Dead or Dying Niches

- **Basic copywriting**: Blog posts, product descriptions, social media captions — ChatGPT and Claude can produce serviceable drafts in seconds. Clients no longer need to pay $50–200 for outsourcing.
- **Simple translation**: For general business documents, AI translation quality is already good enough.
- **Template-based design**: Business cards, simple logos, social media graphics — Canva + AI lets non-designers handle these on their own.

The common thread: **output is highly standardized and doesn't require deep human judgment**.

### Opportunity Zone: Emerging High-Value Niches

- **AI workflow deployment**: Helping businesses build AI automation (e.g., auto-classifying support tickets, auto-generating reports). Most SMBs know AI is powerful but have no idea how to integrate it into their workflows — that's your opportunity.
- **AI content quality review**: After companies mass-produce content with AI, they need human review for quality, fact-checking, and brand voice alignment. This is the "last mile" that AI can't handle alone.
- **AI-driven SEO strategy execution**: Combining AI tools for keyword research, content planning, and technical SEO optimization — this requires strategic thinking, not just execution.
- **AI video production and post-production**: AI can generate rough cuts, but fine-tuned post-production, subtitles, sound effects, and brand consistency still need human input.

### Still Stable Niches

- **Customized local services**: Home cleaning, moving, event planning — these require physical execution and AI can't replace them.
- **Professional service referrals (legal, financial, medical)**: Highly specialized with regulatory barriers, but you can serve as a referral platform.

## 5 Steps to Launch Your Drop Servicing Business

### Step 1: Choose an AI-Resistant Niche

Based on hands-on experience building a drop servicing business, the selection criteria boil down to three questions:

1. Can AI tools complete this service in 5 minutes? If yes, stay away.
2. Does the deliverable require human judgment or customized communication? If yes, it's viable.
3. Are clients willing to pay a high price ($500+) for this? If yes, it's worth pursuing.

### Step 2: Build Your Service Provider Network

Practical tips for vetting freelancers on Fiverr and Upwork:

- **Check completed orders and ratings**, but more importantly, read the **negative reviews** — late deliveries and communication issues are the biggest red flags.
- **Test with a small order first**: Spend $20–50 on a small job to evaluate delivery quality and communication efficiency.
- **Have 2–3 backup freelancers ready** to avoid single points of failure.

Advanced strategy: Build a hybrid "AI + human" team. Use AI tools (like ChatGPT or Claude) to produce first drafts or frameworks, then have freelancers do the refinement and quality assurance. This can cut delivery costs by 30–50% without compromising the quality clients experience.

### Step 3: Set Up Your Storefront

The minimum viable version only requires:

- **A one-page landing page**: Clearly stating what service you offer, why clients should choose you, and how to contact you
- **An order intake method**: Google Forms or Typeform work fine — no need for a complex shopping cart
- **A professional email**: Use your own domain (e.g., hello@yourbrand.com), not Gmail

Tool recommendations: Carrd (free landing pages), Google Workspace (professional email), Notion (project management).

### Step 4: Set Your Pricing Strategy

The basic principle: **charge 2–4x what you pay your freelancer**.

With AI hybrid delivery, your costs are even lower and the pricing advantage becomes more obvious:

| Delivery Method | Your Cost | Client Price | Gross Margin |
|----------------|-----------|-------------|-------------|
| Freelancer only | $150 | $500 | 70% |
| AI draft + freelancer refinement | $50–80 | $500 | 84–90% |

Don't compete on price. Your value lies in **saving clients the time and effort of managing outsourcing themselves**, not in being the cheapest option.

### Step 5: Land Your First 10 Clients

Cold-starting is the hardest part. Recommended strategies:

1. **Do 2–3 jobs for free or at a discount**: Build your portfolio and collect client testimonials — this is your most important marketing asset.
2. **Actively provide value in communities where your target clients hang out**: Facebook groups, LinkedIn, relevant forums — help answer questions, build credibility, then naturally funnel traffic.
3. **Invest in long-term SEO**: Write educational content related to your niche to attract potential clients who are actively searching.
4. **Don't blow money on ads right away** — validate market demand through free channels first. Only consider paid advertising once you've confirmed people will pay.

## Drop Servicing vs Dropshipping — Which Should You Choose?

These two models are often compared. The choice comes down to your strengths:

| Dimension | Drop Servicing | Dropshipping |
|-----------|---------------|--------------|
| Startup Cost | Extremely low (tens to hundreds of dollars) | Low to medium (store setup + ad spend) |
| Gross Margin | ~50% or higher | Appears high, but ads and logistics eat most of it |
| Quality Control | Difficult (services aren't standardized) | Easier (physical products can be returned/exchanged) |
| AI Impact | Double-edged sword (threat + opportunity) | Relatively minor |
| Scalability | Limited by personnel management | Highly automatable |
| Best For | Strong communicators, project managers | Product selectors, ad specialists |

**Simple decision framework**: If you're good at managing people and communicating → drop servicing. If you're good at picking products and running ads → dropshipping. They're not mutually exclusive either — some entrepreneurs run both.

## Risk Disclosure

Before you dive in, you need to clearly understand these risks:

**Quality control risk**: The quality you promise clients is actually delivered by third-party freelancers. I've personally experienced freelancers disappearing mid-project and delivering work far below expectations — whether it's a redo or a refund, the cost falls on you.

**AI displacement risk**: The niche you choose today could be made obsolete by a new AI tool within 6–12 months. The pace of change in this space is unprecedented — you need to continuously monitor the market and be ready to pivot.

**Legal and tax risk**: Service reselling involves contractual liability. If a freelancer's deliverable infringes on someone's intellectual property, you as the service provider to the client may be held legally responsible. Consult a professional and clearly define liability in your contracts.

**Not passive income**: Drop servicing is not a "set it and forget it" model. Quality control, client communication, and freelancer management all require ongoing time investment. If you're looking for purely passive income, this isn't the right choice.

**Margin compression**: Low barriers to entry mean more people will enter the market, especially in popular niches. As competition intensifies, price wars are almost inevitable — unless you can establish clear differentiation in quality or delivery speed.

## FAQ

**Q1: Is drop servicing legal?**

A: Absolutely. Drop servicing is essentially service reselling and project management — consulting firms and ad agencies do the same thing. Just make sure you have proper service agreements, comply with consumer protection laws, and handle tax reporting correctly.

**Q2: Can I do drop servicing with no professional skills?**

A: Yes, but you need communication and basic project management abilities. You don't need to design logos or write code, but you must be able to evaluate freelancer output quality, clearly communicate client requirements, and coordinate solutions when things go wrong.

**Q3: How much does it cost to start a drop servicing business?**

A: You can start with as little as a few dozen dollars (domain + basic hosting). We recommend budgeting USD 200–500 to cover a landing page, small test orders with freelancers, and initial marketing costs.

**Q4: Will AI make drop servicing obsolete?**

A: Not entirely, but niche selection is now critical. Basic copywriting and simple translation services are being replaced by AI, but high-value services requiring human judgment (AI workflow deployment, quality review) are actually creating new opportunities. The key is choosing the right niche and leveraging AI as your delivery tool rather than your competitor.

**Q5: Is drop servicing a good side hustle?**

A: Yes, though the initial setup phase requires more time investment to build processes, vet freelancers, and land your first few clients. From experience, once your workflow is stable, 5–10 hours per week is usually enough to maintain operations.

## Conclusion

Drop servicing in the AI era isn't dead — it's evolved. Those still selling basic copywriting and simple translations will be weeded out, but those who choose the right niche and leverage AI tools to reduce delivery costs can actually find better margins in this wave of change.

Your next step is simple: pick a niche from the "opportunity zone" above that interests you, set up a landing page with Carrd today, find 2–3 candidate freelancers on Fiverr, and start providing value in your target community. Your first order might come sooner than you think.

---

## GitHub Trending Weekly 2026-02-18: Official AI Toolchains, Skills Ecosystem Forming, Backend Engineering Strikes Back <a id="github-trending-weekly-2026-02-18"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/github-trending-weekly-2026-02-18
Date: 2026-02-18
Tools: langextract, gh-aw, tambo, claude-skills, sql-tap, zeroclaw, chrome-devtools-mcp, pi-mono, Personal_AI_Infrastructure, gogcli, summarize, heretic, greenlight, portless, ClawWork, FastCode, react-doctor, vscode-dark-islands, k-id-age-verifier, ai-daily-digest
Concepts: Open Source, GitHub, AI Agents, Developer Tools, MCP, Coding Agent, Generative UI

### Summary
2/11–2/18 GitHub's most notable open source projects: Fastest Growing Top 10 + Top New Repos Top 10 coverage. langextract +6,121 stars, gh-aw HN 302 points, sql-tap HN 231 points surprisingly viral. Official AI toolchains, Skills ecosystem, backend engineering counterattack.

### Content
# GitHub Trending Weekly 2026-02-18: Official AI Toolchains, Skills Ecosystem Forming, Backend Engineering Strikes Back

> **Data Period**: 2026-02-11 ～ 2026-02-18 (Rolling 7 days)
> **Sources**: GitHub Trending weekly + monthly, GitHub Search API, HN Algolia

**TL;DR**: The biggest surprise this week is a Go language SQL tool—`mickamy/sql-tap`, which scored 231 points and 44 comments on HN, breaking through the wave of AI agent tools with pure engineering value. The weekly growth champion is Google's own `langextract` (+6,121 stars), while `github/gh-aw`'s 302 HN points signal that GitHub itself is pushing AI agents into CI/CD. `pi-mono`, `tambo`, and `gogcli` simultaneously appear in weekly and monthly trends, showing clear signals of sustained popularity.

---

## 📈 Fastest Growing — Top 10 Star Growth This Week

> Source: `github.com/trending?since=weekly`
> 🔁 = Also in monthly trends (Sustained popularity signal)

| # | Project | +Stars/Week | Total Stars | Language | Created |
|---|------|-----------|---------|------|------|
| 1 | [google/langextract](https://github.com/google/langextract) | **+6,121** | ★32,957 | Python | 2025-07 |
| 2 🔁 | [badlogic/pi-mono](https://github.com/badlogic/pi-mono) | **+3,326** | ★13,327 | TypeScript | 2025-08 |
| 3 🔁 | [tambo-ai/tambo](https://github.com/tambo-ai/tambo) | **+2,540** | ★10,641 | TypeScript | 2024-06 |
| 4 | [Jeffallan/claude-skills](https://github.com/Jeffallan/claude-skills) | **+2,461** | ★3,077 | Python | 2025-10 |
| 5 | [danielmiessler/Personal_AI_Infrastructure](https://github.com/danielmiessler/Personal_AI_Infrastructure) | **+2,263** | ★8,730 | TypeScript | 2025-09 |
| 6 🔁 | [steipete/gogcli](https://github.com/steipete/gogcli) | **+2,144** | ★4,008 | Go | 2025-12 |
| 7 | [ChromeDevTools/chrome-devtools-mcp](https://github.com/ChromeDevTools/chrome-devtools-mcp) | **+2,059** | ★25,839 | TypeScript | 2025-09 |
| 8 | [github/gh-aw](https://github.com/github/gh-aw) | **+1,872** | ★3,107 | Go | 2025-08 |
| 9 | [p-e-w/heretic](https://github.com/p-e-w/heretic) | **+1,778** | ★7,646 | Python | 2025-09 |
| 10 | [steipete/summarize](https://github.com/steipete/summarize) | **+1,628** | ★3,598 | TypeScript | 2025-12 |

---

## 🆕 Top New Repos — Top 10 New Projects This Week

> Source: GitHub Search API (`created:2026-02-11..2026-02-18`, sorted by total stars)

| # | Project | Total Stars | Language | Created Date |
|---|------|---------|------|---------|
| 1 | [zeroclaw-labs/zeroclaw](https://github.com/zeroclaw-labs/zeroclaw) | **★11,846** | Rust | 2026-02-13 |
| 2 | [bwya77/vscode-dark-islands](https://github.com/bwya77/vscode-dark-islands) | ★3,571 | — | 2026-02-14 |
| 3 | [HKUDS/ClawWork](https://github.com/HKUDS/ClawWork) | ★1,921 | Python | 2026-02-15 |
| 4 | [xyzeva/k-id-age-verifier](https://github.com/xyzeva/k-id-age-verifier) | ★1,609 | TypeScript | 2026-02-11 |
| 5 | [millionco/react-doctor](https://github.com/millionco/react-doctor) | ★1,325 | TypeScript | 2026-02-13 |
| 6 | [RevylAI/greenlight](https://github.com/RevylAI/greenlight) | ★1,060 | Go | 2026-02-11 |
| 7 | [vercel-labs/portless](https://github.com/vercel-labs/portless) | ★986 | TypeScript | 2026-02-15 |
| 8 | [mickamy/sql-tap](https://github.com/mickamy/sql-tap) | ★888 | Go | 2026-02-14 |
| 9 | [HKUDS/FastCode](https://github.com/HKUDS/FastCode) | ★820 | Python | 2026-02-13 |
| 10 | [vigorX777/ai-daily-digest](https://github.com/vigorX777/ai-daily-digest) | ★756 | TypeScript | 2026-02-14 |

---

## Weekly Focus — Fastest Growing Top 10

### 📈 #1 — google/langextract｜Google Steps In to Solve LLM Structured Extraction

> A Python library for extracting structured information from unstructured text using LLMs with precise source grounding and interactive visualization.

**Weekly +6,121 ★｜Total ★32,957｜Python｜Apache-2.0**

[LangExtract](https://github.com/google/langextract) targets the most painful part of RAG pipelines: accurately extracting fields from unstructured text. The core selling point is "source grounding"—every extracted field can be traced back to its specific location in the original text, combined with an interactive visualization interface that makes manual verification intuitive. Supports Gemini API (gemini-flash, gemini-pro, etc.), has a PyPI package, and installs directly via `pip install langextract`.

**Why it matters**: Google building its own library for structured extraction signifies that this need is fundamental and universal enough that even the model provider finds it worth creating tooling for.

---

### 📈 #2 🔁 — badlogic/pi-mono｜Minimalist Coding Agent, Four Core Tools, 1k Token System Prompt

> A TypeScript monorepo AI agent toolkit — coding agent CLI, unified LLM API, TUI library, vLLM pod manager.

**Weekly +3,326 ★｜Total ★13,327｜TypeScript｜MIT｜🔁 Monthly Sustained Hit**

[pi-mono](https://github.com/badlogic/pi-mono) is a TypeScript monorepo by libGDX author Mario Zechner. Its core is a terminal coding agent CLI `pi`: just four core tools, a system prompt under 1,000 tokens, deliberately kept minimalist. The entire monorepo also includes a unified LLM API layer (`pi-ai`), a TUI library (`pi-tui`), Web UI components (`pi-web-ui`), and a vLLM pod manager (`pi-pods`).

[Discussion on HN](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=46631390) focuses on design philosophy: the author believes "what you leave out is more important than what you add," as well as pi's non-flickering TUI and turn rollback features. `pi` is also the underlying foundation for another AI coding tool in this week's Top New Repos.

---

### 📈 #3 🔁 — tambo-ai/tambo｜Generative UI SDK, Double Hit on Weekly + Monthly Charts (HN 101 points)

> Generative UI SDK for React

**Weekly +2,540 ★｜Total ★10,641｜TypeScript｜MIT｜🔁 Monthly Sustained Hit**

[Tambo](https://github.com/tambo-ai/tambo) allows AI agents to render corresponding React components directly based on conversation context, rather than just plain text responses. Version 1.0 scored [101 points on HN](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=46966182), with engineers discussing the core question: "When should we use Generative UI, and when should we still stick to fixed components?" Trending for two consecutive weeks, the signal is stronger than a single-week spike.

---

### 📈 #4 — Jeffallan/claude-skills｜66 Claude Code Skill Packs, AI Tool Plugin Market Takes Off

> 66 Specialized Skills for Full-Stack Developers. Transform Claude Code into your expert pair programmer.

**Weekly +2,461 ★｜Total ★3,077｜Python｜MIT**

[claude-skills](https://github.com/Jeffallan/claude-skills) upgrades Claude Code from a general assistant to a "domain expert": security auditor, performance engineer, API designer... Each skill contains specialized system prompts and workflows. This points in the same direction as `anthropics/skills` and `openai/skills` appearing in monthly trends: **Agent skills are forming as an independent ecosystem**.

---

### 📈 #5 — danielmiessler/Personal_AI_Infrastructure｜Persistent AI Assistant Infrastructure That Knows Your Habits

> An open-source personalized AI platform that knows your goals, history, and preferences across every session.

**Weekly +2,263 ★｜Total ★8,730｜TypeScript｜MIT**

[Personal_AI_Infrastructure](https://github.com/danielmiessler/Personal_AI_Infrastructure) is the new work from Fabric author Daniel Miessler. Unlike stateless chatbots, it uses the "TELOS system" to record user goals, habits, and history in 10 Markdown files (MISSION.md, GOALS.md, PROJECTS.md, etc.), with a three-layer memory architecture (hot/warm/cold) allowing every conversation to pick up where the last left off. Natively based on Claude Code's hook system, supports ElevenLabs voice output and Discord notifications.

---

### 📈 #6 🔁 — steipete/gogcli｜Single CLI for Full Google Workspace Suite, Updated to v0.11

> A fast, script-friendly command-line interface for the full Google Workspace suite.

**Weekly +2,144 ★｜Total ★4,008｜Go｜🔁 Monthly Sustained Hit**

[gogcli](https://github.com/steipete/gogcli) covers all Google Workspace services with a single binary named `gog`: Gmail, Calendar, Drive, Docs, Slides, Sheets, Forms, Apps Script, Contacts, Tasks, Chat, Classroom, Keep. Using JSON-first output, it fits scripts and AI agents; supports multi-account management, OS keyring secure storage, and command whitelisting for AI agent sandboxing. v0.11.0 (2026-02-15) added Apps Script and Forms command groups. Installable via `brew install steipete/tap/gogcli`.

---

### 📈 #7 — ChromeDevTools/chrome-devtools-mcp｜Official Chrome MCP Server, Letting AI Agents Directly Control Browsers

> Official Chrome DevTools MCP server for AI coding agents to control and inspect a live Chrome browser.

**Weekly +2,059 ★｜Total ★25,839｜TypeScript｜Apache-2.0**

[chrome-devtools-mcp](https://github.com/ChromeDevTools/chrome-devtools-mcp) is the official MCP server from the Google Chrome DevTools team, allowing AI coding agents like Claude, Gemini, Cursor, and Copilot to directly control and inspect the browser via the Chrome DevTools Protocol. 26 tools cover input automation, navigation, performance analysis, network monitoring, and console debugging; underpinned by Puppeteer, launchable via `npx chrome-devtools-mcp`.

There have been [multiple HN discussions](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=45401756), with criticism focused on "essentially a Puppeteer wrapper where the agent only sees the accessibility tree"; Addy Osmani defended it in a blog post as "eyes" for AI agents.

---

### 📈 #8 — github/gh-aw｜GitHub Officially Pushes "Continuous AI" into CI/CD (HN 302 points)

> GitHub Agentic Workflows — actions, cai, ci, claude-code, codex, copilot

**Weekly +1,872 ★｜Total ★3,107｜Go｜MIT**

[gh-aw](https://github.com/github/gh-aw) is an official GitHub gh CLI extension that lets AI agents (one of GitHub Copilot, Claude Code, or OpenAI Codex) handle repo tasks directly in Actions workflows: code review, PR generation, issue triage, test fixing. GitHub calls this concept "continuous AI (cAI)".

[HN 302 points, 142 comments](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=46934107)—concentrated on two issues: the authorization boundary of AI agents in CI/CD (who approves the AI merge?), and whether this will make junior dev PR review work disappear.

---

### 📈 #9 — p-e-w/heretic｜Automatic Removal of Model Safety Alignment Using Directional Ablation (HN Buzz)

> Automatic, fully parametrized censorship removal for transformer-based language models without retraining.

**Weekly +1,778 ★｜Total ★7,646｜Python｜AGPL-3.0**

[heretic](https://github.com/p-e-w/heretic) uses "directional ablation" combined with Optuna TPE parameter optimizer to automatically adjust direction vectors in each layer without retraining, minimizing refusal responses while minimizing KL divergence from the original model. Supports dense models, multimodal models, and multiple MoE architectures, supports bitsandbytes quantization to reduce VRAM requirements. There are already over 1,000 community derivative models based on heretic on Hugging Face.

[HN Discussion (Nov 2025)](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=45945587): The technical route is considered quite ingenious; discussion is split into two camps—where to draw the line between "removing political censorship" and "removing safety guardrails"?

---

### 📈 #10 — steipete/summarize｜Universal Content Summarizer for CLI + Chrome Side Panel

> Summarize any URL, YouTube video, podcast, PDF, audio/video file, or RSS feed from CLI or browser sidebar.

**Weekly +1,628 ★｜Total ★3,598｜TypeScript**

[summarize](https://github.com/steipete/summarize) is another open source tool from gogcli author Peter Steinberger: CLI supports URL, YouTube, Podcast, PDF, audio/video, RSS; Chrome Side Panel version (v0.11+) adds streaming conversation agents and history recording. Video summarization includes slide extraction—OCR + timestamped screenshot cards. Prioritizes published captions, with Whisper as fallback. Supports OpenAI-compatible local endpoints and OpenRouter. Installable via `brew install` (macOS arm64).

---

## Weekly Focus — Top New Repos Top 10

### 🆕 New #1 — zeroclaw-labs/zeroclaw｜5 Days ★11,846, New High for Rust AI Assistant Framework

> Fast, small, and fully autonomous AI assistant infrastructure — deploy anywhere, swap anything 🦀

**★11,846｜Rust｜Created 2026-02-13**

[zeroclaw](https://github.com/zeroclaw-labs/zeroclaw) amassed nearly 12k stars within 5 days of creation, with 1,189 forks. Design philosophy is "Zero Overhead + Fully Autonomous + Swappable Components"—models, memory backends, and tool layers are all hot-pluggable, deployable on cloud or edge devices. It is the Rust-based AI assistant framework with the highest star count at birth so far.

---

### 🆕 New #2 — bwya77/vscode-dark-islands｜Bringing JetBrains Islands Dark Visual Style to VS Code

> A dark VS Code color theme replicating JetBrains' Islands Dark: floating glass panels, rounded corners, smooth animations.

**★3,571｜PowerShell + Shell｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-14**

[vscode-dark-islands](https://github.com/bwya77/vscode-dark-islands) replicates the visual language of the Islands Dark theme launched by JetBrains in September 2025, using a Custom UI Style extension to inject CSS for floating glass panels and rounded corner effects that exceed standard theme limits. Includes one-click install scripts (Unix/macOS and Windows), defaulting to IBM Plex Mono (editor) + FiraCode Nerd Font (terminal). Zero to 3,500+ stars in a week, driven mainly by developer community social media spread.

---

### 🆕 New #3 — HKUDS/ClawWork｜Evaluating AI Agent "Real Workplace Productivity" with $10 Simulation (HN Buzz)

> Economic benchmark: give an AI agent $10 and 44 occupational tasks — measure real income earned per token spent.

**★1,921｜Python｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-15**

[ClawWork](https://github.com/HKUDS/ClawWork) is an AI agent economic evaluation framework from the HKUDS lab at HKU (same team as LightRAG). Agents are given $10 simulated funds and 220 real occupational tasks (GDPVal dataset, covering 44 economic sectors), earning income by task quality and paying by token consumption—forcing agents to make strategic trade-offs between "doing tasks now" and "investing in learning first". Comes with a React + WebSocket real-time economic dashboard, supporting multi-model arenas like GPT-4o and Claude.

[HN Discussion](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=47040439): The evaluation framework design is considered closer to actual deployment scenarios than traditional benchmarks, though some question the reliability of LLM quality assessment.

---

### 🆕 New #4 — xyzeva/k-id-age-verifier｜Discord, Twitch, Snapchat Age Verification Bypass Tool (HN Discussion)

> Automates age verification on platforms using k-id by replicating its AES-GCM encrypted facial metadata payload.

**★1,609｜TypeScript｜Created 2026-02-11**

[k-id-age-verifier](https://github.com/xyzeva/k-id-age-verifier) generates legitimate-looking facial metadata payloads by replicating the AES-GCM encryption protocol of k-id (facial recognition age verification service used by Discord, Twitch, Kick, Quora, Snapchat), without needing actual face scans. Currently in an "attack and defense" loop with k-id—k-id has patched multiple times, and maintainers continue to update bypass methods.

[HN 302 points discussion](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=46982421) and 404 Media reporting focus on a core issue: **When age verification is tied to biometrics (face scans), who protects user privacy data?** The technology itself is neutral, but it has sparked broad discussion on the legality of platforms mandating biometric collection.

---

### 🆕 New #5 — millionco/react-doctor｜Let AI Agents Be Your React Doctor

> Let coding agents diagnose and fix your React code

**★1,325｜TypeScript｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-13**

The Million.js team (authors of the famous React performance optimization package) launched [react-doctor](https://github.com/millionco/react-doctor), allowing AI agents to automatically diagnose React code issues: component performance, incorrect hook usage, accessibility, etc. Topics include `skill`, designed as an agent skill to be directly integrated into workflows like Claude Code.

---

### 🆕 New #6 — RevylAI/greenlight｜Compliance Scanner Before iOS App Store Submission

> Pre-submission compliance scanner for iOS apps: detect common App Store rejection reasons before you submit.

**★1,060｜Go｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-11**

[greenlight](https://github.com/RevylAI/greenlight) lets iOS developers run `greenlight preflight` before App Store submission, running four scanners in parallel: 30+ code pattern detections (private API calls, hardcoded secrets, payment bypass, missing ATT prompt), privacy manifest verification (`PrivacyInfo.xcprivacy`), compiled IPA file analysis, and App Store Connect API remote metadata confirmation. Outputs JSON and JUnit format, CI/CD friendly; supports Claude Code and Codex skill integration for automatic issue fixing.

---

### 🆕 New #7 — vercel-labs/portless｜.localhost Named URLs Designed for Humans and Agents

> Replace port numbers with stable, named .localhost URLs. For humans and agents.

**★986｜TypeScript｜Apache-2.0｜Created 2026-02-15**

[portless](https://github.com/vercel-labs/portless) replaces port number URLs like `localhost:3000` with stable `myapp.localhost`, so AI agents calling local services don't need to memorize port numbers or break chains due to restarts. From Vercel Labs, the description specifically emphasizes "For humans and agents"—agent reachability in local development environments is starting to be taken seriously by major players.

---

### 🆕 New #8 — mickamy/sql-tap｜Biggest Surprise of the Week: Pure Engineering Tool Hits HN 231 Points Amidst AI Wave

> Watch SQL traffic in real-time with a TUI

**★888｜Go｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-14**

[sql-tap](https://github.com/mickamy/sql-tap) is a terminal TUI tool written in Go that intercepts and displays PostgreSQL and MySQL SQL query traffic in real-time without modifying application code. Scored [231 points and 44 comments](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=47011567) on HN on its creation day.

This is particularly conspicuous in a week trending with AI agent tools. Discussion focused on: lighter than pgAdmin's query analysis, more focused than Wireshark, especially useful for debugging N+1 problems and slow queries. **Pure engineering problem, zero AI packaging, and it exploded just like that.**

---

### 🆕 New #9 — HKUDS/FastCode｜Claims Codebase Understanding Framework 3-4x Faster, 44-55% Cheaper than Cursor, Claude Code

> Token-efficient framework for code understanding in large codebases: hierarchical indexing + semantic search + relationship graphs.

**★820｜Python｜MIT｜Created 2026-02-13**

[FastCode](https://github.com/HKUDS/FastCode) also comes from the HKUDS lab, targeting Q&A and navigation tasks for large codebases. Three-stage architecture: hierarchical code indexing (file → class → function → documentation), semantic structured representation (embedding + BM25), relationship graph modeling (call graph, dependency graph, inheritance graph). Supports AST parsing for 8+ languages, offers Web UI, REST API, and CLI interfaces. The paper claims to outperform Cursor and Claude Code on benchmarks like SWE-QA, but independent verification is pending community follow-up.

---

### 🆕 New #10 — vigorX777/ai-daily-digest｜Zero-Dependency Bun Script, AI Curates 90 Top Tech Blogs Daily

> Zero-dependency TypeScript/Bun script that scrapes 90 curated tech blogs, AI-scores articles, and generates a structured daily Markdown digest with trend analysis.

**★756｜TypeScript｜Created 2026-02-14**

[ai-daily-digest](https://github.com/vigorX777/ai-daily-digest) scrapes 90 top tech blogs from Andrej Karpathy's curated list (10-way concurrency, 15s timeout), uses AI to score and filter from three dimensions, and generates a daily Markdown digest containing Mermaid pie charts, ASCII bar charts, and translated Chinese titles. Six article categories: AI/ML, Security, Engineering, Tools/Open Source, Opinions, Other. AI backend supports Gemini API and any OpenAI-compatible endpoint (including DeepSeek). Pure TypeScript single file, no third-party dependencies, runs on Bun native `fetch`.

---

## Monthly Trend Comparison

Three projects in this week's weekly list also appearing in monthly trends (🔁):

| Project | +Stars This Week | Monthly Rank Direction | Sustained Theme |
|------|-----------|------------|---------|
| badlogic/pi-mono | +3,326 | Monthly Sustained Hit | AI agent toolkit full stack |
| tambo-ai/tambo | +2,540 | Monthly Sustained Hit | Generative UI |
| steipete/gogcli | +2,144 | Monthly Sustained Hit | Google Suite CLI |

Other notable signals in monthly trends: `anthropics/skills` and `openai/skills` are both in monthly trends, echoing this week's `claude-skills` breakout—**"AI Skills Market" is one of the strongest recurring themes this month**.

---

## Weekly Trend Insights

**1. Officialization of AI Toolchains**: The three most important signals this week come from big companies stepping in—Google (LangExtract), Google Chrome Team (chrome-devtools-mcp), GitHub Official (gh-aw). AI tools are no longer just a community playground; platforms are building "official channels".

**2. Skills as the New App Store for AI Agents**: claude-skills (+2,461), anthropics/skills, and openai/skills all in monthly trends, plus nicobailon/visual-explainer and MooseGoose0701/skill-compose—"Pluggable Skill Packs" are becoming the distribution format for this generation of AI agent applications.

**3. The Counterattack of Backend Tools**: sql-tap (HN 231 points) reminds us: real engineering problems always have a market. In a weekly trend dominated by AI agent tools, a pure SQL monitoring tool breaking out on engineering quality and clear problem definition is the most thought-provoking contrast this week.

---

## AI Textbook Automation Workflow for Developers: Claude Code + Pandoc <a id="ai-textbook-automation-developers"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-textbook-automation-developers
Date: 2026-02-17
Tools: Claude Code, Pandoc, Python, ebooklib, weasyprint, Calibre (Optional)
Concepts: Automated Workflow, EPUB Generation, Markdown Conversion, EdTech, Version Control

### Summary
Build a fully controllable textbook generation pipeline using Claude Code, Pandoc, and Python. From Markdown to EPUB/PDF, supporting version control, custom CSS, and automated deployment. Includes real-world case study: nihongo-claude.

### Content
# AI Textbook Automation Workflow for Developers: Claude Code + Pandoc

You used ChatGPT to generate a complete course syllabus, excitedly pasted the content into Google Docs, spent 45 minutes adjusting heading formats, fixing the table of contents, and unifying font sizes—only to spot a major error in Chapter 3 that requires a rewrite. You regenerate, copy-paste again, and adjust formatting again. This loop repeats every time you produce a new textbook.

This is the hidden cost of no-code tools: **formatting time often exceeds content generation time**. Even worse, without version control, you don't know what changed last time; without batch automation, ten textbooks mean manual operations ten times.

If you have basic knowledge of Python and command line, this article shows you how to build a **"set once, use forever"** automation pipeline: Claude Code Generation → Markdown Management → Pandoc Conversion → EPUB/PDF Output.

> **🚀 If you don't want to code**: If you just want to quickly try AI textbook generation without version control or batch automation, check out the [No-Code AI Textbook Generator Guide](/posts/ai-textbook-generator-no-code). That path only takes 1-2 hours with zero coding, and you can always come back here to upgrade to the developer workflow.

---

## TL;DR

> **📌 Key Takeaways**
>
> - **Problem**: No-code tools lack version control, automation, and batch generation support.
> - **Solution**: Claude Code + Markdown + Pandoc + Python automation pipeline.
> - **Core Advantages**: Full format control, Git version management, reusable scripts.
> - **Time Investment**: Initial setup approx. 2-4 hours, then 1-2 hours per new textbook.
> - **Cost**: Claude Pro ($20/mo, optional); Pandoc, Python, Git are free.
> - **Who is this for**: Developers familiar with CLI, technical writers, power users needing batch generation or customization.
> - **Real Case**: [nihongo-claude](https://github.com/chiweitw/nihongo-claude) — An N3 Japanese learning material planned and generated by Claude Code based on requirements.

---

## When to Choose the Developer Workflow?

Before starting, confirm if this path suits you.

**Choose the developer workflow if you**:

- ✅ Need version control — want to track changes or revert to previous versions.
- ✅ Plan to generate multiple textbooks — want reusable scripts.
- ✅ Want full format control — custom CSS, EPUB metadata, cover images.
- ✅ Prefer CLI tools and are familiar with basic Python or Shell Script.
- ✅ Need automated deployment — e.g., auto-regenerate EPUB on every Git commit.

**Do not choose this path if**:

- ❌ Just want to quickly generate one textbook (one-off project).
- ❌ Don't want to touch the terminal or write any scripts.
- ❌ Have limited time and want a finished product today.

> **⚠️ Cost Warning**: The developer path has higher upfront investment. If you only need a textbook occasionally, the ROI of the [No-Code Solution](/posts/ai-textbook-generator-no-code) is usually higher. This article assumes you are familiar with Git, Markdown, and CLI operations.

---

## System Architecture: From Requirements to eBook

The entire pipeline has only three core steps:

```
Learning Requirements
    ↓
Claude Code (Plan Course Structure + Generate Markdown Content)
    ↓
Markdown Files (Git Version Control)
    ↓
Pandoc (Conversion)
    ├──→ EPUB (Primary format, for all modern ebook readers)
    ├──→ PDF (Print / Tablet reading)
    └──→ MOBI (Optional, only for pre-2021 Kindles)
```

**Important Notes on Tool Selection**:

- **Pandoc** is the workhorse, generating high-quality EPUB directly; sufficient for most cases.
- **Calibre** is optional, only needed if you require MOBI format (old Kindles); new Kindles (2022+) accept EPUB (Amazon auto-converts to their proprietary format), so you can skip Calibre.
- **AI Tool Flexibility**: This article uses Claude Code as an example, but the workflow applies equally to ChatGPT API, Gemini API, or other LLMs — use what you're comfortable with.

### Technical Requirements

| Tool | Necessity | Installation |
|------|-----------|--------------|
| Git | ✅ Required | System built-in or `brew install git` |
| Python 3.8+ | ✅ Required | python.org or `brew install python` |
| Pandoc | ✅ Required | `brew install pandoc` / `apt install pandoc` |
| Claude Code CLI | ✅ Recommended | `curl -fsSL https://claude.ai/install.sh | bash` (macOS/Linux) or `brew install --cask claude-code` |
| Calibre | ❌ Optional | `brew install calibre` (Only if MOBI is needed) |

---

## Step 1: generating Structured Content with Claude Code

### Why Claude Code instead of Web UI?

Claude.ai web UI is great for interactive chat, but has limitations for textbook generation:

- **Inconvenient Output**: Requires manual copy-pasting to text editor.
- **No File Access**: Web UI cannot control local filesystem.
- **Limited Context**: Maintaining consistency across chapters is harder.

Claude Code (Local CLI) solves these problems:

- Runs directly in your project directory, generated Markdown files are saved locally automatically.
- Can read your `outline.md` and reference materials, maintaining consistent style.
- Integrates naturally with Git workflow.

### Setup Project Directory

```bash
# Create project
mkdir my-textbook && cd my-textbook
git init

# Create basic directory structure
mkdir -p chapters assets output scripts

# Initialize Python environment (Recommended)
python3 -m venv venv
source venv/bin/activate
pip install ebooklib markdown2 weasyprint
```

### Create Course Outline (Let AI Plan Structure)

This is the core difference of the developer path: **You don't need prepared materials**. Just describe your learning needs and let Claude Code plan the entire course structure.

Create `REQUIREMENTS.md`:

```markdown
# Learning Requirements

## What I Want to Learn
Data Analysis Introduction (Product Manager Perspective)

## My Background
- Current Role: Software Engineer, transitioned to PM 6 months ago
- Known: Python basics, basic SQL queries
- Weakness: Statistics concepts, A/B test design, Data visualization

## Learning Goals
After completion, be able to:
1. Independently design A/B tests and interpret results
2. Analyze user behavior funnels using GA4
3. Create clear data visualizations for non-tech audiences

## Course Specs
- Chapters: 8-10
- Length per chapter: Approx. 1,500-2,000 words
- Language: English
- Example Context: SaaS products, E-commerce platforms
```

### Let Claude Code Plan the Course Structure

Start Claude Code in the project directory:

```bash
claude
```

After Claude Code starts, enter the following command:

```
Please read REQUIREMENTS.md, then:
1. Design an 8-10 chapter course structure, save to outline.md
2. Each chapter includes: learning objectives, core concepts (3-5), real case topics, self-check quiz (3 questions)
3. Ensure difficulty progresses logically, suitable for learners with Python/SQL basics but weak statistics
```

Claude Code will automatically read requirements, plan the structure, and write `outline.md` to your directory.

### Generate Content Chapter by Chapter

After verifying the structure, let Claude Code generate each chapter:

```
Please generate the complete content for Chapter 1 based on the structure in outline.md.
Formatting requirements:
- Use Markdown format
- H2 for chapter main title, H3 for sections
- Attach a real SaaS product case for each core concept
- End with 3 self-check questions (with answers)
Save result to chapters/chapter-01.md
```

Repeat this step to complete all chapters. Git commit after finishing each chapter:

```bash
git add chapters/chapter-01.md
git commit -m "feat: add chapter 1 - data-driven decision framework"
```

> **💡 Quality Control Tip**: After generating each chapter, ask Claude Code to do a "Reverse Review" — ask it to point out potential errors, unclear points, or oversimplifications in the chapter. This is more efficient than manual proofreading. If you are interested in more applications of Claude Code in software development, check out the [Claude Code PRD Workflow](/posts/claude-code-prd-workflow).

---

## Step 2: Pandoc Conversion — From Markdown to EPUB

Pandoc is the core conversion tool of this pipeline. It's open-source, free, supports dozens of formats, CLI-friendly, and perfect for automation.

### Simplest Conversion Command

Check if Pandoc is installed correctly:

```bash
pandoc --version
```

Basic conversion:

```bash
pandoc chapters/chapter-01.md -o output/textbook.epub \
  --toc \
  --metadata title="Data Analysis 101: PM Guide"
```

In seconds, you have an EPUB readable on any ebook reader.

### Complete Production-Grade Conversion Command

In a real project, you need more parameters:

```bash
pandoc \
  chapters/chapter-*.md \
  -o output/my-textbook.epub \
  --toc \
  --toc-depth=2 \
  --epub-cover-image=assets/cover.jpg \
  --css=assets/styles.css \
  --metadata title="Data Analysis 101: PM Guide" \
  --metadata author="Your Name" \
  --metadata lang=en \
  --metadata date="2026-02-17"
```

**Parameter Explanation**:

| Parameter | Usage |
|-----------|-------|
| `--toc` | Generate Table of Contents |
| `--toc-depth=2` | TOC Depth (H1 and H2) |
| `--epub-cover-image` | Cover Image (1600×2560 px optimal) |
| `--css` | Custom layout styles |
| `--metadata lang=en` | Set language (affects font rendering) |

### Custom CSS Layout

Create `assets/styles.css` to give your textbook a professional look:

```css
/* Basic Layout */
body {
  font-family: "Noto Sans", "Source Sans Pro", sans-serif;
  line-height: 1.8;
  color: #333;
  max-width: 680px;
  margin: 0 auto;
}

/* Chapter Titles */
h1 {
  color: #2c3e50;
  border-bottom: 3px solid #3498db;
  padding-bottom: 10px;
  margin-top: 2em;
}

h2 {
  color: #34495e;
  margin-top: 1.8em;
}

/* Code Blocks */
pre {
  background: #f8f9fa;
  padding: 16px;
  border-radius: 6px;
  overflow-x: auto;
  font-size: 0.9em;
}

code {
  background: #f0f0f0;
  padding: 2px 6px;
  border-radius: 3px;
  font-size: 0.9em;
}

/* Blockquotes */
blockquote {
  border-left: 4px solid #3498db;
  margin-left: 0;
  padding: 10px 20px;
  background: #ecf9ff;
  border-radius: 0 6px 6px 0;
}

/* Tables */
table {
  width: 100%;
  border-collapse: collapse;
  margin: 1.5em 0;
}

th, td {
  border: 1px solid #ddd;
  padding: 10px 14px;
  text-align: left;
}

th {
  background: #f2f4f7;
  font-weight: 600;
}
```

### Batch Automation Script

Create `scripts/convert.sh` for one-click generation of all formats:

```bash
#!/bin/bash

# Configuration
TITLE="Data Analysis 101: PM Guide"
AUTHOR="Your Name"
OUTPUT_DIR="output"
COVER="assets/cover.jpg"
CSS="assets/styles.css"

# Ensure output dir exists
mkdir -p "$OUTPUT_DIR"

echo "🔄 Starting conversion..."

# Convert to EPUB (Primary format)
pandoc chapters/chapter-*.md \
  -o "${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.epub" \
  --toc --toc-depth=2 \
  --epub-cover-image="$COVER" \
  --css="$CSS" \
  --metadata title="$TITLE" \
  --metadata author="$AUTHOR" \
  --metadata lang=en
  
echo "✅ EPUB generated: ${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.epub"

# Convert to PDF (via HTML intermediate)
pandoc chapters/chapter-*.md \
  -o "${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.html" \
  --standalone \
  --css="$CSS" \
  --metadata title="$TITLE"

python3 -m weasyprint "${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.html" "${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.pdf"
rm "${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.html"

echo "✅ PDF generated: ${OUTPUT_DIR}/textbook.pdf"
echo ""
echo "📂 Output Directory:"
ls -lh "${OUTPUT_DIR}/"
```

Execute:

```bash
chmod +x scripts/convert.sh
./scripts/convert.sh
```

Output Structure:

```
output/
├── textbook.epub   ← E-reader (Primary)
└── textbook.pdf    ← Print / Tablet
```

---

## Step 3 (Optional): Calibre — Only for Kindle MOBI

> **⚠️ Note**: Most users **DO NOT** need this step.

**When do you need Calibre?**

| Device | Supported Formats | Need Calibre? |
|--------|-------------------|---------------|
| Kindle Paperwhite (Post-2022) | ✅ Accepts EPUB (Auto-convert) | ❌ No |
| Kobo, Apple Books, Google Play | ✅ Supports EPUB | ❌ No |
| Browser Reading (Tablet) | ✅ Supports EPUB/PDF | ❌ No |
| Old Kindle (Pre-2021) | ❌ Only MOBI | ✅ Yes |

Only install Calibre and run the following if your readers use old Kindles:

```bash
# Install Calibre
brew install calibre         # macOS
sudo apt install calibre     # Linux

# EPUB → MOBI Conversion
ebook-convert output/textbook.epub output/textbook.mobi \
  --output-profile kindle
```

**Conclusion**: Unless you have specific needs, simply generating EPUB with Pandoc is sufficient. No need to introduce extra tool dependencies.

---

## Case Study: nihongo-claude — Requirements-Driven Material Generation

[nihongo-claude](https://github.com/chiweitw/nihongo-claude) is an open-source project and a real implementation of this workflow. It best illustrates the core advantage of the "developer path."

### Key Features: From Scratch, Requirements-Driven

**Biggest difference from general AI textbook tools**: This project started with **zero prepared materials** — no PDF, no notes, no syllabus.

The process went like this:

1.  **Define Requirements**: "I want to learn N3 Japanese, currently at N4 level, aim to reach N3 in 3 months."
2.  **Claude Code Plans Structure**: AI automatically designed a complete course structure with 4 phases and 30 lessons.
3.  **Generate Content**: Each lesson includes vocabulary, grammar, real conversation scenarios, and quizzes.
4.  **Automated Output**: Python script + Pandoc one-click EPUB/PDF generation.

This verifies a key hypothesis: **You don't need to be a Japanese teacher to generate reasonably structured Japanese materials** — providing you can clearly define learning needs and quality standards.

### Project Structure

```
nihongo-claude/
├── REQUIREMENTS.md           # Requirements definition
├── lessons/
│   ├── phase-1/              # Phase 1: Basic Grammar (L1-8)
│   │   ├── lesson-01.md
│   │   ├── lesson-02.md
│   │   └── ...
│   ├── phase-2/              # Phase 2: Advanced Grammar (L9-16)
│   ├── phase-3/              # Phase 3: Context Application (L17-24)
│   └── phase-4/              # Phase 4: Mock Exams (L25-30)
├── scripts/
│   ├── convert_to_epub.py    # Python EPUB script
│   ├── generate_pdf.py       # PDF generation script
│   └── quick-convert.sh      # One-click script
├── assets/
│   ├── styles.css            # Custom CSS
│   └── cover.jpg             # Cover image
└── output/
    ├── nihongo-n3.epub
    └── nihongo-n3.pdf
```

### Core Script Analysis

**1. `convert_to_epub.py` — Python EPUB Generation**

```python
import glob
from ebooklib import epub
import markdown2

def build_epub():
    book = epub.EpubBook()
    book.set_identifier('nihongo-n3-v1')
    book.set_title('Japanese N3 Complete Guide')
    book.set_language('ja')
    book.add_author('Your Name')

    chapters = []
    lesson_files = sorted(glob.glob('lessons/**/*.md', recursive=True))

    for i, lesson_path in enumerate(lesson_files, start=1):
        with open(lesson_path, 'r', encoding='utf-8') as f:
            md_content = f.read()

        # Markdown → HTML
        html_content = markdown2.markdown(md_content, extras=['tables', 'fenced-code-blocks'])

        # Create EPUB Chapter
        chapter = epub.EpubHtml(
            title=f'Lesson {i:02d}',
            file_name=f'lesson_{i:02d}.xhtml',
            lang='ja'
        )
        chapter.content = f'<html><body>{html_content}</body></html>'
        book.add_item(chapter)
        chapters.append(chapter)

    # Set TOC and Nav
    book.toc = chapters
    book.spine = ['nav'] + chapters
    book.add_item(epub.EpubNcx())
    book.add_item(epub.EpubNav())

    epub.write_epub('output/nihongo-n3.epub', book)
    print('✅ EPUB generated: output/nihongo-n3.epub')

if __name__ == '__main__':
    build_epub()
```

**2. `quick-convert.sh` — Interactive One-Click Script**

```bash
#!/bin/bash

echo "Select output format:"
echo "1) EPUB (Recommended)"
echo "2) PDF"
echo "3) All"
read -p "Enter option (1-3): " choice

case $choice in
  1)
    python3 scripts/convert_to_epub.py
    ;;
  2)
    python3 scripts/generate_pdf.py
    ;;
  3)
    python3 scripts/convert_to_epub.py
    python3 scripts/generate_pdf.py
    echo "✅ All formats generated"
    ;;
  *)
    echo "❌ Invalid option"
    exit 1
    ;;
esac
```

### Three Lessons from nihongo-claude

**1. Requirements Definition Determines Content Quality**

It's not about the AI tool, but how you describe requirements. "I want to learn Japanese" vs "I am N4 level, aim to pass N3 in 3 months, 1 hour daily study, need emphasis on listening and reading" — these generate disparate quality materials.

**2. Modular Design Makes Maintenance Easy**

Saving each lesson as an independent Markdown file means:
- Finding an error requires modifying only one file, not affecting others.
- Can A/B test different teaching methods (using Git branches).
- Adding new courses just means adding Markdown files; the script includes them automatically.

**3. This Pipeline Applies to Any Topic**

You can Fork this repo, modify `REQUIREMENTS.md` with your own learning needs, and let Claude Code plan a new course structure — whether it's machine learning, financial analysis, or product management, the pipeline is identical.

---

## Advanced: GitHub Actions for Full Automation

If your textbook needs continuous updates (e.g., tracking tech changes), set up a CI/CD pipeline: GitHub automatically regenerates EPUB/PDF on every Markdown update commit.

Create `.github/workflows/build-ebook.yml`:

```yaml
name: Build eBook

on:
  push:
    branches: [main]
    paths:
      - 'chapters/**'
      - 'assets/**'

jobs:
  build:
    runs-on: ubuntu-latest

    steps:
      - name: Checkout
        uses: actions/checkout@v4

      - name: Setup Python
        uses: actions/setup-python@v4
        with:
          python-version: '3.11'

      - name: Install Pandoc
        run: |
          sudo apt-get update
          sudo apt-get install -y pandoc

      - name: Install Python dependencies
        run: pip install ebooklib markdown2 weasyprint

      - name: Generate EPUB
        run: python scripts/convert_to_epub.py

      - name: Generate PDF
        run: |
          pandoc chapters/chapter-*.md \
            -o output/textbook.html \
            --standalone --css=assets/styles.css \
            --metadata title="My Textbook"
          python3 -m weasyprint output/textbook.html output/textbook.pdf
          rm output/textbook.html

      - name: Upload artifacts
        uses: actions/upload-artifact@v4
        with:
          name: ebooks
          path: output/

      - name: Create Release (on tag)
        if: startsWith(github.ref, 'refs/tags/')
        uses: softprops/action-gh-release@v2
        with:
          files: output/*
```

**Usage**:

1. Modify Markdown content in `chapters/`.
2. `git commit && git push`.
3. GitHub Actions runs automatically, generating new EPUB/PDF versions.
4. For formal release, tag it: `git tag v1.1.0 && git push --tags`.
5. GitHub automatically creates a Release with download links.

> **💡 Pro Tip**: Add a Markdown linter (e.g., `markdownlint`) in GitHub Actions to ensure every commit meets formatting standards, preventing conversion errors.

---

## Risks & Limitations

### Technical Complexity

- **Learning Curve**: Requires familiarity with CLI, Git, and basic Python. Setup might take half a day for beginners.
- **Debugging**: EPUB format issues (CSS incompatibility, image paths) can be hard to trace.
- **Pandoc Versions**: Slight parameter differences between versions; upgrades need testing.

### Tool Dependencies

- **Python Package Conflicts**: `ebooklib`, `weasyprint` might conflict; use `venv`.
- **EPUB Compatibility**: CSS support varies by reader; test on multiple devices.
- **weasyprint Fonts**: Chinese PDFs need font installation (e.g., Noto Sans CJK) to avoid tofu boxes (missing characters).

### Cost Considerations

- **Claude Pro Subscription**: For mass generation of high-quality content, Claude Pro ($20/mo) offers higher limits than free tier; ChatGPT Plus or Gemini Advanced are alternatives.
- **Dev Time**: Initial setup takes 2-4 hours more than no-code, but it's a one-time investment.
- **GitHub Actions Limits**: 2,000 free minutes/month (generating a book takes <10 mins).

### When NOT to Use This Path

> **⚠️ Honestly**: If you just want to generate one textbook, the upfront effort here is likely not worth it. The [No-Code Solution](/posts/ai-textbook-generator-no-code) can finish the first book today with zero setup. Come back here when you confirm the need for mass generation or version control.

---

## FAQ

**Q1: How much Python knowledge do I need?**

A: Basics — variable, loop, function. You can copy nihongo-claude scripts and just modify paths, title,/author metadata. Advanced customization (EPUB structure, interactivity) requires `ebooklib` API knowledge.

**Q2: Pandoc or Python ebooklib?**

A: Depends on needs:

- **Pandoc**: Simpler, one command, limited but usually sufficient CSS. **Recommended for beginners.**
- **ebooklib (Python)**: Full control over EPUB structure (chapter order, metadata, nav), for advanced customization.

Recommendation: Start with Pandoc prototypes, switch to Python for granular control.

**Q3: Is the EPUB consistent across readers?**

A: EPUB is standard, but CSS support varies:

- **Kindle**: Limited CSS, avoid flexbox/grid/complex animations.
- **Apple Books, Kobo**: Better CSS support.
- **Advice**: Use conservative CSS (fonts, colors, basic spacing), test on multiple devices.

**Q4: Images and Tables?**

A:
- **Images**: Put in `assets/images/`, use relative paths in Markdown `![Caption](../assets/images/diagram.png)`, Pandoc embeds them automatically.
- **Tables**: Standard Markdown syntax, Pandoc handles it.
- **Complex Charts**: Export as images and embed to avoid HTML/CSS table layout issues.

**Q5: Can I replace Claude Code with ChatGPT/Gemini?**

A: Absolutely. This article uses Claude Code as `nihongo-claude` used it. But the core is **Markdown Files + Pandoc**. Any AI that outputs Markdown works:

- **ChatGPT** (OpenAI): Similar function via GPT-4 API or Web.
- **Gemini** (Google): Free tier is powerful, `gemini-2.0-flash` is fast.
- **Any LLM API**: Anything outputting Markdown fits this pipeline.

If interested in advanced multi-AI collaboration, check [Multi-AI Collaboration Workflow](/posts/multi-ai-collaboration-workflow).

**Q6: How to batch generate textbooks for multiple topics?**

A: Create templated scripts, with independent directory and `REQUIREMENTS.md` per topic:

```bash
# generate-textbook.sh
TOPIC="$1"
mkdir -p "projects/${TOPIC}/chapters"
cp REQUIREMENTS_TEMPLATE.md "projects/${TOPIC}/REQUIREMENTS.md"
echo "Edit projects/${TOPIC}/REQUIREMENTS.md then run claude in that dir"
```

Each topic is an independent Git project.

**Q7: Is this good for technical documentation?**

A: Yes. The same workflow suits:

- **API Doc Collections**: Combine multiple MDs into PDF API docs.
- **Internal Knowledge Base**: Turn Notion/Confluence exports into ebooks.
- **Tech Blog Compilations**: Merge related articles into a topical ebook.

---

## Conclusion: Build Your Textbook Factory

If you've reached here, you now possess:

1.  **Claude Code Gen Workflow**: Requirements → Plan → Generate, AI-assisted.
2.  **Pandoc Conversion Pipeline**: Markdown → EPUB/PDF, one command.
3.  **Version Control Integration**: Git tracking, revertible, collaborative.
4.  **Optional CI/CD**: Auto-generate on commit.

The real value isn't "generating a book," but **reusability**: The script and workflow you build work for the next book, just changing requirements and metadata.

**Suggested Start**:

1.  Fork [nihongo-claude](https://github.com/chiweitw/nihongo-claude) → Study structure.
2.  Modify `REQUIREMENTS.md` for your learning needs.
3.  Start Claude Code to plan the course.
4.  Run `./scripts/quick-convert.sh` to generate your first EPUB.
5.  Open in a reader and feel the accomplishment of "self-generated."

> **💡 Final Reminder**: Tools are means, content quality is the end. Regardless of the AI tool, manual review, fact-checking, and personalization are essential. AI is a powerful assistant, but judging what knowledge is valuable relies on you.

---

If you haven't tried AI textbook generation, start with the [No-Code Version](/posts/ai-textbook-generator-no-code) — finish your first book today. Come back to build this automation system once familiar. The two paths complement, not compete.

---

## No-Code AI Personal Textbook: The Complete Learner's Guide <a id="ai-textbook-generator-no-code"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-textbook-generator-no-code
Date: 2026-02-17
Tools: NotebookLM, Claude.ai, ChatGPT, Gemini, Youbooks, TailoredRead, Type.ai, Raptor Write, Mistral le Chat
Concepts: Personalized Learning, AI Education Tools, No-Code, Knowledge Management

### Summary
Turn your research notes, PDFs, and web articles into a fully structured personal textbook using AI—without writing a single line of code. Complete workflow, ready in 1-2 hours.

### Content
# No-Code AI Personal Textbook: The Complete Learner's Guide

You just spent $60 on a data analysis textbook, excitedly opened the first chapter, only to find the first three chapters covering Excel basics you already know. Skip to Chapter 5, and the examples are all financial case studies, but you're a product manager who needs practical applications for user behavior analysis. By Chapter 10, you realize the content is too advanced and completely unusable.

You're not alone. Traditional textbooks are designed for the "average student," filled with content that doesn't fit your background or goals. The result? You use only 30% of the content but pay 100% of the price.

There's a better way. With AI tools, you can transform messy research notes, PDF documents, and web articles into a fully personalized textbook that fits your needs perfectly in just **1-2 hours**—**without writing any code**.

Want to learn "Business Japanese for Tech Conferences"? AI can generate a complete course with realistic dialogues, vocabulary lists, and self-quizzes, tailored specifically to your professional background and learning goals.

This article guides you through a complete no-code workflow, from gathering materials to generating PDF or EPUB textbooks. All tools have web interfaces; you only need to copy-paste and click buttons to build your exclusive learning materials.

> **📌 TL;DR**
>
> - **Problem**: Traditional textbooks are expensive, irrelevant to personal needs, used only 30% but paid 100%.
> - **Solution**: Use NotebookLM (organize materials) + AI Tools (Claude / ChatGPT / Gemini) + Book Generation Platforms to build personal textbooks without code.
> - **Time**: 1-2 hours for a basic version, 4-6 hours for a refined version.
> - **Cost**: Completely free combinations available (NotebookLM + Gemini + Raptor Write), advanced features ~$10-20/month.
> - **Who**: Learners, educators, content creators—anyone wanting customized learning materials without coding.

---

## Why Personalized Textbooks?

### Three Problems with Traditional Textbooks

**1. Redundant Content Wastes Time**

Studies show learners use only 30-40% of textbook content on average. Early chapters often cover basics you know; middle chapters may be irrelevant to your context; later chapters are too advanced. This "one-size-fits-all" design forces you to waste time on irrelevant operational content.

**2. Lack of Personalized Context**

Textbook examples are usually generic. A software engineer learning statistics sees bank credit risk models; a product manager wanting data analysis gets only financial market cases. You need "how to analyze user retention" or "statistical significance in A/B testing," not abstract examples unrelated to your work.

**3. Expensive and Unupdatable**

Professional textbooks average $150-250. Once bought, if content doesn't fit, you're stuck. Worse, printed books can't update—finding deeper explanations requires separate supplementary materials, fragmenting learning.

### Five Advantages of AI Personal Textbooks

✅ **Fully Customized**: Include only topics and difficulty levels you need, skipping known content to focus on learning goals.

✅ **Context-Relevant**: Generate practical cases and applications based on your professional background (Engineer, PM, Entrepreneur).

✅ **Interactive Learning**: Automatically generate chapter summaries, key takeaways, and self-quizzes, turning passive reading into active learning.

✅ **Continuously Updatable**: Find a chapter too shallow? Ask AI to add deeper explanations or new examples anytime.

✅ **Offline Reading**: Export as PDF or EPUB to read on Kindle, tablets, or e-readers without internet limits.

**Real Case**: After deploying AI-assisted textbooks at UCLA in 2024, student engagement rose significantly, and teachers saved time for individual mentoring ([Inside Higher Ed](https://www.insidehighered.com/news/faculty-issues/learning-assessment/2024/12/13/ai-assisted-textbook-ucla-has-some-academics)). Despite initial criticism, students and teachers validated the value of personalized learning materials.

---

## No-Code Workflow: 3 Steps to Your Textbook

This workflow has three stages: **Ingest** → **Outline** → **Expand & Format**. All tools use web interfaces; no coding required. You can use any familiar AI tool (Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini, etc.); steps below indicate applicable tools.

### Step 1: Collect & Organize Materials (NotebookLM)

**Tool**: [Google NotebookLM](https://notebooklm.google/) (**Completely Free**, 100 notebooks, 50 sources/notebook, 500K words each)

NotebookLM is Google's AI research assistant for organizing and analyzing large data. Compared to direct ChatGPT or Claude, NotebookLM's advantages are:

- **Source Tracking**: Every summary cites sources for verification.
- **Cross-Document Retrieval**: Upload multiple PDFs and web pages; AI builds an index automatically.
- **Free & Unlimited**: Unlike ChatGPT Free's message limits.

**Steps**:

1. Go to [NotebookLM](https://notebooklm.google/), login with Google.
2. Click "Create new notebook", name your project (e.g., "Data Analysis Self-Study").
3. Upload materials:
   - **PDFs**: Papers, ebook chapters, specific old textbook chapters.
   - **Web Articles**: Paste URLs; NotebookLM extracts content automatically.
   - **Notes**: Import from Google Docs or paste text directly.
4. Use "Generate summary" to quickly grasp key points.
5. Use "Ask questions" to test AI understanding. E.g.:
   - "What are the core concepts here?"
   - "Which parts are for beginners? Which are advanced?"
   - "Any practical use cases?"

> **💡 Tip**: If materials are in Chinese but you want an English textbook (or vice versa), NotebookLM handles cross-language retrieval. Just prompt in the target language. E.g., upload Chinese PDFs, ask in English, and NotebookLM answers in English.

### Step 2: Generate Structured Course Outline (Choose Your AI)

Goal: Turn scattered materials into a logical outline. Don't be limited to one AI—use what you know.

Mainstream tools ([Claude.ai](https://claude.ai/), [ChatGPT](https://chat.openai.com/), [Gemini](https://gemini.google.com/), [Mistral le Chat](https://chat.mistral.ai/)) all offer free tiers.

**Example uses Claude.ai, but prompts work for ChatGPT & Gemini**. For advanced multi-AI strategies (e.g., different tools for different chapters), see [Multi-AI Collaboration Workflow](/posts/multi-ai-collaboration-workflow).

#### Steps (Claude / ChatGPT / Gemini)

1. Open your chosen AI tool ([Claude.ai](https://claude.ai/) / [ChatGPT](https://chat.openai.com/) / [Gemini](https://gemini.google.com/)).
2. Start a new chat, use the "Learner Persona Template" prompt below.
3. Ask AI to generate an outline with:
   - **Chapter Titles** (H1/H2 structure)
   - **Learning Objectives per Chapter**
   - **Core Concept List**
   - **Self-Assessment Quizzes** (3-5 questions)

#### Prompt Example: Learner Persona Template

```markdown
I am a [Your Background, e.g., Software Engineer transitioning to Product Manager] wanting to learn [Topic, e.g., Data Analysis].

I have the following background knowledge:
- Basic Python programming
- SQL query syntax
- Statistics concepts (Mean, Median, Standard Deviation)

I want to focus on these application scenarios:
- Analyzing user behavior data (Google Analytics)
- Building A/B testing analysis frameworks
- Visualization reporting (Tableau/Power BI)

I have organized the following materials in NotebookLM:
- [Paste NotebookLM summary or material list]

Please design an 8-10 chapter textbook outline for me. Each chapter must include:
1. Chapter Title and Learning Objectives
2. Core Concept List (3-5 items)
3. Practical Cases (relevant to Product Management)
4. Self-Assessment Quiz (3-5 questions)

Output in Markdown format, using H2 for chapters and H3 for subtopics.
```

#### Expected Output

AI generates a structured Markdown outline, e.g.:

```markdown
## Chapter 1: Data Analysis Basics & Product Thinking

### Learning Objectives
- Understand frameworks for data-driven decision making
- Master North Star Metric definition methods
- Distinguish vanity metrics from actionable metrics

### Core Concepts
- North Star Metric
- Funnel Analysis
- Cohort Analysis

### Practical Case
How a SaaS PM uses cohort analysis to find a churn spike on Day 7 and designs onboarding improvements...

### Self-Assessment
1. What is a North Star Metric? Give a product example you know.
2. Difference between vanity and actionable metrics?
3. How to use funnel analysis to find conversion bottlenecks?
```

> **⚠️ Key**: Don't just ask AI to "write a book." Explicitly define your background, goals, and context so AI generates a truly personalized outline. If unsatisfied, ask for adjustments: "Chapter 3 is too advanced, simplify for beginners" or "Add more practical cases to Chapter 5."

### Step 3: Expand Content & Generate Final Textbook (Book Platforms)

Now that you have an outline, expand it into full content and export as PDF/EPUB. Two options:

1. **Free Manual Route**: Continue using ChatGPT/Claude/Gemini to generate content chapter-by-chapter, paste into Google Docs, export PDF.
2. **Platform Automation**: Use specialized AI book generation platforms for one-click generation and multi-format export.

#### Platform Comparison

| Tool | Free Plan | Paid Plan | Best For |
|------|----------|----------|----------|
| **[Youbooks](https://www.youbooks.com/)** | 10K words (Non-commercial, Open license) | Credit-based | Long-form content, needs source verification |
| **[TailoredRead](https://tailoredread.com/)** | No free plan | $15/mo | Educators, training materials |
| **[Type.ai](https://type.ai)** | 130K words | $12/mo (Unlimited) | Frequent editing, formatting adjustment |
| **[Raptor Write](https://raptorwrite.com/)** | Completely Free | No paid version | Beginners, simple projects |

#### Steps (Using Youbooks Example)

1. Go to [Youbooks](https://www.youbooks.com/), sign up (free trial available).
2. Click "Create New Book".
3. **Enter Basic Info**:
   - Book Type: "Educational / Textbook"
   - Target Audience: "Self-learner with [Your Background]"
   - Topic: [Topic]
4. **Paste your Outline from Step 2 (Claude / ChatGPT)**.
5. Adjust settings:
   - Content Depth: "Detailed with examples"
   - Include: "Self-assessment quizzes"
   - Tone: "Instructional, clear"
   - Sources: Check "Enable internet search" (Youbooks auto-searches and cites sources).
6. Click "Generate", wait 15-30 mins (depending on length).
7. **Review Generated Content**, use built-in editor to:
   - Delete irrelevant chapters/paragraphs.
   - Add personal experience/cases (AI can't provide this).
   - Adjust tone/difficulty.
8. **Export Formats**:
   - PDF (Print/Tablet)
   - EPUB (Kindle/Kobo e-readers)

> **💰 Money-Saving Strategy**: Use free Claude.ai / Gemini for outline and first few chapters, then use Youbooks free trial (10K words) for the rest. For unsatisfactory sections, regenerate in Claude/ChatGPT and paste manually to save subscription costs.

---

## Tool Selection Guide: Which Combo Fits You?

### Combo 1: Completely Free Route (Recommended for Beginners)

**Toolchain**: NotebookLM (Materials) → **Gemini Free** (Outline + Content, 100% Free) → Raptor Write (Expansion) → Google Docs (Manual Integration) → PDF Export

**Cost**: $0
**Time**: 4-6 Hours (Manual integration)
**Target**: Trial users, limited budget, one-off projects.

**Pros**:
- ✅ 100% Free, no hidden costs.
- ✅ Gemini 2.5 Flash Free has daily allowance, good for occasional use.
- ✅ Full control over quality (manual chapter review).

**Cons**:
- ❌ Manual copy-pasting (time-consuming).
- ❌ Formatting requires manual work.

### Combo 2: Mixed Free/Paid (Recommended for Most)

**Toolchain**: NotebookLM (Free) → **Claude.ai / ChatGPT Free** (Outline) → Youbooks Free 10K Trial (First few chapters) → Type.ai Free (Edit + Supplement) → EPUB/PDF Export

**Cost**: $0 (or Youbooks pay-per-use)
**Time**: 2-3 Hours
**Target**: Balance quality vs. cost, need professional formatting.

**Pros**:
- ✅ Higher quality (Claude/ChatGPT structure is strong).
- ✅ High automation (Youbooks/Type.ai handle layout).
- ✅ EPUB format ideal for Kindle.

**Cons**:
- ⚠️ Strategic use of free limits (10K word cap).

### Combo 3: Professional Grade (Educators / Long-term)

**Toolchain**: NotebookLM (Free) → **Claude Pro / ChatGPT Plus / Gemini Advanced** ($20/mo, pick one) → TailoredRead ($15/mo) → Direct Multi-format Export

**Cost**: $35/mo
**Time**: 1-2 Hours
**Target**: Teachers, trainers, batch generating multiple textbooks.

**Pros**:
- ✅ Highest quality (Paid AI output stable).
- ✅ TailoredRead designed for education, supports templates.
- ✅ Cost amortized over multiple books.

**Cons**:
- ⚠️ Fixed monthly cost.

### Decision Matrix

| Your Need | Recommended Combo |
|----------|----------|
| Completely free, willing to manual integr. | Combo 1 (Gemini + Raptor Write + Google Docs) |
| Limited budget, one-off project | Combo 2 (Claude/ChatGPT Free + Youbooks 10K Trial) |
| Long-term, multiple books | Combo 3 (Claude Pro + TailoredRead) |
| Teaching use, need templates | Combo 3 (TailoredRead specialist) |

---

## Quality Control: Ensuring Accuracy

AI content may contain errors, outdated info, or "hallucinations." UCLA's study noted AI textbooks "require significant editing." 5-Step Verification Process:

### Step 1: Fact Check

- ✅ **Source all stats**: Ask AI for links, verify manually.
- ✅ **Cross-reference technical concepts**: Check official docs (e.g., GA metrics, API usage).
- ✅ **Timeliness Check**: Ensure info is current (train data lags).

**Action**: Ask AI "Source for this stat? Link please." If unavailable, verify via Google or delete.

### Step 2: Logic Check

- Are chapters coherent? (Does Ch3 use terms defined in Ch1?)
- Contradictions? (Ch2 says "Use Method A", Ch5 says "Method A not recommended"?)
- Logical difficulty curve? (No sudden jumps to advanced).

### Step 3: Case Verification

- Are examples realistic? (Do codes run? Is analysis flow practical?)
- Missing details? (e.g., "Use pandas read CSV" but forgot `import pandas`).

**Action**: Pick 2-3 key cases, run them yourself. If issues found, regenerate with detail requests.

### Step 4: Quiz Testing

- Take the self-assessment yourself.
- Ensure answers are clear/correct (avoid ambiguity).
- Difficulty matches content (no out-of-scope questions).

### Step 5: 3rd Party Review (Optional)

- Ask a peer/colleague to scan for obvious errors.
- Use ChatGPT/Claude for "Reverse Validation": Paste content, ask "What errors or inaccuracies exist here?"

> **⚠️ Critical Limit**: AI can hallucinate stats, titles, or sources. Manually verify all key info. Treat AI as a draft tool, not final answer.

---

## Advanced Tips: Level Up Your Textbook

### Visual Elements

- **Charts & Flowcharts**: Use [Canva](https://www.canva.com/) (Free) or [Excalidraw](https://excalidraw.com/) (Open Source).
- **AI Illustrations**: DALL-E (ChatGPT Plus) or Midjourney for covers/chapter art.
- **Video Links**: For PDF, add QR codes linking to YouTube tutorials.

### Interactive Quizzes

- **Online Quizzes**: Create [Google Forms](https://forms.google.com/), link in textbook.
- **Spaced Repetition Cards**: Export vocab/concepts to [Anki](https://apps.ankiweb.net/).

### Personal Learning Dashboard

- **Progress Tracking**: Use [Notion](https://www.notion.so/) for progress, dates, understanding (1-5), questions.
- **Regular Review**: Weekly NotebookLM "Q&A" self-test ("What did I learn in Ch3?").

### Update Strategy

- Review every 3 months for new cases/tool updates (e.g., GA4 UI changes).
- If peers use your book, gather feedback for v2.

> **💡 Extension**: This workflow isn't just for textbooks. The logic "Ingest → Structure → Expand" applies to travel planning, project research, etc. See [AI Travel Planning Guide](/posts/ai-travel-planning-guide) for similar information organization.

---

## Risks & Limits

### Cost
- **Free Limits**: Claude.ai message caps, Youbooks 10K word limit.
- **Long-term Costs**: Batch generation costs $15-30/mo.
- **Hidden Time**: Review/adjustments take 2-4 hours even with free tools.

### Quality
- **Inaccuracies/Outdated**: Stats/Tech details need manual verification.
- **Editing Required**: Significant editing needed for teaching standards.
- **Generic Examples**: AI cases may lack depth/practicality, needing personal experience.

### Learning Effect
- **No Human Mentor**: provides structure but no real-time feedback.
- **No Peers**: Lack of discussion; pairing with online communities recommended.
- **Self-Discipline**: Requires self-drive without deadlines/exams.

### Privacy
- **Cloud Risk**: Data uploaded to NotebookLM/AI platforms sits on cloud.
- **Sensitive Info**: Check privacy policies for company/personal data.
- **Commercial Use**: Check TOS; most free plans are personal use only.

> **💡 Suggestion**: Use AI textbooks as "supplementary materials," not the sole resource. Combine with courses (Coursera/Udemy), projects, and communities (Reddit/Discord) for best results. Treat it as a personalized "Reference Manual."

---

## FAQ

**Q1: Can I do this with zero tech skills?**
A: Yes! All tools have web interfaces. If you can use Google Docs and copy-paste, you can do this. Simplest combo: NotebookLM (Upload PDF) → Gemini (Free, ask for outline) → Google Docs (Manual organize) → Export PDF.

**Q2: How long does it take?**
A:
- **Basic** (Outline + Some content): 1-2 Hours
- **Complete** (8-10 Chaps + Quizzes): 4-6 Hours (over days)
- **Refined** (Visuals + Personal Cases): 10+ Hours
Time is mainly spent on quality review, not AI generation.

**Q3: Is Free enough? Best AI?**
A:
- **100% Free**: NotebookLM + Gemini 2.5 Flash Free + Raptor Write.
- **Quality First**: NotebookLM + Claude.ai Free (Best for ed content).
- **Familiarity**: Use what you know (ChatGPT/Gemini/Claude).
- **Conclusion**: Free tiers suffice for one-off projects. Consider paid for long-term/batch needs.

**Q4: Can I sell/share this?**
A: Most platforms (Claude/Gemini/Youbooks) allow personal/non-commercial share. Commercial use check TOS. Suggest adding "AI-Assisted Generation" disclaimer and ensuring human review.

**Q5: Multi-language?**
A: Yes! Specify target language in prompts. Claude/ChatGPT/Gemini/Youbooks support multi-language. Gemini excels in non-English (CN/JP/KR).

**Q6: Want more customization/automation?**
A: If you have tech background, check our advanced guide: [Developers' AI Textbook Automation Workflow](/posts/ai-textbook-automation-developers). Covers Claude Code, Pandoc, Python scripts for batch/version control/custom formats.

---

## Conclusion: Build Your Path

You now have the toolchain to generate a no-code personalized textbook in 1-2 hours—no more spending $60 for 30% usage.

**3 Steps to Action**:

1. **Start Today**: Go to [NotebookLM](https://notebooklm.google/), upload first material (PDF/Note/URL).
2. **Generate Outline**: Use [Gemini](https://gemini.google.com/) (Free) or [Claude.ai](https://claude.ai/) to generate/test outline.
3. **Choose Path**: If satisfied, pick a platform (Youbooks / TailoredRead / Manual Google Docs) to expand.

**Remember**: AI is a powerful assistant, but quality control and personalization require YOU. Treat AI textbooks as a start, not the end. Add your experience, cases, and insights to create true value.

> **🔧 For Developers**: Need automation/version control/Custom CSS? Check [Developer's AI Textbook Automation](/posts/ai-textbook-automation-developers). Covers Claude Code, Pandoc, Python scripts ([nihongo-claude](https://github.com/chiweitw/nihongo-claude)).

**Start your personalized learning journey**—break free from generic textbooks, build materials that fit YOU with AI.

---

## Self-Hosted AI Assistant Guide: OpenClaw vs. NanoClaw vs. Nanobot vs. PicoClaw Security & Performance Comparison (2026) <a id="openclaw-alternatives-guide"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide
Date: 2026-02-17
Tools: OpenClaw, NanoClaw, Nanobot, PicoClaw, Docker, Anthropic Claude, Model Context Protocol
Concepts: Self-Hosted AI Assistant, Container Security, MCP Protocol, Embedded AI, Prompt Injection, Resource Optimization, AI Agent Architecture

### Summary
Behind OpenClaw's viral success lie 512 security vulnerabilities and resource bloat. This guide provides a security-first decision framework, comparing lightweight alternatives NanoClaw, Nanobot, and PicoClaw to help you choose the best self-hosted AI assistant.

### Content
# Self-Hosted AI Assistant Guide: OpenClaw vs. NanoClaw vs. Nanobot vs. PicoClaw Security & Performance Comparison (2026)

OpenClaw <a href="https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/openclaw/openclaw?style=social" alt="GitHub Stars" style="display: inline; vertical-align: middle;" /></a> surpassed 200,000 stars within weeks, becoming one of the fastest-growing projects in open source history. But while the developer community celebrated, security experts from Cisco, Kaspersky, and Aikido were issuing warnings: it's a "security nightmare." A January 2026 security audit found [512 vulnerabilities (8 critical)](https://cybersecuritynews.com/openclaw-2026-2-12-released/), including API key leaks, Remote Code Execution (RCE) risks, and malware in the ClawHub skill marketplace.

You want to self-host an AI assistant but don't know which framework to choose? Worried about security loopholes? Hardware specs not enough? This article provides a **security-first decision framework**, deeply comparing OpenClaw, NanoClaw, Nanobot, and PicoClaw, offering clear recommendations based on your needs (security, resource limits, feature completeness).

**You will learn**:
- Security assessment and risk analysis of the four major tools (including threat models)
- Real hardware requirement benchmarks (RAM, startup time, cost)
- Scenario-based decision framework (Developers, Embedded, Enterprise)
- Practical installation guides and security hardening best practices

---

## TL;DR Quick Conclusion

> **🎯 Three-Minute Summary**
>
> - **Security First**: Choose [**NanoClaw**](https://github.com/qwibitai/nanoclaw) (Container Isolation) or [**Nanobot**](https://github.com/HKUDS/nanobot) (MCP Transparent Architecture).
> - **Resource Constraint**: Choose [**PicoClaw**](https://github.com/sipeed/picoclaw) (<10MB RAM, $10 hardware, 1s startup).
> - **Feature Completeness**: Choose [**OpenClaw**](https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw) (but MUST use Docker + Security Hardening).
> - **Embedded Devices**: Choose **PicoClaw** (Supports RISC-V/ARM architecture).
> - **OpenClaw Risk Warning**: 512 vulnerabilities, credential leaks, RCE attacks—unless you fully understand the risks and implement strict isolation, direct use is not recommended.

---

## The Security Crisis Behind OpenClaw's Viral Success

### The Rise of OpenClaw: Viral Explosion

[OpenClaw](https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw) (Evolution: Clawdbot → Moltbot → OpenClaw; Core "Molty") is a personal AI assistant project created by PSPDFKit founder Peter Steinberger (Note: Peter joined OpenAI on 2026/2/14, transferring the project to an open source foundation). This tool integrates 15+ communication platforms (WhatsApp, Telegram, Slack, Discord, Google Chat, Signal, iMessage, Microsoft Teams, etc.), letting you control your AI assistant via familiar chat interfaces.

OpenClaw's features are extremely complete:
- **Browser Automation**: Control web operations via Playwright.
- **Multi-Agent Collaboration**: Spawn sub-agents for complex tasks.
- **Persistent Memory**: Maintain personality and context via files like SOUL.md.
- **Code Execution & File Management**: Execute commands directly on the host.
- **ClawHub Skill Market**: 1,000+ community-contributed extensions.

These powerful features drove viral spread in the developer community, surpassing 200k stars in days (currently <a href="https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/openclaw/openclaw?style=social" alt="GitHub Stars" style="display: inline; vertical-align: middle;" /></a>), becoming one of the fastest-growing projects in history.

### Security Nightmare: 512 Vulnerabilities and Real Attacks

However, severe security risks lie behind the fame. A late January 2026 security audit revealed a shocking fact: OpenClaw has **512 security vulnerabilities, 8 of which are critical**.

[Cisco stated bluntly](https://blogs.cisco.com/ai/personal-ai-agents-like-openclaw-are-a-security-nightmare): "Personal AI agents like OpenClaw are a security nightmare." [Kaspersky also issued a warning](https://www.kaspersky.com/blog/openclaw-vulnerabilities-exposed/55263/), stating OpenClaw is "unsafe for use." [Aikido Security's analysis](https://www.aikido.dev/blog/why-trying-to-secure-openclaw-is-ridiculous) was even sharper: "Trying to secure OpenClaw is ridiculous."

**Real risks include**:

1. **Plaintext API Key Leaks**: Tens of thousands of OpenClaw instances were found exposed on the public web, leaking plaintext API keys and credentials.
2. **Prompt Injection leading to RCE**: Attackers can inject malicious instructions via carefully crafted prompts to trigger remote code execution.
3. **Malware in ClawHub**: Researchers found hundreds of malicious skills in the marketplace; one explicitly instructed the bot to run `curl` to exfiltrate data to an attacker-controlled server.
4. **Token Hijacking**: A single stolen Gateway Token allows remote connection, configuration modification, and arbitrary command execution.
5. **Zero-Click Attacks**: Reading a single Google Doc can trigger an attack chain.

Although [OpenClaw version 2026.2.12 fixed 40+ vulnerabilities](https://cybersecuritynews.com/openclaw-2026-2-12-released/), the root problem remains: **The complexity of 430,000+ lines of code makes complete auditing nearly impossible**.

### Resource Bloat: Why Do You Need a Mac mini for OpenClaw?

Besides security, OpenClaw faces severe resource bloat:

- **Memory**: >1GB RAM (**99%** more than lightweight alternatives).
- **Startup Time**: **>500 seconds** on a single-core 0.6GHz processor.
- **Hardware**: Officially recommends **$600 Mac mini**.
- **Code Size**: 430,000+ lines (Nanobot is only 4,000 lines, **99%** smaller).
- **Dependencies**: Massive external dependencies (high supply chain attack risk).

 For users wanting to run an AI assistant on a Raspberry Pi or old computer, these requirements are completely unacceptable. This spawned a wave of lightweight alternatives.

---

## Alternative Panorama: Deep Dive into Four Lightweight Frameworks

### NanoClaw: Container-First Security Architecture

[NanoClaw](https://github.com/qwibitai/nanoclaw) <a href="https://github.com/qwibitai/nanoclaw"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/qwibitai/nanoclaw?style=social" alt="GitHub Stars" style="display: inline; vertical-align: middle;" /></a> is a lightweight alternative designed against OpenClaw's security issues, with the core philosophy of "strengthening security via OS-level isolation rather than application-level permissions."

**Core Features**:
- **OS-Level Container Isolation**: Each agent runs in an isolated Linux container (Apple Containers on macOS, Docker on Linux).
- **Tech Stack**: Node.js + [Anthropic Agents SDK](https://github.com/anthropics/anthropic-sdk-python).
- **Single Process Architecture**: Node.js orchestrator manages message queues and concurrency for each group.
- **Platform Support**: WhatsApp (via baileys lib), Memory Management (SQLite), Scheduled Tasks.

**Architecture Flow**:
```
WhatsApp (baileys) → SQLite → Polling Loop → Container (Claude SDK) → Response
```

**Security Model Advantages**:
- Each group has an independent `CLAUDE.md` memory file.
- Agents can only access explicitly mounted directories (filesystem isolation).
- Bash commands run inside the container, cannot affect the host system.
- Blast radius of Prompt Injection is limited to a single container.

**Use Cases**:
- ✅ Security-sensitive apps (handling customer data, trade secrets).
- ✅ Enterprise environments (need auditing and isolation).
- ✅ Multi-group management (independent sandbox per group).

**Pros**:
- ✅ Container isolation drastically reduces attack surface.
- ✅ Transparent security model (OS-level vs. App-level black box).
- ✅ Single process easy to monitor and debug.
- ✅ Code size far smaller than OpenClaw (readable in ~8 mins).

**Cons**:
- ❌ Basic features (no browser automation, multi-agent).
- ❌ Focuses on WhatsApp (others need self-implementation).
- ❌ Smaller community (compared to OpenClaw).

[VentureBeat reported](https://venturebeat.com/orchestration/nanoclaw-solves-one-of-openclaws-biggest-security-issues-and-its-already) that NanoClaw has successfully solved one of OpenClaw's biggest security issues, and creators are already using it in commercial scenarios.

---

### Nanobot: Minimalism Driven by MCP Protocol

[Nanobot](https://github.com/HKUDS/nanobot) <a href="https://github.com/HKUDS/nanobot"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/HKUDS/nanobot?style=social" alt="GitHub Stars" style="display: inline; vertical-align: middle;" /></a> is an ultra-lightweight AI assistant developed by HKU Data Science Lab (HKUDS). Its philosophy is "Don't try to do everything, be a Tool Host."

**Core Features**:
- **Full MCP Implementation**: Designed from scratch to support [Model Context Protocol](https://github.com/modelcontextprotocol/python-sdk) (Anthropic's standard tool interface).
- **Tech Stack**: Python, only **4,000 lines of code** (**99%** less than OpenClaw).
- **Architecture**: Host framework, seamlessly plugging in external tools via MCP Server.
- **Auto Tool Discovery**: MCP tools are automatically discovered and registered at startup.

**MCP Protocol Advantages**:
- **Standardization**: Any MCP-supporting Host can reuse the same tools (cross-platform interoperability).
- **Transparency**: Standardized interface reduces security risks, easier to audit.
- **Ecosystem**: Rapidly develop MCP Servers using helpers like [FastMCP](https://github.com/jlowin/fastmcp).
- **Full Features**: Supports Tools, Prompts, Sampling, Elicitation.

**Use Cases**:
- ✅ Python Developers (familiar with ecosystem).
- ✅ Need transparent architecture (fully auditable code).
- ✅ Custom toolchain integration (via MCP extensions).
- ✅ Dev-oriented use (CLI interaction).

**Pros**:
- ✅ Extremely small code base (4,000 lines).
- ✅ MCP ecosystem integration (FastMCP, Official SDK).
- ✅ Flexible tool extension architecture.
- ✅ Lower migration cost (MCP Servers are reusable).

**Cons**:
- ✅ Multi-platform support (Telegram, Discord, WhatsApp, Feishu, DingTalk, Slack, etc.).
- ❌ Smaller community (fewer docs and examples).
- ⚠️ Primarily CLI, but supports chat platforms.

In a [Hacker News thread](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=46897737), the developer community highly praised Nanobot's clean design and the forward-looking nature of the MCP protocol.

---

### PicoClaw: Embedded Champion Driven by Go

[PicoClaw](https://github.com/sipeed/picoclaw) <a href="https://github.com/sipeed/picoclaw"><img src="https://img.shields.io/github/stars/sipeed/picoclaw?style=social" alt="GitHub Stars" style="display: inline; vertical-align: middle;" /></a> is an ultra-lightweight AI assistant by hardware vendor Sipeed, designed for resource-constrained embedded environments. Uniquely, **95% of its core code was generated by AI agents**, showcasing "AI building AI tools."

**Core Features**:
- **Ultra-Light Runtime**: <10MB RAM (**99%** savings vs OpenClaw).
- **Instant Startup**: <1 second (even on 0.6GHz single core).
- **Tech Stack**: Native Go (single binary, no external dependencies).
- **Platform Support**: Telegram (Recommended), Discord, QQ, DingTalk.

**Hardware Specs**:
- **Minimum**: 10MB RAM.
- **Recommended**: [Sipeed LicheeRV Nano](https://www.cnx-software.com/2026/02/10/picoclaw-ultra-lightweight-personal-ai-assistant-run-on-just-10mb-of-ram/) ($10–$15, RISC-V SoC, 256MB RAM).
- **Architectures**: x86_64, ARM64, **RISC-V** (Open hardware friendly).
- **Cost Advantage**: $10-15 (**98%** cheaper than Mac mini).

**Performance Comparison** (Base: 0.6GHz single core):
- **Startup**: PicoClaw <1s vs OpenClaw >500s (**500x faster**).
- **Memory**: PicoClaw <10MB vs OpenClaw >1GB (**99% less**).
- **Cost**: PicoClaw $10 vs OpenClaw $600 (**98% cheaper**).

**Use Cases**:
- ✅ Embedded devices (Raspberry Pi, LicheeRV, old PCs).
- ✅ Edge computing (Low power, fast response).
- ✅ RISC-V open hardware enthusiasts.
- ✅ Extreme resource challenges (RAM <512MB).

**Pros**:
- ✅ Extreme resource efficiency.
- ✅ Supports RISC-V architecture.
- ✅ Single binary deployment.
- ✅ Fast startup suitable for edge.

**Cons**:
- ❌ Fewest features (no browser automation, multi-agent).
- ❌ Fewer docs and community.
- ❌ Limited platform integration.

---

### Bonus: ZeroClaw & IronClaw (Rust Camp)

Two noteworthy projects from the Rust camp:

**ZeroClaw**:
- Rust rewrite of OpenClaw concept.
- Emphasizes memory safety and performance.

**IronClaw**:
- Uses **WASM Sandbox Isolation**: Untrusted tools run in independent WebAssembly containers.
- Capability-based permissions.
- Suitable for extreme security isolation (e.g., multi-tenant services).

These are early-stage dev projects. Search GitHub or HN for updates.

---

## Decision Framework: How to Choose?

### Framework 1: Security Priority Matrix

| Tool | Isolation Model | Attack Surface | Credential Security | Prompt Injection Defense | Score |
|------|---------|--------|-----------|----------------------|---------|
| **OpenClaw** | App Level | Very High (430k+ lines) | Low (Known leaks) | Weak | ⚠️ **3/10** |
| **NanoClaw** | OS Container | Low (Minimal code) | High (Container) | Strong | ✅ **8/10** |
| **Nanobot** | MCP Sandbox | Medium (4k lines) | Medium (MCP boundary) | Good | ✅ **7/10** |
| **PicoClaw** | Minimal Runtime | Very Low (<10MB) | Medium (Resource limit) | Good | ✅ **7/10** |

**Practical Advice**:

> **🔒 Security Self-Check**
>
> If you match any of these, choose a tool with Score ≥7:
> - ☑️ Handling customer data or trade secrets
> - ☑️ Connecting to production APIs
> - ☑️ Cannot tolerate credential leaks
> - ☑️ Running on public internet
>
> **Recommended**: NanoClaw (Strongest Isolation) or Nanobot (MCP Transparent Audit).

---

### Framework 2: Scenario-Based Decision Tree

```
What do you care about most?
│
├─ 🔐 Security First
│  ├─ Need full isolation (Sensitive Data)
│  │  → Recomm.: NanoClaw (Container)
│  └─ Need transparent architecture (Auditable)
│     → Recomm.: Nanobot (MCP, 4k lines)
│
├─ 💾 Resource Constrained
│  ├─ Embedded (RPi, LicheeRV)
│  │  → Recomm.: PicoClaw (RISC-V/ARM)
│  └─ Old PC (RAM <512MB)
│     → Recomm.: PicoClaw (<10MB RAM)
│
├─ ⚡ Feature Completeness
│  ├─ Need full ecosystem (ClawHub)
│  │  → Recomm.: OpenClaw (MUST USE Docker + Hardening)
│  └─ Need browser automation/multi-agent
│     → Recomm.: OpenClaw (MUST USE Docker + Hardening)
│
└─ 👨‍💻 Developer Friendly
   ├─ Python Ecosystem
   │  → Recomm.: Nanobot (MCP Python SDK)
   └─ Go Ecosystem
      → Recomm.: PicoClaw (Go Native)
```

**Example Applications**:

1.  **Enterprise IT deploying for internal teams**: Security First → NanoClaw.
2.  **Student on RPi Zero 2W**: Resource Constrained → PicoClaw.
3.  **PM needing browser automation**: Feature Completeness → OpenClaw (Strictly isolated).

---

### Framework 3: Hardware & Cost Analysis

| Tool | Memory | Startup (0.6GHz) | Min Hardware Cost | Architecture |
|------|-----------|------------------|-------------|---------|
| **OpenClaw** | >1GB | >500s | ~$600 (Mac mini) | x86_64, ARM64 |
| **NanoClaw** | ~100MB | ~30s | ~$50 (RPi 4) | x86_64, ARM64 |
| **Nanobot** | ~100MB | ~30s | ~$50 (RPi 4) | x86_64, ARM64 |
| **PicoClaw** | <10MB | <1s | ~$10 (LicheeRV Nano) | x86_64, ARM64, RISC-V |

> **💡 Hardware Advice**
>
> **Case 1: Existing Device**
> - RAM >1GB → All feasible.
> - RAM 100MB-1GB → NanoClaw, Nanobot, PicoClaw.
> - RAM <100MB → PicoClaw only.
>
> **Case 2: Buying New**
> - <$20 → PicoClaw + LicheeRV Nano.
> - $50-100 → NanoClaw/Nanobot + RPi 4.
> - $100-200 → NanoClaw + Mini PC (N100).
> - Unlimited → OpenClaw + Mac mini (Risk remains).

---

### Framework 4: Feature Trade-offs

| Feature | OpenClaw | NanoClaw | Nanobot | PicoClaw |
|------|----------|----------|---------|----------|
| **Browser Auto** | ✅ Full | ❌ No | ❌ No | ❌ No |
| **Multi-Agent** | ✅ Supported | ❌ No | ❌ No | ❌ No |
| **Persistent Mem** | ✅ Advanced | ✅ Basic | ✅ Basic | ✅ Basic |
| **Channels** | ✅ 15+ | ✅ WhatsApp | ✅ Multi | ✅ Telegram/Discord |
| **MCP** | ⚠️ Partial | ❌ No | ✅ Full | ❌ No |
| **Container Sec** | ⚠️ Optional | ✅ Built-in | ⚠️ Optional | ⚠️ Optional |
| **Skill Market** | ✅ ClawHub | ❌ No | ❌ No | ❌ No |
| **Code Size** | 430k+ lines | ~8k lines | ~4k lines | ~6k lines |

> **⚠️ Feature Trap Warning**: Don't blindly choose OpenClaw for "most features." 80% of users only need basic chat + tool calls.

---

## Practical Guide: Installation & Hardening

### NanoClaw Setup

**Prereqs**: Docker/macOS Tahoe+, WhatsApp, Anthropic API Key.

1.  **Clone**: `git clone https://github.com/qwibitai/nanoclaw.git`
2.  **Config**: `cp .env.example .env` (Add Key).
3.  **Start**: `docker compose up -d`
4.  **Link**: Scan WhatsApp QR.

**Hardening**: Read-only mounts, command allowlist in `CLAUDE.md`, resource limits.

### Nanobot Setup

**Prereqs**: Python 3.10+.

1.  **Install**: `pip install nanobot-ai`
2.  **Init**: `nanobot init`
3.  **Config**: Add MCP servers to `config.json`.
4.  **Start**: `nanobot start`

**Best Practices**: Use venv, rate limiting, keep updated.

### PicoClaw Setup

**Prereqs**: RISC-V/ARM/x86 device, Telegram Bot Token.

1.  **Download Binary**: `wget .../picoclaw-linux-arm64`
2.  **Config**: Create `config.yaml` with keys.
3.  **Run**: `./picoclaw-linux-arm64 --config config.yaml`

**Embedded Tip**: Use systemd for auto-start.

### OpenClaw Security Hardening (If you MUST use it)

**Docker Isolation is Mandatory**:
- Use `no-new-privileges:true`.
- Drop `ALL` capabilities.
- Read-only root filesystem.
- Internal network only.

**Skill Review**: NEVER install from ClawHub blindly. Manual review required.

> **🚨 Warning**: Even with hardening, OpenClaw risks remain (App vulnerabilities, Prompt Injection). Use in isolated test environments only.

---

## Universal Best Practices

- **API Keys**: Env vars only, never hardcode. Rotate regularly.
- **Network**: HTTPS/TLS, VPN/Tailscale for remote access.
- **Monitoring**: Alerts on resource spikes, audit logs.
- **Backup**: Encrypted backups of memory files (`CLAUDE.md`).

---

## Risks & Limits

**Potential Risks**:
- **Security**: All tools have potential bugs; Prompt Injection is hard to fully stop.
- **Privacy**: Local logs validation; API providers still see prompts.
- **Maintenance**: Self-patching required.

**When NOT to Self-Host**:
- Lack tech skills (Linux/Docker).
- No time for maintenance.
- Need Enterprise SLA (99.9% uptime).
- Handling highly sensitive data (Financial/Medical).
- **Alternative**: Use commercial services like Claude.ai, ChatGPT Plus, or Enterprise plans.

---

## Long-Term Considerations

- **Community**: OpenClaw is biggest but chaotic; Nanobot/NanoClaw are smaller but focused.
- **Maintenance**: Check commit frequency.
- **Dependencies**: OpenClaw (High risk); PicoClaw (Lowest risk).
- **Migration**: MCP (Nanobot) offers easiest migration.

---

## FAQ

**Q1: Is OpenClaw safe after updates?**
A: Fixed 40+ bugs, but hundreds remain. Still unsafe for production. Use Docker.

**Q2: NanoClaw platforms?**
A: Official WhatsApp only. Can fork to add others.

**Q3: PicoClaw <10MB includes AI?**
A: No, that's runtime only. Inference is via Cloud API or separate local model (which needs more RAM).

**Q4: Nanobot MCP advantage?**
A: Cross-platform reuse, transparency, ecosystem growth.

**Q5: Commercial use?**
A: All MIT licensed. But respect API Provider (Anthropic/OpenAI) TOS.

---

## Conclusion & Action Plan

**Editor's Picks**:
1.  **Entry**: [PicoClaw](https://github.com/sipeed/picoclaw) (Low barrier, low cost).
2.  **Security**: [NanoClaw](https://github.com/qwibitai/nanoclaw) (Enterprise isolation).
3.  **Dev/MCP**: [Nanobot](https://github.com/HKUDS/nanobot) (Python, Standardized).
4.  **Features**: [OpenClaw](https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw) (**Isolated Only**).

**Start Now**: assess needs → choose tool → deploy securely.

**Final Reminder**: Self-hosting is a journey. Understand risks, choose wisely.

**Further Reading**:
- Still deciding whether to self-host? Start with [Should You Set Up OpenClaw? A Decision Guide](/posts/should-i-setup-an-openclaw)
- How much does Claude cost? See [Claude Code Cost Guide: Pro/Max/API Comparison](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost)
- Prefer IDE-integrated coding tools? Check out [Cursor vs Claude Code vs Windsurf vs OpenCode: 2026 Comparison](/posts/cursor-vs-claude-code-vs-windsurf-2026)

Good luck hosting! 🚀

---

## How to Plan Travel with AI: Real-World Experience and a Complete Avoid-Pitfalls Guide <a id="ai-travel-planning-guide"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/ai-travel-planning-guide
Date: 2026-02-16
Tools: Claude, ChatGPT, Gemini, Google Maps, Claude Projects, Gemini Gems
Concepts: ai-travel-guide, travel-planning, ai-verification, context-building

### Summary
50% of travelers use AI for trip planning, but most just 'ask once and go'. My experience planning a New Year's trip to Japan revealed: AI recommends closed restaurants but correctly suggested entering via New Chitose on Jan 1st. The key is letting AIs review each other to catch blind spots.

### Content
# How to Plan Travel with AI: Real-World Experience and a Complete Avoid-Pitfalls Guide

According to the [TakeUp 2026 Report](https://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/takeups-the-rise-of-ai-planned-travel-in-2026-report-reveals-ai-is-reshaping-consumer-travel-but-with-room-for-growth-302660388.html), about 45% of travelers use AI to plan their trips, triple the rate in 2023. But most people just "ask once and go" — asking ChatGPT, "Give me a 7-day Japan itinerary," getting a suggestion, and following it blindly.

**I did this too, and the results were mixed:**

- ✅ AI suggestion to enter via New Chitose on Jan 1st and stay in Sapporo → Correct! The airport is great for shopping, and Sapporo has many options.
- ❌ AI recommended a seafood izakaya that "looked great" → In reality, it had closed down long ago.
- ⚠️ AI didn't warn about reservation requirements for Jan 1st restaurants → Discovered only after another AI reviewed the plan.

**A better way:** Treat AI as a "personal travel guide," not a "one-time suggestion tool." This article shares my practical experience:

- How to integrate your flight, hotel, and preferences into AI (Claude Projects / Gemini Gems).
- **Letting one AI review another AI's itinerary** (Crucial! Catching blind spots).
- Asking AI anytime during the trip for changes (rain, delays, discovering new spots).
- Which information **must be checked on official websites** (AI makes mistakes).

---

> **📌 TL;DR**
>
> - **Current State**: 45% of travelers use AI, but "ask once and go" leads to pitfalls.
> - **My Lesson**: AI recommended closed restaurants, but the Jan 1st airport entry advice was correct.
> - **Solution**: Claude Projects for data integration + **AI-to-AI review** (Key) + Official site verification.
> - **Real Value**: Adaptability during the trip, faster than Google, and emotional support.
> - **Checklist**: Restaurant operating status, reservation requirements, Jan 1st airport entry choice.

---

## My Experience Planning a Japan New Year Trip with AI

### Experience 1: AI Recommended a Closed Restaurant

**Gemini's Suggestion**:
```
Sapporo Must-Eats:
1. Susukino Seafood Market
2. Nijo Market Seafood Izakaya "○○"
3. Tanukikoji Genghis Khan BBQ "△△"
```

**Reality Check**:
- Googled "Nijo Market ○○" → Shows "Permanently Closed".
- "△△" BBQ shop had changed its name; AI gave the old one.

**Lesson**: According to [AFAR Magazine tests](https://www.afar.com/magazine/the-most-common-mistakes-ai-makes-when-planning-travel), AI training data has a cutoff date and doesn't know the latest operating status.

---

### Experience 2: AI Suggested Staying in Sapporo on Jan 1st (Got this right!)

**AI's Suggestion**:
```
Jan 1st Arrive at New Chitose Airport → Stay in Sapporo directly
- Spend time at the airport first (New Chitose is great for shopping)
- Head to Sapporo city in the evening
- Go to Otaru or Hakodate the next day
```

**Why this suggest was correct**:
- **New Chitose Airport is open on Jan 1st**: Drugstores, souvenir shops, and Ramen Road are all open.
- **Sapporo is livelier**: Even if some shops are closed on Jan 1st, there are still more options than in smaller cities.
- **Entering via Hakodate would be terrible**: Most shops in smaller cities are closed on Jan 1st; it would be very boring.

**Discovered after another AI reviewed**:

I fed the itinerary to another AI for review:

```
AI pointed out key insights:
✅ Entering via New Chitose on Jan 1st is a good choice (airport can be explored for 2-3 hours)
⚠️ But be aware:
   - Most restaurants in Sapporo city are closed or fully booked on Jan 1st
   - Suggest booking restaurants 2-4 weeks in advance
   - Or eat at the airport before heading to the city
⚠️ If entering via Hakodate:
   - Fewer options in a small city
   - Jan 1st will be very boring
```

**Lesson**:
- **Airport entry/exit choice is crucial**: For Jan 1st arrival, choose New Chitose (Sapporo), not Hakodate.
- **Airport is the Jan 1st savior**: New Chitose Airport is an attraction itself, no fear of having nowhere to go.
- **Let AI review each other**: The second AI will remind you of risks you didn't think of.

---

## 4 Steps to Build Your AI Travel Guide

### Step 1: Use Claude Projects to Integrate All Travel Data

**Problem**: It's annoying to re-explain the background (dates, budget, accommodation) every time you ask AI.

**Solution**: Claude Projects lets you upload all documents, and AI automatically remembers the context.

**Setup Steps** (Requires Claude Pro $20/month):

1. **Create Project**: Login to Claude → Projects → Create "Hokkaido Winter Trip 2026"

2. **Upload Documents**:
   - Flight confirmation PDF
   - Hotel bookings
   - Food list (compiled from Tabelog, Google Maps)
   - JR Pass rules

3. **Set Custom Instructions**:
```
# Hokkaido Winter Trip 2026 Planning

## Basic Info
- Time: 2026/1/10-1/17 (7 days 6 nights)
- People: 2 Adults
- Budget: Total 100,000 TWD

## Itinerary Framework
- D1: Taipei -> Sapporo (Arrive 18:00)
- D2-D3: Sapporo City
- D4: Otaru Day Trip
- D5: Hakodate

## Preferences & Constraints
- Preference: Food > Sightseeing
- Hate waking up early: Start itinerary after 10:00 AM
- Constraint: Just after New Year (1/1-1/3), some restaurants need reservations
```

**Actual Effect**: After this, whenever you ask a question, Claude automatically references the context without needing repetition.

**Free Alternatives**:
- Paste a "Background Info Paragraph" at the start of every chat.
- Organize in Google Docs, copy-paste to AI.

---

### Step 2: Use Gemini Gems to Create a Custom Guide

**Gemini Gems** allows you to create a "dedicated AI assistant" with preset preferences.

**Setup Example**: Create "Hokkaido Food Guide" Gem

```
You are my Hokkaido travel food expert.

My Preferences:
- Local small shops > Tourist restaurants
- No raw food
- Budget per meal TWD 500-1000
- Avoid shops with >30 min queue

Your Task:
1. Automatically filter out raw food when recommending restaurants
2. Note if reservation is needed and queue time
3. Use Google Maps to verify latest opening hours
4. Remind about special operating status during New Year (1/1-1/3)
```

**Effect**:
- Every time you ask "Sapporo lunch recommendation," it automatically applies your preferences.
- The Gem proactively reminds you about reservation requirements and opening hours.

---

### Step 3: Let AIs Review Each Other (Crucial!)

**Core Concept**: An itinerary made by one AI is critiqued by another to catch blind spots.

**Real-world Case**:

**Step 3.1 - ChatGPT Generates Itinerary**:
```
Give me a Hokkaido 7-day itinerary (1/10-1/17),
Budget 100,000 TWD, 2 people, focus on food.
```

ChatGPT gives: Sapporo 3 days → Otaru 1 day → Hakodate 2 days.

**Step 3.2 - Feed ChatGPT Itinerary to Claude for Review**:
```
This is the Hokkaido itinerary ChatGPT gave me, please critique and find issues:

Angles:
1. Are there transport connection issues?
2. Is the schedule too tight?
3. Which attractions might be closed in winter?
4. Is the budget allocation reasonable?
5. Anything to note for the post-New Year period (just after 1/1)?

[Paste ChatGPT's full itinerary]
```

**Claude's Response** (Real test):
```
Analysis found 3 issues:

⚠️ Issue 1: Otaru to Hakodate transport
- ChatGPT wrote "Otaru direct JR to Hakodate"
- Reality: Need to transfer in Sapporo
- Correct route: Otaru → Sapporo → Hakodate

⚠️ Issue 2: Post-New Year crowds
- 1/2-1/3 Sapporo city restaurants are full
- Suggest booking in advance or adjusting itinerary order
- Could go to Otaru, Hakodate first (fewer people)

⚠️ Issue 3: Budget allocation
- Hakodate accommodation estimate TWD 3,000 is too low
- Reality approx TWD 4,500
- Suggest adjusting other expenses
```

**Value**:
- ChatGPT is good at creative routes but lacks rigor in details.
- Claude analyzes rigorously, catching transport, crowd, and budget issues.
- Two AIs complement each other, avoiding single blind spots.

---

### Step 4: Build a Verification Checklist (What to Check on Official Sites)

Although AI is convenient, these **6 items must be confirmed manually**:

> **✅ Official Site Check List**

**1. Opening Hours & Closed Days**
- ❌ AI Common Mistake: Giving summer hours, not knowing winter shortage hours.
- ✅ Correct Action: Check attraction official site.
- Case: [Asahiyama Zoo](https://www.city.asahikawa.hokkaido.jp/asahiyamazoo/) Winter 10:30-15:30, AI often gives 9:30-17:15.

**2. New Year Special Hours (Japan New Year focus!)**
- ❌ AI Doesn't Know: Most shops closed on 1/1, partially open 1/2-1/3.
- ✅ Correct Action:
  - Check attraction/restaurant official site for "Year-end New Year Info".
  - Search "New Year" or "Shogatsu" in Google Maps reviews.
  - **Airport is savior**: New Chitose Airport operates normally on 1/1, good for 2-3 hours.
- Lesson: Entering via New Chitose on 1/1 and staying in Sapporo was right (many choices), Hakodate entry would be boring.

**3. Is the Restaurant Still Open**
- ❌ AI Common Mistake: Recommending closed restaurants (old training data).
- ✅ Correct Action:
  - Google Maps check "Open" or "Permanently Closed".
  - Tabelog check latest review date.
- Lesson: 1 of 3 restaurants in my collection had closed.

**4. Reservation Requirements**
- ❌ AI Common Mistake: Recommending popular spots without warning "Reservation Needed".
- ✅ Correct Action:
  - Google Maps reviews search "Reservation".
  - Must book 2-4 weeks early for New Year period.

**5. Transport Schedules**
- ❌ AI Common Mistake: Giving last year's or summer schedules.
- ✅ Correct Action: Check [JR Hokkaido Official Site](https://www.jrhokkaido.co.jp/).

**6. Exact Event Dates**
- ❌ AI Common Mistake: Giving last year's dates.
- ✅ Correct Action: Check event official site.
- Case: Sapporo Snow Festival 2026 is 2/4-2/11 (changes slightly every year).

**Verification Tools**:
- **Google Translate Lens**: Photo translate Japanese official sites instantly.
- **Chrome Browser Auto-Translate**: Right click → Translate to English/Chinese.
- **Google Maps Reviews**: Read latest reviews to confirm operating status.

---

## AI Guide During Travel: Adapting Faster Than Google

### Use Case 1: Sudden Heavy Snow

**Traditional Way**: Google "Sapporo rainy day indoor spots" → Read articles → Compare distances → Check hours → **30 Minutes**.

**AI Guide Way** (**5 Minutes**):
```
Sapporo heavy snow today (30cm accumulation),
Need indoor alternatives for Hokkaido Shrine plan.

My status:
- Staying near JR Sapporo Station
- Free from 3 PM
- Dinner reservation at 7 PM

Give me 3 backups, and explain why they suit snowy days.
```

**AI Response** (Combined with Projects background info):
```
Based on your location and time, recommending 3 indoor snow day plans:

1. **Sapporo Beer Museum**
   - Distance: Subway 15 min
   - Time: 3:00-5:30 (2.5 hours enough)
   - Feature: Indoor tour + Beer tasting (Warm up)

2. **Tanukikoji Shopping Street**
   - Distance: Subway 10 min
   - Time: 3:00-6:30
   - Feature: Covered arcade, snow-proof, drugstores/souvenirs

3. **Daimaru Department Store**
   - Distance: Walk 5 min
   - Time: 3:00-6:00
   - Feature: Indoor heating, underground food street

⚠️ Snow day note:
- Wear non-slip shoes or buy simple ice cleats
- Leave for dinner at 6:30 PM, allow buffer
```

**Emotional Value**: AI says "Snow days have their own fun!" (Encouraging) instead of cold Google results.

---

### Use Case 2: Adding a Suddenly Discovered Spot

**Prompt**:
```
I found a super beautiful cafe in Otaru (not in original plan),
Want to stay 1 extra hour.

Adjust subsequent itinerary, ensure I'm not late for 19:00 Sapporo dinner.

Current Time: 14:00
Current Location: Otaru Canal
```

**AI Quick Response**:
```
Received! Adjusting for you:

✅ Added Cafe (14:00-15:00)
⏰ Adjusted Schedule:
14:00-15:00 Cafe
15:10-16:30 Rokkatei + Souvenir shopping (Compressed 30 min)
16:40-17:20 Kitaichi Glass (1F only)
17:30 JR back to Sapporo
18:15 Arrive Sapporo
18:45 Arrive at Restaurant (Buffer allowed) ✅

💡 Optimization:
- Rokkatei focus on "Buying" not "Eating"
- Return to Sapporo early to avoid rush
```

**Emotional Value**: AI doesn't say "You messed up the plan," but "Found a good spot! Adjusting for you" (Supportive).

---

## FAQ

**Q1: Do I have to pay to use these features?**

A: Claude Projects needs Pro ($20/month); Gemini Gems works with the free version. Free alternative: paste a "Background Info Paragraph" at the start of each chat. For simple trips (3-4 days), the free version is enough. For complex trips (7+ days), paying is worth the time saved.

**Q2: Letting AIs review each other, what if they disagree?**

A: Decision process: first see whose reasoning is sound (Claude says "Please check official site" means it's unsure; Gemini gives real-time price + source link means higher credibility), then Google confirm by searching "Spot Name + 2026 Opening Hours," and finally check the official site for ultimate confirmation. Golden Rule: Dispute = Check Official Site.

**Q3: Does this method work for other countries?**

A: Absolutely! The difference is only in verification difficulty: Japan/Korea (JP/KR, medium, use Google Translate Lens), US/Europe (English, low, Chrome Translate), SE Asia (Thai/Viet, med-high, check Google Maps Reviews). Universal principles remain: AI Generate → Another AI Review, Hours/Reservation = Check Official Site, Ask AI for adaptation during trip.

---

## Conclusion: AI is a Guide, Not Google

**Core Concept**:

Most people treat AI as a "Smarter Google" — Ask once, get answer, end.

**Better Way**: Treat AI as a "Personal Guide" — Continuous dialogue, adjustment, adaptation.

**This method saves you**:
- ⏰ **Time**: 7-day planning from 20 hours → 3-4 hours
- 💰 **Money**: Avoiding AI errors (Closed restaurants, Jan 1st closed spots)
- 😌 **Stress**: Ask AI anytime during trip for changes (Faster than Google)
- ❤️ **Emotional Value**: AI encourages and suggests (Warmer than cold search results)

**But you can't skip**:
- Official Site Verification (1 hour): Hours, Closed days, Reservations
- AI-to-AI Review (10 mins): Catching single AI blind spots
- Flexibility: Don't plan too rigidly, weather and transport can change

---

**Action Advice**:

✅ **Next Trip Planning**:
- Try Claude Projects or Gemini Gems (Integrate your data)
- **Let one AI review another AI's itinerary** (Crucial!)
- Use "Must Check List" to verify key info (Especially New Year)

✅ **During Trip**:
- Ask AI anytime (Weather, delays, discoveries)
- More context given = More accurate advice

---

**Further Learning**:
- Want to know more about AI collaboration? Read "[Multi-AI Collaboration Workflow](/posts/multi-ai-collaboration-workflow)"
- Want to make travel slides? See "[AI Travel Presentation Workflow](/posts/ai-travel-presentation-workflow)"

**Share with others**:
If this helped you, share it with friends planning a trip ❤️

---

## 2026 Crypto Card Guide: From S-Tier God Cards to "Look But Don't Touch" Options <a id="2026-crypto-card-guide"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/2026-crypto-card-guide
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: Bitget, Bybit, Crypto.com, Ether.fi, Kast, PAYY, Ready, RedotPay
Concepts: Cashback, Crypto Card, DeFi, Off-ramp, Privacy, Tier List

### Summary
2026 Latest Crypto Card Review. Ranked into S/A/B/C tiers based on cashback rates, FX fees, and withdrawal convenience. Featuring Ether.fi, Ready, PAYY, Kast, Bybit, Crypto.com, and RedotPay. Avoid the pitfalls and find the true god cards.

### Content
# 2026 Crypto Card Guide: From S-Tier God Cards to "Look But Don't Touch" Options

There are many Crypto Card introductions online, but they are often mixed with choices that are unavailable to us (like **Revolut**, **MetaMask Card**).

In this article, I tested over 10 cards, **focusing only on choices realistically available to Asian/Global users**, and ranked them into S / A / B / C tiers based on "Cashback Rate", "FX Fees", and "ATM Withdrawal Convenience".

**TL;DR**: Travel & Withdrawal → **[Ready](https://join.ready.co/CIBU-SXQF-OKOX)** (0% FX + Free ATM). Long-term Holder → **[Ether.fi](https://www.ether.fi/refer/970ebbc5)** (Borrow to spend, never sell). Yield Farming → **[Kast](https://go.kast.xyz/VqVO/I59TWTGF)** (Up to 12% cashback). Lazy Exchange User → **[Bybit](https://www.bybit.com/cards/?ref=XRXKOV#0&source=applet_invite)** (Spend directly from exchange). Privacy Needs → **[PAYY](https://payy.link/invite/DVHKHH)** (ZK on-chain privacy).

---

## 🏆 S Tier: Highly Recommended (Highest Overall Score)

Cards in this tier have achieved perfection in a specific area and are permanent residents in our wallets.

### 1. [Ready Card](https://join.ready.co/CIBU-SXQF-OKOX) (Metal)
**👑 God Card for Travel & Withdrawals**
[Ready Card](https://join.ready.co/CIBU-SXQF-OKOX) is currently the strongest choice for overall experience, especially for frequent travelers or those who want to flexibly use Bitcoin assets.

- **3% $STRK Cashback**: Metal version ($120/year) enjoys 3% cashback on the first $5,000 spent monthly (capped at $150); Lite version offers 0.5% (no annual fee).
- **Reward Liquidity**: Cashback is paid in $STRK (not a stablecoin), but market liquidity is excellent, so users can choose to "sell immediately" for stablecoins.
- **Near Zero FX Spread**: Metal version offers 0% FX fees, while Lite version charges 1%. Uses official Mastercard rates (1 USDC = 1 USD) with no hidden markups.
- **Cashback Boost**: Metal users who maintain a daily spend of at least $5 USD can boost the base 3% cashback up to **6%** (depending on consecutive active days).
- **Withdrawals & Limits**: Metal enjoys **$800** monthly free limit; Lite enjoys **$200** monthly free limit. A 2% fee applies thereafter. **Hard Limits**: Max daily withdrawal $500, monthly $2,500.
- **Payment Methods**: Supports **Line Pay** and **Google Pay**; Apple Pay is currently not supported.
- **BTC Collateralized Spending**: You can collateralize Bitcoin (BTC) to borrow USDC for spending, gaining liquidity without selling coins. **Note**: Significant BTC price drops may trigger liquidation risks.
> **Comment**: The Metal version with 0% FX, $800 monthly free withdrawal, and up to 6% cashback potential is perfect for frequent travelers. The Lite version allows free entry but comes with 1% FX fees and lower withdrawal limits.

### 2. [Ether.fi](https://www.ether.fi/refer/970ebbc5) Cash
**👑 Top Choice for DeFi Players**
If you are an ETH Holder, this card offers the ultimate "integrated" borrow-to-spend experience. While users can manually borrow from Aave and bridge out, Ether.fi automates this entire process.

> **🎉 Limited Time Offer: Ride & Dine (Until Feb 28, 2026)**
> New members can earn up to **15% cashback** on dining, groceries, and rideshares, while referrers earn a 10% bonus. See [official announcement](https://etherfi.gitbook.io/etherfi/events/ride-and-dine) for details.

- **Yield & Collateral Double-Dip**: Depositing ETH/USDC/BTC earns ~1.2% yield while acting as collateral to generate spending power (e.g., depositing 10k USDC gives ~9k spending limit).
- **Automated Borrow-to-Spend**: Swiping triggers an on-chain loan (Borrow Rate: 4%) automatically, deducting directly from on-chain assets with no extra fees.
- **Fees & Rates**: 0% fee for USD spending, 1% fee for non-USD spending (excluding FX).
- **Up to 3% Cashback**: Core (free) users enjoy 3% on the first $2,000 monthly spend, 1% on $2,000–$3,000, and 0.5% above $3,000. Luxe users enjoy 3% on the first $10,000. Cashback is paid in **wETH** and can be sold immediately.
- **ATM Withdrawals**: All withdrawals incur a 2% fee (no free tier). Daily limit $250, max 3 attempts (failures count).
- **Tax Note**: Borrow-to-spend usually doesn't trigger capital gains tax on selling crypto, but loan interest or token rewards ($SCR/points) might be considered taxable income in some regions (check local laws).

### 3. [Kast Card](https://go.kast.xyz/VqVO/I59TWTGF)
**🚀 King of High Cashback (Season 5 expected until 2026/3/31)**
[Kast](https://go.kast.xyz/VqVO/I59TWTGF) is the top choice for users seeking maximum returns, suitable for those willing to actively participate in campaigns to earn points.

- **Potential Top 12% Cashback**: During Season 5, Premium cards earn spending points (~2-8% valuation) plus an extra 4% in $MOVE tokens.
- **Paid Card Bonus**: The Premium card costs $1000/year but comes with **10,000 bonus points** (valued at ~$1,000). If the token performs well after TGE, rewards could cover the card cost.
- **Solana Staking Boost**: Kast partners with **KILN** to provide Solana staking validators. Staking SOL via Kast boosts point earnings:
    - **Standard**: 0.25 points per staked SOL / epoch (2 days).
    - **Premium/Limited**: 0.5 points per staked SOL / epoch.
    - **Luxe**: 1 point per staked SOL / epoch.
- **Risk Warning**: Reward value depends on TGE token value and $MOVE market price. Fortunately, $MOVE is listed on major exchanges with good liquidity, allowing users to "sell immediately" to reduce volatility risk.

---

## 🥈 A Tier: Strong Contenders (Niche Needs)

### 1. PAYY
**👑 Niche Privacy Need (Top Choice for Point Farming)**
[PAYY](https://payy.link/invite/DVHKHH) offers precious privacy, suitable for users with special privacy needs or those wanting to farm points via spending.

- **Zero-Knowledge**: Uses UTXO and ZK technology to provide on-chain transaction privacy, severing the link between your wallet and real identity.
- **Identity Verification**: Note that ZK technology only covers on-chain privacy; for legal and card issuance purposes, **Identity Verification (KYC) is still required** to comply with local regulations.

### 2. Bybit Card
**🏢 Top Choice for [Bybit](https://www.bybit.com/cards/?ref=XRXKOV#0&source=applet_invite) Users**
The most brain-dead, convenient choice.

- **Flexible Funding**: Deducts directly from your exchange Funding Account, no need to transfer to an on-chain wallet.
- **Flexible Savings**: Idle funds can sit in Earn accounts earning up to 8% APR. **Note**: These APRs are typically internal exchange products subject to market volatility, platform risk, and lock-up rules; they are not guaranteed principal-protected yield.

---

## 🥉 B Tier: Tasteless but Pity to Discard

### 1. [Crypto.com](https://crypto.com/) (CDC Card)
**🦕 The Old King**
The familiar metal card, once the king.

- **Pros**: Metal card feels great, airport lounge benefits (requires high tier).
- **Cons**: The new "Level Up" program in 2025 made rules extremely complex, and cashback rates are tied to staking thresholds (CRO), making the price-performance ratio lower than before.

### 2. [Bitget Wallet Card](https://web3.bitget.com/share/3zHIAh?inviteCode=aqHD6G)
**👜 Native Wallet Experience**
A Visa card launched by Bitget Wallet, emphasizing the convenience of deducting directly from the wallet.

- **Pros**: Widely accepted globally, no annual fee, supports USDC/USDT deposits.
- **Cons**: Free fee tier has monthly limits (e.g., $400-600), charging ~1.7%+ thereafter. Compared to Ready's 0% fee advantage, it's less cost-effective for large spending.

---

## ⛔ C Tier: Low Value (Backup Only)

### 1. [RedotPay](https://www.redotpay.com/)
**💸 High Fee Backup**
Less of a backup and more of a last resort. easy to apply for but costly. Unless all other cards reject you, not recommended.

- **Expensive Card**: Physical card costs $100 USD.
- **High Fees**: 1.2% FX Fee + 1% Transaction Fee + 1% Crypto Conversion Fee.
- **No Cashback**: No base cashback on spending, though occasional coupons exist, they are unstable.

---

## ⚠️ Special Mention: "Look But Don't Touch" (Region Restricted)

Many cards highly recommended in English reviews online **may not be applicable in specific regions**. Availability depends on your **Country/Region**, so be aware:

- **Revolut**: Region-restricted, unavailable for application or use in many places globally (like most of Asia).
- **MetaMask Card**: Currently in pilot, supporting virtual cards in select regions, not yet widely open.
- **Gnosis Pay**: Available in regions like Europe, but not globally universal.


> **Reminder**: Card availability may change at any time due to national regulations and KYC rules. Before applying, always check the latest official announcements or join communities to confirm the current status.

---

## Summary: How to Choose?

### Comprehensive Comparison Table

| Card | Tier | Cashback | FX Fee | Monthly Free ATM | ATM Fee | Best For |
| :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Ready (Metal)** | S | 3%–6% ($STRK) | 0% | $800 | 0% | Travel / Google Pay |
| **Ready (Lite)** | S | 0.5% ($STRK) | 1% | $200 | 0% | Budget / Testing |
| **Ether.fi** | S | 3% (wETH, tiered) | 1% | None | 2% ($250/day) | HODLers / Apple Pay |
| **Kast** | S | Up to 12% (Points + $MOVE) | ~1.5% | None | $3 + 2% | High Yield / SOL Staking |
| **PAYY** | A | Points | 1% | Beta Phase | N/A | Privacy Needs |
| **Bybit** | A | — | 2% (APAC) | ~$108 (100 EUR) | 2% | Exchange Users / Lazy |
| **Bitget** | B | — | 1.7%+ (over limit) | None | $0.65 + 2% | Wallet Native |
| **Crypto.com** | B | Depends on CRO Stake | 0% (tiered) | $200–$1,000 | 2% | Airport Lounge |
| **RedotPay** | C | None | 1.2% + 1% + 1% | None | 2% | Last Resort |

⸻

## FAQ

**Q1: What is a Stablecoin Crypto Card?**

A: A Stablecoin Crypto Card is a cryptocurrency payment card (usually Visa or Mastercard network) that allows you to spend stablecoins (like USDT, USDC) in physical stores or online, automatically converting them to local fiat currency for payment, just like a regular debit or prepaid card.

**Q2: How is it different from a regular crypto card?**

A: Traditional crypto cards might primarily use volatile assets like BTC, ETH, while stablecoin cards use digital currencies with **relatively stable value** (usually pegged to fiat like USD), reducing the impact of value volatility.

**Q3: Can I spend stablecoins directly in stores?**

A: Yes. After topping up stablecoins to the card, the system will **automatically convert stablecoins to local fiat** at the time of spending, just like a traditional card.

**Q4: Which stablecoins are supported?**

A: Most stablecoin cards support major stablecoins, such as:
- **USDT** (Tether)
- **USDC** (USD Coin)
Details vary by provider; some may only support specific stablecoins.

**Q5: Where can I use stablecoin cards?**

A: You can use them anywhere Visa / Mastercard is accepted globally (online or offline). Some cards allow ATM withdrawals (depending on card policy), and can be linked to Apple Pay, Google Pay, Samsung Pay (if supported).

**Q6: How does topping up work?**

A: You first transfer stablecoins (e.g., USDT/USDC) to the card service's wallet or platform. The system converts to fiat **in real-time** to settle the transaction when you pay.

**Q7: What fees should I watch out for?**

A: Fee structures vary, but common fees include:
- Top-up fees
- Currency conversion or FX fees
- Withdrawal fees (if ATM is supported)
- Issuance / Annual fees (some cards)
Always check the issuer's "Fee Schedule". Some cards like imToken Card (issued by Fiat24) have no annual fee but might have a 1% top-up fee or hidden exchange rate costs.

**Q8: Do stablecoin cards charge foreign transaction fees?**

A: This depends on the card policy. Some may not charge extra foreign transaction fees but simply use the Mastercard/Visa rate (which might have a spread). Refer to the official terms of the specific card.

**Q9: Are there rewards (like cashback)?**

A: Some crypto cards offer cashback or stablecoin rewards. This is a card feature, not universal. For example, some cards let you receive rewards in stablecoins rather than volatile tokens.

**Q10: Does card spending trigger tax events?**

A: In some places, converting stablecoins to fiat or spending them may be considered a taxable transaction. Please handle tax reporting according to local laws and tax regulations.

---

📌 **Risks to Note Before Use**

#### ⚠️ Stablecoin and Platform Risk
Even if named "stable," there is a possibility of losing the 1:1 peg (de-pegging); historically USDT and USDC have both briefly de-pegged. Additionally, if the fiat gateway or platform faces bankruptcy or insolvency, assets might not be immediately retrievable.

#### ⚠️ Regulation and Compliance
Regulations on stablecoins and lending cards are still evolving globally. Interest fees or token rewards from lending cards (like Ready or Ether.fi) might be considered taxable income in some regions.

#### ⚠️ Card Availability
Not all stablecoin cards are supported in every region globally. Some cards may not be open in certain countries/regions yet.

> **Disclaimer**: This article is for information purposes only and does not constitute financial, investment, or tax advice. Crypto assets carry significant risks, including the possibility of principal loss. Please Do Your Own Research (DYOR) and consult qualified professionals before making any financial decisions.

---

## 💡 Author's Summary: Strategy & Selection Guide

**My Core View:**
Crypto Cards require KYC, raising the barrier for Point Farming and leaving mostly real users. Therefore, I am personally willing to "bet" on the future explosive potential of cards like **Kast** and **PAYY**.

**But before copying my trade, confirm your actual needs:**

1. **Supported Currencies**: Confirm it supports stablecoins you hold (e.g., USDT / USDC).
2. **Fee Structure**: Note various fees (top-up, conversion, withdrawal, maintenance).
3. **Available Regions**: Is it supported in your country?
4. **ATM Withdrawal Needs**: Do you frequently need cash? (**Ready** is first choice, 0% fee).
5. **Bank Account Needs**: Do you need a USD fiat off-ramp channel? (**Kast** is first choice, supporting ACH transfers).
6. **Self-Custody**: Do you insist on not keeping assets on centralized platforms?

⸻

## 🤝 Affiliate Disclosure

This article contains referral links. If you sign up through these links, I may earn a reward, and you may also receive extra opening bonuses. Here are the specific reward mechanisms for each platform:

| Platform | What I Earn | What You Earn |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **[Ether.fi](https://www.ether.fi/refer/970ebbc5)** | 10% Cashback on referral's spend<br>Cap at $1,000 | **15% Cashback** (dinning, grocery, ride)<br>Valid until Feb 28, 2026 |
| **[Kast](https://go.kast.xyz/VqVO/I59TWTGF)** | 200 Points ($100+ basic spend)<br>5000 Points (Paid card purchase) | **200 Points** (KYC + $100 spend)<br>**20% Off Paid Card** (Auto-applied at checkout) |
| **[Ready](https://join.ready.co/CIBU-SXQF-OKOX)** | $15 (When you spend $50) | **$15** (When you spend $50) |
| **[PAYY](https://payy.link/invite/DVHKHH)** | 10,000 Points / Person | - |
| **[Bybit](https://www.bybit.com/cards/?ref=XRXKOV#0&source=applet_invite)** | $20 | **$10** (Cumulative spend $100 in 30 days) |

2026 is the Warring States Period for Crypto Cards. Choosing a card that fits your spending habits is the only way to truly turn crypto assets into purchasing power in your daily life!

---

## Claude Code UX Researcher: Automated Competitor Benchmarking with AI Agents <a id="claude-code-ux-researcher"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/claude-code-ux-researcher
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: Claude Code, Playwright, Anthropic Vision, DeFiLlama API
Concepts: Autonomous Agents, UX Research, Competitor Analysis, AI Vision

### Summary
Manual competitive audits are a thing of the past. Learn how to use Claude Code + Playwright to build an autonomous UX researcher, using Perp DEX volume as a live example.

### Content
# Claude Code UX Researcher: Automated Competitor Benchmarking with AI Agents

**TL;DR**: Stop wasting 10 hours a week on manual "Competitive Audits." By combining **Claude Code** (terminal agent) with **Playwright**, you can build a headless UX researcher that scrapes competitors, analyzes their UI with AI Vision, and generates a structured benchmarking matrix—using **Perp DEX** volume leaders as a live case study.

## Who This Is For
- **UX Researchers**: Tired of manual screenshots and spreadsheets, wanting to focus on strategic analysis.
- **Product Managers**: Needing rapid competitor feature tracking to inform PRD decisions.
- **dApp Competitive Analysts**: Specialized in studying interaction patterns across the Web3 ecosystem.

### User Journey
> **Actor**: Max, Senior Designer at a DEX protocol.
> 1. **Trigger**: Runs the `claude-watchtower` script on Monday morning.
> 2. **Auto-Pilot**: Agent identifies top protocols via API and captures fresh screenshots.
> 3. **AI Analysis**: Claude Vision compares the "Trade Terminal" layouts against his own product.
> 4. **Outcome**: Max reviews a structured Markdown report in 10 mins, saving 8 hours of manual labor.

---

## The Problem: The "Audit Fatigue"

In the fast-moving DeFi space, competitors launch new features every week. For Product Designers and PMs, keeping up means:
1. Manually visiting 10+ dApps.
2. Taking dozens of screenshots.
3. Filling out a spreadsheet with "Yes/No" for feature parity.
4. Documenting UX copy changes.

By the time you finish, the audit is already outdated. This is a classic "High Repetition, High Value" task—the perfect candidate for an **AI Agent Workflow**.

---

## Level 1: The AI-Powered Handoff

Instead of doing this yourself, we delegate the "Legwork" to Claude.

### Step 1: Automated Discovery (DeFiLlama Volume)
We don't want to maintain a list of competitors manually. Use the DeFiLlama API to find the **Top 10 Perp DEXs by 24h Volume**. High volume usually correlates with highly optimized trading interfaces.

**Prompt to Claude Code**:
> "Write a script that uses the DeFiLlama API to fetch the top 10 Perp DEX protocols by 24h Trading Volume. Save their trading interface URLs to a JSON file."

### Step 2: The "Eyes" (Playwright)
Claude Code can generate and execute a Playwright script to visit these URLs in headless mode. 

**The Key Action**: Capture a screenshot of the "Trading Terminal" and "Asset Selector."

```javascript
// Example Playwright snippet generated by Claude
const { chromium } = require('playwright');

(async () => {
  const browser = await chromium.launch();
  const page = await browser.newPage();
  await page.goto('https://hyperliquid.xyz');
  await page.screenshot({ path: 'assets/hyperliquid-trade.png' });
  await browser.close();
})();
```

---

## Level 2: AI Vision Analysis

Capturing screenshots is only half the battle. Now, we use **Anthropic's Vision** capabilities to "Read" the UX.

We feed the screenshots back into Claude with a structured prompt:
> "Analyze this screenshot of 'Hyperliquid Trade Interface.' Extract:
> 1. Placement of the 'Trade' panel (Left/Right).
> 2. Primary CTA color (Hex if possible).
> 3. List all visible assets (ETH, USDC, etc.).
> 4. Evaluate the 'Hierarchy' score from 1-5 based on visual clarity."

---

## The Output: The Benchmarking Matrix

The final result isn't a folder of images; it's a **Clean Markdown Matrix** that you can drop directly into your PRD or Notion workspace.

| Protocol | Key Asset | Primary CTA | Visual Style | UX Complexity | 24h Volume |
| :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Hyperliquid** | USDC | Deposit | Trading Terminal | High | $1.2B+ |
| **dYdX** | USDC | Trade Now | Institutional | High | $800M+ |
| **GMX** | GLP/GM | Long/Short | DeFi Native | Moderate | $300M+ |

---

### Quantified Results: AI Agent vs. Manual Audit

| Feature | Manual Audit (10 protocols) | AI Agent (Autonomous) |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Data Collection** | ~4 hours | < 5 mins |
| **Vision Depth** | Subjectivity-prone | Structured (Colors/Layout) |
| **Maintenance** | High (Manual Reshooting) | Low (Single command rerun) |
| **Accuracy** | Prone to fatigue/omission | Consistent rule application |

---

## FAQ

**Q: How do you verify AI analysis results?**
A: We recommend a "Spot Check" approach. Randomly audit 10-20% of the generated snapshots to ensure the Vision model is interpreting specialized UI (like complex D3 charts or Web3 modals) correctly.

**Q: Can it analyze interfaces that require wallet connection?**
A: While Playwright can inject private keys or simulate sessions, it adds complexity. Initially, it's best to focus on public post-landing page "Trade" terminals that don't require an active connection for visual benchmarking.

---

## Risk Disclosure

While AI Agents dramatically increase efficiency, be aware of these limitations:
1. **Visual Dependency**: This approach relies on static screenshots. Deep "Interaction Flows" (e.g., animations triggered by scroll or multi-step modals) are harder for AI to analyze without human-in-the-loop intervention.
2. **Token Costs**: Capturing high-resolution screenshots and processing them through Vision models will incur API costs.
3. **Anti-Bot Measures**: Some dApps might block headless browsers. You may need proxies or more "human-like" Playwright configurations.

---

## 🚀 Why This Matters for 2026

Efficiency is no longer enough. To survive in the "Human + AI" era, you must move from being a **Researcher** to an **Architect**. 

Instead of spending 8 hours collecting data, you spend 15 minutes reviewing the **AI Audit** and 7 hours 45 minutes making the actual design decisions that differentiate your product. **Shift from data collector to data architect.**

---

## Conclusion: Build Your Watchtower
Don't just keep up with the competition—observe them autonomously. By building a "Claude Watchtower," you transform a tedious chore into a strategic advantage.

*Are you ready to automate your next audit? Let's build it.*

---

## Multi-AI Orchestration: Combining Specialized Tools for High-Quality Content <a id="multi-ai-collaboration-workflow"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/multi-ai-collaboration-workflow
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: Claude 3.5, Midjourney V6, Gamma 3.0, Dify, Coze
Concepts: AI Orchestration, Multi-Agent Systems, Content Operations, Distributed Intelligence

### Summary
Stop looking for the perfect 'All-in-one' AI. Learn how to coordinate specialized AI tools like Claude and Midjourney into a high-performance team to produce 10x better results.

### Content
# Multi-AI Orchestration: Combining Specialized Tools for High-Quality Content

**TL;DR**: Stop settling for mediocre "all-in-one" outputs. By treating AI tools as a specialized team—separating logic (Text) from aesthetics (Visuals)—you can produce content that far exceeds the limits of any single generalist model.

---

## 1. The Myth of the All-in-One AI: Why Coordination Wins

Is there really a single AI that can write perfectly structured copy, design layouts, and generate context-aware cinematic visuals simultaneously? While many tools claim to be "all-in-one," the results are often generic, "canned" outputs that lack depth and precision.

### 1.1 The Theoretical Background: Multi-Agent Systems (MAS)
In AI research, the concept of **Multi-Agent Systems (MAS)** and **Distributed Intelligence** suggests that complex problems are best solved not by a monolithic program, but by multiple specialized agents working together. This collaborative approach enhances accuracy, scalability, and the specialized "expertise" of the final output.

### 1.2 Why This Matters for Content Creators
The limitation isn't just the AI's capability—it's the trade-off between versatility and specialization. Dedicated tools like Midjourney (for aesthetics) or Claude (for logical structure) have weights and optimizations that generalist models simply haven't matched yet.

---

## 2. 🏗️ Core Logic: Connecting the "Brain" and the "Eyes"

The "Orchestration Workflow" is built on the simple principle of **Division of Labor and Handoff Points**.

### 2.1 Decision Guide: When to Switch Tools?

| Task Component | Recommended Field | Handoff Trigger | Why skip the All-in-One? |
| :--- | :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Logic & Structure** | Logic Models (Claude 3.5) | Once the framework is solid. | Generalists often include filler or lack depth. |
| **High-End Visuals** | Pro Imagery (Midjourney) | Convert text to MJ Prompts. | Integrated generators lack cinematic control. |
| **Layout & Final Delivery**| Specialized UX (Gamma / Canva) | Once all assets are ready. | Purpose-built tools support better hierarchy and 4K output. |

### 2.2 Phase 1: The Brain (Logic, Strategy, and Hierarchy)
Start with a logic-heavy model to define the soul of your content.
- **Task**: Creating outlines, hierarchy, core messaging, and visual prompts for the next agent.
- **Key Decision**: Do not attempt to generate visual assets here. Keep it structured text only.

### 2.3 Phase 2: The Lens (Visual Presence and Aesthetics)
Handoff the text requirements to specialized engines.
- **Task**: Convert concepts into high-production value visual assets.
- **Decision Point**: Use Midjourney for cinematic or artistic flair; use DALL-E 3 for rapid, logical icons.

---

## 3. 🛠️ Practical Case: Generating a Pro-Level PPT

Imagine you need to create a keynote presentation on "The Future of DeFi":

1. **Step A (Claude)**: "Generate a 10-slide outline for a DeFi presentation. For each slide, provide a specific visual prompt for a cyberpunk, abstract financial image."
2. **Step B (Midjourney)**: Batch run the prompts generated in Step A, ensuring style consistency using `--sref`.
3. **Step C (Gamma)**: Import the text structure and manually replace the generic AI-generated images with your high-quality Midjourney assets.

**The Result**: A presentation that looks custom-designed, not auto-generated.

---

## 4. ⚠️ Risks & Constraints (The Trade-offs)

Before adopting a multi-AI workflow, you must account for these practical challenges:

- **Coordination Overhead**: Moving data between tools requires a manual "handoff." For low-priority tasks, this is often overkill.
- **Tool Costs & Latency**: Subscribing to multiple Pro tiers (Claude + Midjourney + Gamma) is expensive, and the total generation time is 3-5x longer than a single-prompt approach.
- **Style Consistency Challenges**: While tools like `--sref` help, manually fine-tuning styles across different platforms still requires a "Human-in-the-loop" to ensure visual harmony.

---

## 5. ⚖️ Decision Rule: When NOT to Use This Workflow

- **Best For**: External presentations, high-traffic blog posts, hero images, and in-depth reports.
- **Skip It When**: Writing internal memos, personal notes, or low-priority status updates.

**Rule of Thumb**: If the priority of the content is lower than the 30-minute coordination cost, use an "All-in-one" single prompt.

---

## FAQ

**Q1: How do I maintain visual consistency across all images?**

A: Use consistent Style Reference parameters (like `--sref` or `--cref` in Midjourney) and lock in core aesthetic keywords across your prompts.

**Q2: Isn't this more work than using an AI PPT generator?**

A: Yes, it takes about 20% more time, but the quality increase is roughly 500%.

---

## 7. 🚀 Evolution: Moving to Automated Pipelines

Once you master the logic of manual "handoffs," the next step is automation via Multi-Agent platforms.

### 7.1 Using Agent Platforms (Dify, Coze)
Platforms like **Dify** or **Coze** allow you to build workflows that handle the coordination automatically:
- **Node 1 (Reasoning)**: Input title -> Output structure + Prompts.
- **Node 2 (Vision)**: Prompts -> Pull from Image APIs.
- **Node 3 (Output)**: Merge -> Deliver to Workspace.

### 7.2 When to Automate?
- **High Repetition**: Daily news graphics or product descriptions.
- **Scaling Up**: When content volume exceeds manual management.

---

## 8. Conclusion: From Operator to Orchestrator

The future of productivity isn't about finding a smarter AI; it's about becoming a better **Orchestrator**. By coordinating specialized tools, you unlock a level of quality that generalists simply can't touch. **Don't let one model do your thinking—let a team of models build your vision.**

---

## OpenClaw Setup Guide 2026: Is It Worth the Security Risk? Honest Decision Framework <a id="should-i-setup-an-openclaw"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/should-i-setup-an-openclaw
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: OpenClaw, Node.js 22, Anthropic Claude, Mac mini
Concepts: AI Agent Orchestration, Sandbox Isolation, Individual Productivity, Automation

### Summary
OpenClaw can save you 14 hours/week — but 512 vulnerabilities and 12% malicious plugins make security critical. This guide covers Mac mini isolation, API vs subscription costs, and whether it's worth deploying in 2026.

### Content
# Should You Set Up OpenClaw? A Decision Guide for Beginners to Engineers

**TL;DR**: OpenClaw is not just for engineers. It's the ultimate weapon for **non-technical users** to break through automation barriers. It operates your PC directly via a self-hosted gateway. For individuals seeking extreme productivity who can provide an **isolated environment (like a Mac mini)**, it is currently the most powerful "digital employee" available.

---

## 1. OpenClaw: Your 24/7 Digital Assistant

When you hear the community talk about "Lobster AI," they are referring to **OpenClaw**. It's not just a chat window; it's an automation hub that "actively executes" tasks.

### 1.1 Why Non-Techies Should Pay Attention
Previously, automations like "gathering web data and summarizing it into a report" or "monitoring specific emails and auto-replying" were impossible without an engineer.
OpenClaw changes that. You can now have a **universal assistant** that handles complex operations you've only dreamed of. If you can give clear instructions, the AI does the heavy lifting for you.

### 1.2 Starting with Individuals: Not Just for Teams
While OpenClaw supports team collaboration, its current sweet spot is the **individual power user**. By deploying "Lobster," one person can do the work of ten, delegating all tedious administrative tasks to the AI.

---

## 2. Security Strategy: Why "Isolation" is the Baseline, Not an Option

Since OpenClaw possesses high system privileges (shell execution, file access, browser control), its power comes with significant security risks.

### 2.1 Real-World Case: The ClawHavoc Malware Incident
In early 2026, security researchers identified a massive attack campaign named "ClawHavoc" targeting the official ClawHub skill marketplace.
- **The Scale**: Out of 2,800 scanned skills, **341 to 386 were found to be malicious** (approx. 12%).
- **The Impact**: These plugins masqueraded as helpful tools (e.g., Crypto trading assistants) but actually contained backdoors to steal browser passwords, SSH keys, and cryptocurrency private keys.

### 2.2 Critical Vulnerability: CVE-2026-25253 (One-Click RCE)
A severe **One-Click Remote Code Execution (RCE)** flaw was discovered in the OpenClaw Control UI. In plain terms: RCE means an attacker can run any command on your machine as if they were sitting in front of it — installing malware, stealing files, or wiping your disk.
- **How it works**: An attacker only needs to trick you into clicking a malicious link. Through your browser, they can connect back to your local OpenClaw gateway and seize control of your computer.
- **Exposure**: Reportedly, over **40,000 OpenClaw instances** exposed to the internet were vulnerable to this hijack.

### 2.3 The Digital Sandbox: Physical Mac mini Isolation
For lighter-weight alternatives with lower security risk, check out our [Self-Hosted AI Assistant Alternatives Comparison](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide).

Given these risks, **physical isolation is the only safe best practice**:
- **Use a dedicated Mac mini**: Never host OpenClaw on a machine containing sensitive personal data. It is a "Faustian Bargain"—you trade hardware isolation for automation power.
- **Clean Environment**: Even if you hit a malicious skill or an RCE vulnerability, the damage is confined to the "sandbox machine" which holds no critical assets.

---

## 3. Cost Analysis: API vs. Subscription

Before jumping in, you must understand the billing logic.

| Item | OpenClaw | Claude Code (Official CLI) |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Software Cost** | Open Source / Free | Requires Claude Pro/Max |
| **Operational Cost** | **Supports API or Claude Sub** | Within Sub (Free within limits) |
| **Billing Type** | **API Key or Setup-Token** | Fixed Monthly Fee |
| **Potential Risk** | "Bill Shock" (API usage) | Predictable (Fixed cost) |

> **💡 Pro Tip**: OpenClaw is extremely flexible. It supports not only pay-as-you-go API Keys but also the **Claude Subscription Setup-Token**. This is a huge win for existing Claude Pro/Max users—you can **offset Lobster's usage against your existing plan quota**, avoiding additional, unpredictable API bills. This creates a "fixed-cost" strategy that significantly boosts ROI, though standard subscription usage limits still apply.

> **⚠️ Important**: Using Claude subscription tokens in third-party tools like OpenClaw may violate Anthropic's Terms of Service. Anthropic has actively restricted such usage (see the full story: [OpenCode vs Anthropic Controversy](/posts/opencode-anthropic-legal-controversy-2026)), and heavy automated workloads will hit subscription rate limits much faster than normal chat sessions. Treat Setup-Token as a convenience workaround, not an officially supported integration — and be prepared to switch to API billing if access is revoked. For a complete cost breakdown, see [Claude Code Cost Guide](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost).

---

## 4. Comparison: Why Lobster if I have Claude Code?

This is the most frequent question. The two serve entirely different roles.

| Feature | Claude Code | OpenClaw |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Primary Target** | Developers | **Anyone wanting automation** |
| **Interface** | Terminal | **Multi-platform (Telegram/Discord/Web)** |
| **Proactivity** | Reactive (Responds to ask) | **Proactive Reporting** (Notifies you when done) |
| **Best For** | Code editing, Git ops | Cross-platform, Browser automation |
| **Ideal Scenario** | While coding/debugging | Ordering tasks from your phone while away |

**Why Lobster?** When you are away from your desk and want to run a complex 3-hour automation flow and receive a notification on Telegram when it's done—that's Lobster's home field.

---

## 5. Value vs. Barrier: Do You Really Need Lobster?

### 5.1 Real Case: Newsletter Automation Workflow
Instead of abstract benefits, let's look at the numbers:
- **Traditional Flow**: Manually scanning social feeds, filtering news, drafting, and formatting. Time: **~15 hours/week**.
- **OpenClaw Flow**: An agent scans feeds on a schedule, filters noise, drafts content in the CMS, and sends a Telegram preview for approval. Time: **~1 hour/week**.
- **The Result**: **14 hours saved per week**. This is the core value proposition.

### 5.2 The Brutal Truth: The Technical Barrier
While technically usable by anyone, the **setup process is notoriously hostile to beginners**:
- **Environment Hell**: Node.js version conflicts, Docker permission issues, and Git errors transform setup into "Deployment Hell" for non-technical users.
- **Maintenance Burden**: You must be willing to debug environment issues and maintain a strict security posture (isolation, token rotation).

### 5.3 Five Decision Indicators

1.  **Isolation Capacity (Safety Baseline)**: Can you provide a dedicated host (like a Mac mini)? If not, the risk is likely too high.
2.  **High-Frequency Repetitive Tasks**: Does your work involve significant "cross-app/cross-web" administrative labor?
3.  **Patience for Debugging**: Are you willing to spend 3 hours fixing an environment bug to save 3 hours every day for the next year?
4.  **Extreme ROI Focus**: Is saving 10 hours a week worth the $20-$100/month operational cost to you?
5.  **Remote Control Needs**: Do you need to trigger heavy tasks at home via your phone while traveling?

---

## 6. Risks & Disclosure (Mandatory)

Power comes with responsibility. Understand these risks before deploying Lobster:

1.  **The Loop Trap (Cost Spike)**: AI can occasionally fall into logic loops (e.g., trying to fix an unfixable bug repeatedly). Without limits, this can generate hundreds of dollars in API costs quickly. **Mitigation: Set budget limits and enable notifications.**
2.  **File Destruction**: OpenClaw has shell permissions like `rm` and `mv`. Vague instructions could result in accidental deletion of critical files. **Mitigation: Never run it in directories with sensitive data and no backups.**
3.  **Privacy & Confidentiality**: While OpenClaw is open source, the data sent to the "brain" (code, report content) passes through AI provider servers. **Mitigation: Avoid processing data containing plaintext access keys or PII.**
4.  **Isolate, Isolate, Isolate**: Running Lobster on your **primary workstation** is extremely dangerous. If you lack isolation, use Claude Code or in-browser AI tools instead.
5.  **Poisoned Plugins**: Only use skills from the official core library or highly trusted sources. **Never** install unverified `.pen` files or scripts.

---

## FAQ

**Q1: Is OpenClaw free?**

A: The software itself is open source and free. However, you'll need to pay for the AI "brain" — either through Anthropic API usage (pay-per-token) or by using an existing Claude Pro/Max subscription via Setup-Token. Expect $20–$100/month in operational costs depending on usage intensity.

**Q2: Can I run OpenClaw on Windows or Linux?**

A: Yes. OpenClaw supports macOS, Windows, and Linux. However, the recommended **isolated Mac mini setup** is specific to macOS. On Windows/Linux, you can achieve similar isolation using a dedicated virtual machine or a secondary device.

**Q3: How much does a Mac mini isolation setup cost?**

A: A refurbished Mac mini (M1/M2) starts around $400–$500 USD. Combined with monthly AI costs ($20–$100), your first-year total investment is roughly $640–$1,700. Compare this against the value of hours saved per week to evaluate ROI.

**Q4: What happens if OpenClaw goes down or the project is abandoned?**

A: Since OpenClaw is open source, the code remains available even if the core team disbands. However, you'd lose official updates and security patches. This is another reason to maintain strict isolation — reducing blast radius if maintenance lapses.

---

## 8. Conclusion

The brilliance of OpenClaw is that it turns "automation previously reserved for hackers" into "digital power deployable by anyone." It's not a tool replacement; it's the butler of your digital world.

**Action Suggestion**:
OpenClaw is not a "standard requirement" for everyone. Please check your **Automation Needs** first (Indicators 2-5). If you fit multiple needs **and possess the Isolation/Risk Avoidance capability** (Indicator 1), then now is the best time to transform into a "one-person team."

**Further Reading**:
- Ready to compare alternatives? See [Self-Hosted AI Assistant Guide: OpenClaw vs NanoClaw vs Nanobot vs PicoClaw](/posts/openclaw-alternatives-guide)
- How to optimize costs? Read [Claude Code Cost Guide: Choosing Between Pro/Max/API After the OAuth Lockout](/posts/openclaw-claude-code-oauth-cost)
- What happened with Anthropic's crackdown? Full story at [OpenCode vs Anthropic: The 2026 Open vs Closed Ecosystem Battle](/posts/opencode-anthropic-legal-controversy-2026)

---

## Zero-Maintenance Feedback: Building a Telegram + AI Vision Triage Bot <a id="telegram-feedback-bot-ai-vision"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/telegram-feedback-bot-ai-vision
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: ChatGPT, Claude, Google Gemini, Jira, Python, Slack, Telegram
Concepts: AI, Automation, Backend, Health, Management, Productivity

### Summary
Stop manual triage. Learn how to use Telegram, AI Vision (GPT-5.2), and n8n to automatically turn forwarded screenshots into structured Jira tickets.

### Content
# Zero-Maintenance Feedback: Building a Telegram + AI Vision Triage Bot

## TL;DR
- **Frictionless Intake**: Use a Telegram group as your "Inbox". Forward any feedback or screenshot there, and let the bot handle the rest.
- **AI-Powered Triage**: Use LLMs (like GPT-4o or Gemini) to analyze images, extract error text, and categorize the intent (Bug, Feature, etc.).
- **Jira Automation**: Automatically create tickets *with* attachments or link to existing ones, keeping your requirement management loop clean.

---

The problem? **Triage is a chore.** Moving that image from your phone to Jira, writing a description, and tagging it properly takes enough effort that 50% of feedback just dies in your "Saved Messages".

As an **AI-augmented PM**, your goal is to automate the mundane so you can focus on the product strategy. Here is how to build a **Zero-Maintenance Feedback Loop**.

## The Workflow: From Screenshot to Structured Ticket

Instead of a complex app or a heavy SDK, we stay where the users (and your teammates) already are: **Telegram**.

### 1. The Inbox: A Telegram "Triage" Group
Create a private Telegram group and add your bot as an **Administrator**. 

> **IMPORTANT: The Privacy Gotcha**
> By default, Telegram bots cannot see group messages unless they are commands or mentions. To fix this, you must **Turn Off Privacy Mode** via [@BotFather](https://t.me/botfather) (under Bot Settings > Group Privacy) or ensure the bot is an Admin with "Manage Messages" permissions.

- **Step**: Every time you see a bug or a user sends you feedback, simply forward it to this group.
- **Why**: It centralizes chaos. You don't need to open your laptop; you just forward and forget.

### 2. The Trigger: Manual Agent vs. Automated Task
Depending on your workflow, you can handle the message ingestion in two ways:

1. **Option A: Manual / Agentic (Claude Skill)**: 
   - **How**: You manually trigger a task in your AI environment (like Antigravity or a CLI tool). 
   - **Trigger**: "Claude, fetch the last 10 messages from the Triage Group and process them."
   - **Benefit**: High control, saves on automated API calls, and allows you to add immediate context (e.g., "This relates to the current sprint").

2. **Option B: Automated / Scheduled (n8n & Cron)**:
   - **How**: Set up a recurring task using **n8n** or a local **Cronjob**.
   - **Trigger**: Every hour (or every message via Webhook), the system automatically sweeps the group.
   - **Benefit**: True "zero-maintenance". Feedback flows into Jira even while you sleep, using dedicated LLM API keys for background processing.

### 3. The Brain: AI Vision Analysis (GPT-5.2 / GPT-4.5 Turbo)
The bot sends the photo to a multimodal LLM. In 2026, you have two prime choices:
- **GPT-5.2**: The gold standard for complex reasoning. Best if you need the AI to cross-reference your specific technical specs or PRDs.
- **GPT-4.5 Turbo**: 70% cheaper and hyper-optimized. Perfect for simple "Is this a bug?" classifications.

**The Prompt**: 
> "Analyze this screenshot. Extract any visible error messages, identify the UI components involved, and determine if this is a Bug, Feature Request, or UX Improvement."

**Structured Output Example**:
```json
{
  "triage_type": "bug",
  "priority": "P2",
  "summary": "Login page failure on mobile",
  "description": "User reported 404 error during SSO login flow. Error text: 'Service Unavailable'.",
  "components": ["Auth", "Mobile Web"],
  "suggested_action": "check_existing_ticket: AUTH-123"
}
```

### 4. The Execution: Jira Integration
Finally, the system calls the Jira API.
- **New Issues**: For unique bugs, it creates a ticket, uploads the original screenshot as an attachment, and sets the priority.
- **Existing Tickets**: If the AI detects it's a known issue, it simply adds the new screenshot as a comment to the existing tracker.

## Setup Guide (Preview)

[Detailed technical steps for n8n configuration and API scripts will be expanded in the next iteration.]

### Technical Stack
- **Entry**: Telegram Bot API (via BotFather).
- **Orchestration**: n8n (for low-code) or a Python script using `telethon` and `jira-python`.
- **Vision**: OpenAI GPT-4o or Google Gemini Pro Vision.

## Conclusion
The best tools are the ones you actually use. By bridging the gap between a casual message and a formal requirement tracker, you ensure that no valuable feedback "slips through the cracks".

---

## Ikyu.com Booking Guide: Japanese vs International Version & Why It Beats Official Sites <a id="why-ikyu-often-beats-official-hotel-sites"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/why-ikyu-often-beats-official-hotel-sites
Date: 2026-02-15
Tools: Ikyu.com
Concepts: Hotel Booking, Japan Travel, Points System, Travel Savings

### Summary
Ikyu.com's Japanese and international sites are fundamentally different platforms — the Japanese version has full membership while international only offers "Check Reservation". This guide breaks down the key differences, demonstrates saving ~5,000 JPY via instant point usage at Lake Toya's Konosumi, and walks overseas travelers through the booking process.

### Content
## TL;DR

1.  **Japan's Local Booking Secret**: **[Ikyu.com](https://www.ikyu.com/)** is a booking platform widely used by Japanese locals, covering everything from business hotels to luxury ryokans — and it frequently offers better prices than official sites, especially for premium properties.
2.  **The Killer Feature**: Ikyu lets you **use points earned from the current booking immediately**, effectively giving an instant cash discount.
3.  **Real Example**: I saved nearly **5,000 JPY** booking "The Lake Suite Konosumi" via Ikyu compared to the official site.

---

Seasoned travelers often follow a rule: "Check prices on Agoda/Booking.com, then book on the official website for the Best Rate Guarantee."

This logic works well for Western chains (Marriott, Hilton) or business hotels. **However, in the Japanese luxury hotel and Ryokan market, Ikyu.com frequently breaks this rule.**

While Agoda uses dynamic pricing to sometimes undercut official rates (at the risk of price fluctuations and booking reliability), **Ikyu.com** offers a stable, competitive alternative widely used by locals but often overlooked by international tourists.

## Critical: Japanese vs. International Version — It's Not Just a Language Switch!

Ikyu's default site is in Japanese (https://www.ikyu.com/). You'll see an option to switch to English, Chinese, or other languages. It looks like a simple language toggle, **but these are fundamentally different experiences**:

| | Japanese Version | International Version (EN/CN/etc.) |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Membership** | Full login with member tier, points, reservations, coupons | Only "Check Reservation" — no member features |
| **Points Accumulation** | ✅ Earns membership status & points for future benefits | ❌ **Cannot accumulate** (based on testing — bookings don't appear to import to Japanese account) |
| **Property Count** | Fewer (e.g., Sapporo search: 109 results) | More (same dates: 187 results) |
| **Instant Point Use** | ✅ Available | ✅ Available — tested discount amount is the same |
| **Interface** | Japanese only — use browser translation | Multi-language, more intuitive |

![Ikyu Japanese vs International (Chinese/English): The Japanese version shows full login in the top-right corner, while the Chinese and English versions only show "Check Reservation" with no membership features. Same Sapporo search — Japanese version: 109 properties, international versions: 187 properties](ikyu-jp-vs-intl-comparison.png)

### Recommended Strategy

Given the long-term value of membership benefits, **use the Japanese version first**. If the hotel you want isn't listed there, switch to the international version.

In the past, some users reported price differences between the Japanese and international versions, but recent testing suggests they are now in sync. Still, if you have the time, it's worth checking both for quotes to make sure you're not missing a better deal.

## Why is Ikyu Cheaper?

Ikyu is a booking platform owned by LINE Yahoo (formerly Yahoo! Japan). It leans toward quality accommodations, so the selection may be smaller than massive OTAs like Agoda — but for mid-to-high-end hotels and ryokans, it frequently offers better prices than official sites. Its price advantage comes from two key features:

### 1. Instant Point Usage (The Killer Feature)

Most OTAs (Online Travel Agencies) give you points to use *next time*. Ikyu allows you to **"Use points now" (今すぐ利用)**.

-   **Standard Return**: Usually 1% - 2%.
-   **Promotions**: Often boosted to 5% - 10%.
-   **How it works**: Check the "Use points now" box at checkout, and the price drops instantly. It's a direct cash discount.

### 2. Exclusive Plans

Ikyu offers highly competitive pricing for its elite members (Gold, Diamond). Even for first-time free members, "Time Sale" plans can occasionally beat the standard rates on official websites, though these often come with strict quantity, booking window, or cancellation restrictions.

---

## Case Study: The Lake Suite Konosumi (Lake Toya)

I planned a trip to Lake Toya for the 2026 snow season, targeting the high-end [The Lake Suite Konosumi](https://www.konosumika.com/).

Comparing the same date, room (Onsen attached), and meal plan:

### Contender A: Official Website

-   **Original Price**: 99,000 JPY
-   **Final Price**: **94,050 JPY** (After member discount)

### Contender B: Ikyu.com

-   **Original Price**: Approx. 93,500 JPY
-   **Final Price**: **89,100 JPY** (After instant point discount)

![Ikyu vs Official Website Price Comparison: Same room and plan, Ikyu is ~5,000 JPY cheaper after instant point discount](ikyu-vs-official-website-price.png)

**Result: Ikyu saved ~5,000 JPY.**
Seeing this difference, I immediately canceled my official site booking and re-booked through Ikyu.

---

## How to Use Ikyu (For Overseas Travelers — Japanese Version)

Here's a tested, verified guide for using the Japanese version:

1.  **Login**:
    -   Logging into the Japanese version is straightforward. You can use any of: **Yahoo, Google, Facebook, LINE, or Apple** accounts — no separate registration needed.

2.  **No Japanese Phone Number? No Problem.**
    -   The checkout page explicitly states: "If you don't have a mobile phone, identity verification will be done via email."
    -   How it works: If the phone number you enter can't receive SMS (overseas numbers, landlines, or invalid formats), the system **switches to sending a verification code to your email**. Just enter your overseas phone number, and the code will arrive via email.

3.  **Credit Cards**:
    -   **Tested: Overseas credit cards work fine** — no special worries needed.
    -   **Pay at Hotel (現地決済)**: Pay when you arrive to avoid exchange rate fluctuations or cancellation refund fees. Some credit cards offer higher rewards for in-person Japan purchases vs. online.
    -   **Online Payment**: Some deals (usually the cheapest) require online payment. Watch for foreign transaction fees.

4.  **Confirmation**:
    -   Ensure you receive the "Reservation Confirmation" email.
    -   For peace of mind, email the hotel directly: "I booked via Ikyu, reservation number X..... Please confirm."

> **⚠️ Warning: Plans cheaper than the official site are often non-cancellable!** Always check the cancellation policy (キャンセルポリシー) before booking to avoid issues if your plans change.

## Conclusion: Ikyu vs. Official Site

| Scenario | Recommendation | Why? |
| :--- | :--- | :--- |
| **Global Chains** (Marriott, Hyatt) | **Official Site** | For elite status benefits (upgrades, lounge access) and points. |
| **Japanese Luxury / Ryokan** | **Ikyu.com** | Better IT experience and the "Instant Point Discount" is unbeatable. |
| **Business Hotels** | **Compare** | Agoda, Official, and Ikyu fight hard here. Compare all three. |

Next time you book a luxury stay in Japan, don't just check the official site. Take a look at Ikyu—you might find a hidden deal.

> **2026 Hokkaido Travel Alert**
>
> Starting **April 1, 2026**, Hokkaido will introduce an "Accommodation Tax".
> Expect to pay an additional 100 - 500 JPY per person/night at check-in, regardless of where you booked.

---

## The PRD Revolution: A High-Efficiency Offline-First Git-like Workflow <a id="claude-code-prd-workflow"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/claude-code-prd-workflow
Date: 2026-02-14
Tools: Claude, Cursor, GitHub, Jira, Python, Slack, VS Code
Concepts: AI, Automation, Backend, Career, Management, Productivity

### Summary
Stop wrestling with Jira and Confluence in the browser. Learn how to use a Hybrid API + MCP workflow for PRDs to keep your docs in sync and your sanity intact.

### Content
# The "Claude Code" PRD Workflow: A Secret Weapon for Technical PMs

## TL;DR
- **Hybrid Efficiency**: Use targeted API scripts for "bulk" data transport (precision + token savings) and Claude Code/MCP for reasoning and refinement.
- **Offline-First**: Break free from slow, distracting web editors. This workflow allows you to stay focused in your preferred IDE (Cursor, VS Code) or AI environment (Claude Code, Antigravity) while drafting in Markdown.
- **Safety First**: Always use sandbox environments and "Review Diffs" mindsets to avoid catastrophic bulk overwrites.

---

As a Technical Product Manager, your job sits at the intersection of high-level strategy and deep technical implementation. The tools of the trade—often a mix of Jira, Confluence, and Slack—can feel disconnected from the actual engineering reality. It's time to borrow a page from the developer's handbook: **Treat your requirements like code.**

Enter the **Claude Code PRD Workflow**.

## The Problem: The Browser & Context Bottleneck

Drafting a PRD usually involves:
1. Opening Confluence and wrestling with its WYSIWYG editor.
2. Juggling 15+ tabs of technical documentation and Jira tickets.
3. Manually summarizing technical constraints from Slack or GitHub.

This process is not only slow but also prevents you from getting the most value out of an LLM. Simply dumping raw, unstructured data into an AI leads to token waste and lower-quality outputs.

## The Solution: The "Hybrid" Pull/Push Workflow

The most efficient version of this workflow doesn't rely *only* on AI agents for data transport. Instead, it uses a **Hybrid approach**:
1. **API Scripts**: For precise "Pulling" and "Pushing" of raw data (saves tokens, ensures formatting).
2. **Claude Code + MCP**: For intelligent reasoning, cross-referencing, and drafting.

### Step 1: "Pull" Your Context (Precision over Agents)

While you *can* ask an AI agent to "Find and fetch the docs," it's often more efficient to use a simple script targeting the [Jira REST API](https://developer.atlassian.com/cloud/jira/platform/rest/v3/intro/). 

**The Hybrid Move**: Use a script to handle **complex filtering conditions** and precisely control the fetch scope. This is where API scripts shine—mapping specific Jira issue types, recursive child page fetching, or filtering by custom fields that might confuse an agentic search.

```bash
# Example: Precision pull with complex flags
python scripts/fetch_jira.py --jql "project = 'AUTH' AND status = 'In Progress' AND labels in ('v2-refactor')" --depth 2 --output target_scope.md
```
By handling the "transport" via API, you provide Claude with a clean, pre-filtered context. This ensures accuracy when the scope is non-trivial and saves thousands of tokens that an agent might waste trying to "navigate" or "guess" the correct set of files.

### Step 2: Intelligent Cross-Referencing & Drafting

This is where the magic happens. You're not just editing text; you're developing requirements with an intelligent partner that has "eyes" across your entire stack.

**The Multi-Source Context**: Use **Claude Code + MCP** to cross-reference data pulled from Jira and Confluence.
*   **Prompt**: "Claude, analyze the `user-stories` I just pulled from Jira and cross-reference them with the `architecture-spec` on Confluence. Identify any technical gaps in our proposed API auth flow."

**Advanced Technique: "Portable RAG" with NotebookLM**
When your technical documentation grows into the hundreds of pages, even the largest context window can struggle. 
*   **The Strategy**: Use [NotebookLM](https://notebooklm.google.com/) as your external Brain. Index massive PDF specs, legacy confluence exports, and Slack transcripts.
*   **The Bridge**: Use tools like the [NotebookLM Claude Skill](https://github.com/PleasePrompto/notebooklm-skill) to query your indexed knowledge base directly from your CLI. This allows you to "Chat with your Documentation" and pull precise snippets into your PRD draft without manual searching.

### Step 3: "Push" Updates (The Safety Protocol)

> **⚠️ Safety First**: Updating production Confluence or Jira via automated tools carries the risk of bulk overwrites. If your script or agent fails to parse a block correctly, you could accidentally wipe out months of collaborative history.
> **⚠️ 安全至上**：使用自動化工具更新生產環境的 Confluence 或 Jira 具有極高的風險。如果解析出現故障，可能會意外抹除數月來的協作歷史。

**Standard Safety Operating Procedure (SOP)**:
1. **Sandbox First**: Always run your "Push" scripts against a trial Jira project or an orphaned Confluence space first.
2. **Review Diffs**: Treat documentation updates like Code Reviews. Use a tool to see exactly what changed between your local `requirements_v2.md` and the cloud version before committing the push.
3. **Draft Mode**: When possible, push as a "Draft" or "Comment" rather than overwriting the main page content.

## Common Pitfalls & How to Avoid Them

*   **ADF Formatting**: Confluence uses Atlassian Document Format (ADF). Converting Markdown -> ADF can be messy. Use robust libraries like `atlassian-python-api` to handle the heavy lifting.
*   **Context Window**: For massive PRDs (50+ pages), don't dump it all into one prompt. Use RAG or index specific sections using [Anthropic's MCP](https://modelcontextprotocol.io/).
*   **Permissions**: Ensure your API tokens have "Least Privilege"—only grant write access to the specific projects or spaces you are managing.

## Authoritative Resources

*   **[Anthropic Academy](https://academy.anthropic.com/)**: Best practices for engineering with Claude.
*   **[Atlassian Rovo MCP Server](https://support.atlassian.com/rovo/docs/set-up-the-rovo-mcp-server/)**: The official bridge between Claude and your Atlassian data.
*   **[Jira Cloud API Reference](https://developer.atlassian.com/cloud/jira/platform/rest/v3/intro/)**: Documentation for building custom precision scripts.
*   **[Model Context Protocol](https://modelcontextprotocol.io)**: The open standard for AI data integration.

By bridging the gap between product requirements and the tools developers actually use, you don't just write better PRDs—you build better products.

---

## PM Workflow Revolution: Integrating Claude Code, Skills & Sub-Agents (English Version) <a id="pm-workflow-revolution-claude"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/pm-workflow-revolution-claude
Date: 2026-02-14
Tools: ChatGPT, Claude, GitHub, Jira, Slack, Tailwind CSS
Concepts: AI, Automation, Backend, Business, Career, Frontend, Management, Productivity, Project Management, Soft Skills

### Summary
From 'AI Chat' to 'AI Workflow'. Sharing how to use Claude's MCP, Skills (SOP), and Sub-Agents (Persona) to automate PRD and Prototype generation, allowing PMs to focus on high-value decision-making and communication.

### Content
Recently, I introduced **Claude Code** into my Product Management (PM) workflow, and it has been the biggest change in my way of working lately. Specs and prototypes that used to take days can now be done in a few hours, and the AI considers edge cases a hundred times more thoroughly than I do.

This isn't just about asking ChatGPT questions; it's about deeply integrating AI into the **Workflow**. As stated in Anthropic's [Building Effective Agents](https://www.anthropic.com/research/building-effective-agents) guide, true productivity gains come from shifting AI from a simple "chatbot" to an "Agent" capable of executing complex tasks.

## Core Process: One-Person Product Team

My new workflow looks roughly like this, a convergence process from vague to specific:

> **Requirement Intake** → **Claude Skills** (SOP) Initial Analysis → **Sub-agents** (Multi-perspective) Review & Debate → Generate High-Quality **PRD + Prototype** → Cross-Department Communication → Spec Confirmation

It's like having a virtual team on call, ready to work for you at any moment. Rather than just a PM, I act more like the **Commander of an AI Team**.

---

## 1. Claude Skills: Writing Your SOP into the Brain

The concept of **Skills** is simple: write down the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) in your head for the AI to strictly follow. This maps to the "Workflows" concept mentioned by Anthropic—guiding LLMs through predefined paths to ensure consistency.

Previously, when writing a PRD, we had to pay attention to naming consistency, formatting norms, team idioms, and remember to reference old documents. The human brain easily misses details; changing A but forgetting creating a bug in B.

Now, I encapsulate these rules into Skills. Here is a real-world `requirement-analyzer` Skill example:

```markdown
# Skill: Requirement Analyzer

## Role
You are a Senior Technical Product Manager (TPM), skilled at converting vague business requirements into structured User Stories.

## Input
- Raw Input
- Target Audience

## Output Format (Markdown)
1. **Executive Summary**: One sentence explaining what this feature does.
2. **User Stories**: Format as "As a <role>, I want to <action>, so that <benefit>".
3. **Acceptance Criteria (Gherkin Syntax)**:
   - Given [Context]
   - When [Action]
   - Then [Expected Result]
4. **Edge Cases**: List at least 3 extreme conditions (e.g., Network failure, Empty data, Insufficient permissions).

## Rules
- Must use this format: `FE-[Feature Name]-001` as ID.
- Prioritize Mobile First experience.
```

When these rules are written as Code (or System Prompts), AI produces output according to preset standards, stable and consistent. Those time-consuming and error-prone cross-referencing tasks are all handed over to AI.

## 2. Sub-agents: Virtual Avatars for Perspective Taking

If Skills are the "Hands", then **Sub-agents** are the "Brain".

When writing specs alone, it's easy to fall into blind spots. According to Basecamp's [Shape Up Methodology](https://basecamp.com/shapeup), the biggest risk in product development is rushing into development before the work is properly "Shaped".

To avoid this, I created different Agents to conduct "Self-Dialectics":

*   **User Researcher Agent**: Questions if this flow is intuitive? Is there a better experience?
*   **Dev Agent**: Evaluates technical feasibility, clarifies how to open the database schema, and how to connect APIs.
*   **QA Agent**: Specifically looks for loopholes, listing all possible edge cases.
*   **Stakeholder Agent**: Challenges the necessity of this requirement from a business value perspective.

### Simulation Dialogue

> **Me (PM)**: "I want to build a 'One-Click Weekly Report' feature."
>
> **Dev Agent**: "Technically feasible, but consider Context Window limits. If a user has over 500 tickets per week, the API might timeout. I suggest adding Pagination or handling it as an Async Job."
>
> **QA Agent**: "Agreed. Also, what if there are absolutely no tickets this week? Should the report be blank or show default text? And if the API call fails, should there be a Retry mechanism in place?"
>
> **User Researcher Agent**: "Wait, do users really want 'One-Click'? They essentially want to edit the AI output most of the time. I suggest the flow be: Generate Draft -> User Preview/Edit -> Save & Send."

In operation, it's like holding an efficient meeting inside the computer. Previously, these confirmations took several meetings back and forth; now, they can be completed within a few hours. This is the ultimate form of **"Shift Left"**—problems are discovered and solved before the first line of code is written.

## 3. Instant Prototype: No More Imagining in Communication

This is the most powerful part. Even precise text is not as good as a working visual.

Previously, specs were often written but the design wasn't ready. When discussing with engineers or bosses, everyone could only "imagine individually," leading to big misunderstandings discovered only after launch.

Now focusing on Claude Code combined with `v0.dev` or Tailwind CSS, I can directly generate frontend code, giving me a **working Interaction Prototype**.

*   **Before**: "Clicking this button pops up a Modal with three options..." (Engineer: ??)
*   **After**: "Just look at this HTML file, click it and you'll see." (Engineer: Got it.)

Communication efficiency is much faster, and technical details can even be verified before development. No picture, no truth; now I almost always bring a Prototype to meetings.

## 4. Git Flow: Docs as Code

The last key change is **Git Flow**. This aligns perfectly with Atlassian's [Docs as Code](https://www.atlassian.com/agile/knowledge-management/docs-as-code) philosophy.

Previously, documents were scattered across Google Docs, Confluence, or Slack conversations, eventually becoming unmaintained trash (Stale documentation). Now I try to put all outputs into Git version control.

### Recommended File Structure

```bash
project-root/
├── src/                # Source Code
├── docs/
│   ├── adr/            # Architecture Decision Records
│   ├── prd/            # Product Requirement Documents
│   │   ├── 2026-02-feature-A.md
│   │   └── 2026-03-feature-B.md
│   └── specifications/ # Technical Specs
├── .claude/            # AI configurations
│   ├── skills/         # Defined Skills
│   └── prompts/        # Common Prompt Templates
└── README.md
```

The benefits are:
1.  **Single Source of Truth**: Code changes, docs change right beside it.
2.  **Code Review**: Documentation changes go through the Pull Request process, ensuring they are reviewed.
3.  **Traceability**: Who changed what spec and when is clearly recorded in the Git Log.

## Conclusion

Current applications are still very rudimentary, but they have significantly reduced the chance of "producing low-quality documents" and saved a lot of time reinventing the wheel.

Many PMs worry AI will replace them, but I believe AI replaces the "Doer", not the "Thinker". By handing over tedious work (writing docs, drawing charts, searching info) to automation, PMs can spend their time where it truly matters: **Decision Making and Communication**.

Future PMs might be more like commanders of an AI team, and your value will depend on how many AI Agents you can orchestrate to solve complex problems for you.

---

## 2026 Affiliate Marketing Guide: Platform Commissions, Real Income Data & Survival Strategies for the AI Era <a id="what-is-affiliate-marketing"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/what-is-affiliate-marketing
Date: 2023-12-13
Tools: 聯盟網, 通路王, 蝦皮分潤, 博客來 AP
Concepts: 聯盟行銷, 被動收入, SEO, 內容行銷, AI 搜尋

### Summary
The real state of affiliate marketing in 2026 — platform commission comparisons, income tier data, Google HCU and AI search impact analysis to help you decide if it's worth pursuing.

### Content
# 2026 Affiliate Marketing Guide: Platform Commissions, Real Income Data & Survival Strategies for the AI Era

Have you seen those articles claiming people earn six figures a month through affiliate marketing? Most tutorials are still stuck in the 2022-2023 mindset, but three seismic shifts happened in 2025-2026 — Google's Core Update devastated 71% of affiliate sites, AI search dismantled traditional traffic models, and Taiwan's platforms drastically adjusted their commission structures. The rules of the game have fundamentally changed.

This article uses the latest market data and firsthand observations to show you the real state of affiliate marketing in 2026, helping you decide whether it's worth pursuing and how to do it right under the new rules.

**The basic principle of affiliate marketing is simple**: you (the promoter) recommend a product or service through a unique tracking link. When a reader completes a purchase or specific action (sign-up, download, etc.) through your link, you earn a commission from the brand. This model hasn't changed since Amazon pioneered it in 1996, but "what actually works" has been completely transformed.

## TL;DR

- The affiliate marketing market is still growing ($20B+ globally in 2026), but the winner structure is reshuffling — the "write definitions + drop links" model is dead
- Beginners average just $636/month in the first 6-12 months; 41% of practitioners earn under $1,000/month
- Commission rates across Taiwan's five major platforms vary wildly (0.5% to 70%) — choosing the wrong platform means wasted effort
- 2026 survival formula: test-driven content + multi-channel traffic (short-form video/email/social) + high-commission digital products
- This article includes a complete Taiwan platform comparison table, income tier data, and hands-on insights

## The Real State of Affiliate Marketing in 2026 — The Market Is Growing, but Most People Are Leaving

Let's start with the big picture: the global affiliate marketing market was worth roughly $17-18.5 billion in 2025, is projected to exceed $20 billion in 2026, and is expected to reach $71.7 billion by 2034 (CAGR of 15.2%). 81% of brands already use affiliate marketing, and it accounts for 16% of total e-commerce sales.

But there's another side to these numbers: **41% of affiliate marketers earn less than $1,000 per month, and 23% earn nothing at all**.

The market isn't shrinking — it's being "cleansed." Money is flowing away from low-quality thin affiliate sites toward creators with genuine content value. The Creator-as-Affiliate model is rising, with 74% of brands shifting their affiliate budgets toward creator programs. TikTok Shop hit $26.2 billion GMV in H1 2025, with short-form video-driven affiliate revenue growing rapidly.

In one sentence: the pie is getting bigger, but fewer people are getting a slice.

### Managing Income Expectations — How Much Can You Actually Earn?

Based on Authority Hacker's large-scale survey, here are the real income figures broken down by experience level:

| Level | Monthly Income (USD) | Typical Time Investment |
|-------|---------------------|------------------------|
| Beginner (0-1 year) | $0 – $1,000 | 10-20 hours/week |
| Intermediate (1-3 years) | $1,000 – $10,000 | 15-30 hours/week |
| Advanced (3-5 years) | $10,000 – $100,000 | Full-time or multi-site |
| Super Affiliate | $100,000+ | Team-based operations |

Key numbers to note:

- **Beginners average $636/month** — far below what most tutorials imply
- Marketers with 3+ years of experience earn **9.45x** more than beginners — this is a long game
- Most profitable niches: Education ($15,551/mo) > Travel ($13,847) > Beauty ($12,475) > Finance > Tech

> **Real talk**: If you expect stable income in month one, affiliate marketing isn't for you. It requires 6-12 months of pure investment, but once the flywheel starts turning, the scalability far exceeds hourly wage work.

## The Google & AI Search Double Squeeze — Why Old Methods No Longer Work

The old formula was straightforward: write an SEO-optimized product review → rank on Google page one → readers click affiliate links → earn commissions. This path is being compressed from both ends.

### The Google HCU / Core Update Purge

Google's December 2025 Core Update was an earthquake for affiliate sites. According to ALM Corp's analysis of 847 affected websites, **71% of affiliate sites were negatively impacted** — the highest rate among all website categories.

The harsher reality: according to Detailed.com's analysis, among the top 100 sites in product review search results, **only 4 are independent sites**. The rest are dominated by major media conglomerates (DotdashMeredith, Hearst, Future, etc.). Thin affiliate content lacking original testing saw traffic drops averaging 71%.

What survived? Review articles with original test data, niche-specialized expert sites, and multi-channel sites not entirely dependent on Google traffic.

### The AI Search Zero-Click Crisis

Even if you rank on Google's first page, traffic is no longer as reliable as it used to be. According to Ahrefs' December 2025 study, AI Overviews caused **the #1 search result's CTR to drop by 58%**.

According to Similarweb's 2025 report, Google's **zero-click rate grew from 56% to 69%** — meaning nearly seven out of ten searchers get their answer on the Google page itself without clicking through to any website.

Among searches that trigger AI Overviews, **83% result in zero clicks**, with users clicking on AI-cited sources only about 1% of the time.

But there's an opportunity angle: brands cited by AI see a 35% increase in organic CTR, and YouTube has overwhelming visibility in AI search results. In other words, if your content becomes an AI citation source, traffic could actually increase.

## Complete Taiwan Affiliate Platform Comparison (Updated February 2026)

Platform selection is the first step in determining your ROI, but most tutorial articles have outdated information. Here's the latest comparison as of February 2026:

| Platform | Commission Rate | Min. Payout | Cookie Duration | Approval | Notes |
|----------|----------------|-------------|-----------------|----------|-------|
| **Shopee Affiliate** | Base 0.5%; 10K followers 5%; Short video 3-15% | NT$500 | 7 days | Lenient | 2024/12 base commission cut from 1% to 0.5% |
| **Books.com.tw AP** | Exclusive 4%; Non-exclusive 2% | NT$1,000 | 30 days | ~1 month review; Website only | Stable for books, limited categories |
| **iChannels** | 1%–15% (varies by merchant) | NT$500 | Varies | Moderate | Taiwan's oldest (2008); 700+ brands |
| **Affiliates.One** | 0.5%–70% (highest for SaaS) | NT$1,000 | Varies | Moderate | 2,000+ brands; supports CPL/CPS/CPA |
| **momo DianDianZhuan** | ~2% | — | — | — | ⚠️ **Discontinued 2026/01/31** |

Key observations:

- **Shopee commission cut impact**: Base commission dropped from 1% to 0.5%, meaning recommending a NT$1,000 product earns you just NT$5. However, short-form video commissions can reach 3-15% — a clear signal that Shopee is pushing creators toward video content
- **momo exit**: DianDianZhuan officially shut down on 2026/01/31. Promoters who relied on momo need to migrate to other platforms
- **Affiliates.One's SaaS commissions** are the most attractive among Taiwan platforms, with digital product commissions reaching 20-70%

### Platform Selection Decision Tree

- Blog with SEO traffic → **Books.com.tw AP + Affiliates.One** (longer cookies, reasonable commissions)
- Social media / short-form video → **Shopee Affiliate** (short video multiplier 3-15%)
- Promoting SaaS / digital products → **Affiliates.One** (20-70% commissions, highest per-sale income)
- Maximum brand selection → **iChannels** (700+ brands, widest Taiwan coverage)

> **From our experience**: Running a content site, we've found that spending time on 0.5% e-commerce categories yields extremely low ROI. For the same content production cost, promoting a SaaS tool at 30% commission can be 60x more effective than e-commerce. Choosing the right niche and platform matters far more than producing more articles.

## Effective Affiliate Marketing Strategies for 2026 — From "Dropping Links" to "Building Trust"

Content-first, not link-first. Under the double squeeze of Google and AI search, simply chasing click volume no longer converts reliably. Trust matters more than traffic.

### Strategy 1: Test-Driven Content

Affiliate sites that survived Google's updates share one common trait: **their content contains original test data**.

This means:
- Product usage screenshots, backend data, actual operation timelines
- Clear author identity and relevant credentials (EEAT signals)
- Honest pros-and-cons analysis, including "not recommended" scenarios

Content that merely rewrites official spec sheets has lost all value — AI search can instantly answer these types of questions. Your content needs to include what AI cannot generate: genuine usage experience and judgment.

### Strategy 2: Multi-Channel Traffic Diversification

The lesson from 71% of affiliate sites being hit by Google's update is clear: **SEO cannot be your only traffic source**.

Effective traffic mix for 2026:

- **Short-form video (TikTok / YouTube Shorts / Instagram Reels)**: Engagement rates up to 30.1%; industry data shows video content significantly boosts conversion rates. YouTube has overwhelming dominance in AI search results
- **Email marketing**: ROI of $36 per $1 spent — the highest among all digital channels. And it's immune to algorithm changes
- **Community building (Telegram / Discord / LINE groups)**: Build owned channels where readers are your subscribers, not Google's traffic

### Strategy 3: High-Commission Niches + Digital Products

It's a simple math problem:

- Recommend a NT$1,000 Shopee product (0.5% commission) = earn **NT$5**
- Recommend a $50/month SaaS tool (30% commission) = earn **NT$480**

Same article, same traffic, income difference of **96x**.

High-commission niches to watch in 2026:

- **AI tools**: Most AI SaaS products offer 20-30% recurring commissions — users renew monthly, so you earn monthly
- **Online course platforms**: Like Hahow, Udemy, etc., typically 15-25% commissions
- **Professional software**: Design, marketing, and development tools at 20-50% commissions

Of course, high-commission niches are more competitive with higher content quality bars. But that's precisely the protection that barriers provide — if you can produce in-depth, test-driven content, you build a moat that competitors can't easily replicate.

## Why 90% of People Fail — Five Systemic Reasons

The high failure rate in affiliate marketing isn't because people "don't try hard enough" — it's structural:

**1. Wrong niche selection**

Choosing a 0.5% commission e-commerce category means you need tens of thousands of effective clicks per month for meaningful income. When you calculate the actual traffic and conversion rates required, the numbers simply don't add up.

**2. Single traffic source**

Going 100% on Google SEO means one algorithm update can zero everything out. The December 2025 Core Update proved exactly this.

**3. Undifferentiated content**

Writing "What is X" definition articles when AI search can already answer these instantly. Your article gets replaced by an AI Overview in search results, and users don't need to click through.

**4. Giving up too soon**

Near-zero income for the first 6-12 months is normal — beginners average just $636/month, and many earn $0 in their first few months. 90% of people quit at this stage, but those who survive see exponential income growth.

**5. Neglecting tracking and attribution**

Safari and Firefox block third-party cookies by default (roughly 22-23% of global browser market share, up to 30% in North America). Without server-side tracking or first-party cookie solutions, you're missing over 20% of conversion attribution. That article you think isn't performing? It might just be a tracking gap.

## Risk Disclosure

Any article about affiliate marketing that only talks about benefits without addressing risks is itself a red flag. Here's what you need to know:

- **Highly unstable income**: 41% of practitioners earn under $1,000/month; algorithm updates can wipe out traffic overnight
- **Platform policies change without notice**: momo DianDianZhuan shut down abruptly; Shopee slashed commissions — you have zero negotiating power with platforms
- **Tax obligations**: In Taiwan, affiliate income is classified as "other income" and must be reported for income tax. Single payments exceeding NT$20,000 are subject to supplementary NHI premiums (rate: 2.11%)
- **Time cost is real**: The first 6-12 months are pure investment with negative ROI. If you have better uses for your time (such as improving your primary career skills), seriously evaluate the opportunity cost
- **Regulatory requirements**: Under Taiwan's Fair Trade Act and FTC guidelines, you must disclose affiliate relationships in your content. Non-disclosure may expose you to legal risk
- **Survivorship bias**: The "earning XX per month" stories online are almost exclusively from the top 1% of survivors. The median is far below the average

> **Disclaimer**: Platform information in this article is current as of February 2026. Commission rates and policies may change at any time. Please verify the latest terms directly with each platform before committing.

## Conclusion

Affiliate marketing isn't dead, but "old affiliate marketing" is.

The 2026 survival formula = **test-driven content × multi-channel traffic × high-commission niches**. The era of writing definition articles, dropping links, and waiting for Google traffic is over. If you're still using 2022 methods, the market is telling you the answer through data — 71% of affiliate sites lost traffic, 69% zero-click searches, 0.5% commission rates.

But if you're willing to:

1. Choose the right niche and platform (use this article's comparison table)
2. Produce content with real test data (not rewritten spec sheets)
3. Build traffic channels that don't depend on a single algorithm
4. Accept 6-12 months of upfront investment

Then affiliate marketing remains one of the most natural monetization paths for content creators. The global market continues expanding at a 15% CAGR, and creator-driven affiliate revenue is projected to reach $1.3 billion in 2026 — the money is there, it's just flowing to the right people.

Start by choosing the right platform and niche. Use this article's comparison table and strategy framework to plan your first move.

---

## How to Apply for a Refund of Agoda Foreign Transaction Fee? <a id="how-to-get-agoda-transaction-fee-back"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/how-to-get-agoda-transaction-fee-back
Date: 2023-11-26
Tools: Agoda
Concepts: Business, Finance, Learning, Travel

### Summary
Did you know that the foreign transaction fee paid when booking through Agoda can be refunded? This article will guide you on how to apply for a refund of Agoda’s foreign transaction fee.

### Content
## What? I Was Charged a Foreign Transaction Fee?

Quickly check your credit card statement to see if you were charged a foreign transaction fee when booking through Agoda!

Currently, [Agoda](https://www.agoda.com?cid=1427616&tag=CHINESEANID_CHINESEANTXID) is an overseas company without a receiving bank in Taiwan. Whether you book domestically or internationally, a 1.5% foreign transaction fee is charged. This fee is not collected by Agoda but by the bank or financial institution managing the payments.

According to Agoda’s current foreign transaction fee compensation policy, if the booking was made within the last three months, you can apply for a refund. The refund will be in the form of Agoda Cash, equivalent to the foreign transaction fee charged by the issuing bank during the booking process on Agoda.

Agoda’s Foreign Transaction Fee is Refundable!

In fact, the foreign transaction fee paid when booking through Agoda can be refunded! This article will guide you on how to apply for a foreign transaction fee refund from Agoda. Please note that Agoda only processes orders within the last three months, so don’t hesitate. Check now to see if you have any orders eligible for a refund!


## Steps to Apply for Foreign Transaction Fee Compensation

1. Click [Order Inquiry](https://afftkr.site/track/clicks/8682/c627c2bc980824d7fa8cec23d62e9c462d664bdf2aabebfc0168b013234652eed671a3ea103a9e71) to check the hotel name and order number.
2. Click Agoda Customer Service Email and start composing an email. The subject line should be “Application for Foreign Transaction Fee Compensation.” The content should include the hotel name, order number, and attach the credit card statement showing the following information: cardholder’s name, bank logo, last four digits of the credit card number, merchant name, transaction date, amount, and currency.
3. Wait for a response from customer service. Based on experience, you will receive a reply within a few minutes to 48 hours, confirming whether you are eligible for compensation or if additional documents are needed. They will propose a compensation plan using equivalent Agoda Cash and request a reply to confirm.
4. After confirming via email, you will receive a notification of the equivalent Agoda Cash credit. From the date of issue, you have 6 months to use the Agoda Cash for any applicable bookings on Agoda. Please note that Agoda Cash is not applicable for “Cardless Booking,” “Invoice Issuable,” or “Pay at Hotel” room types.

## To Redeem Your Agoda Cash, Follow These Steps:

1. Log in to the Agoda website or app.
2. Select the accommodation and room type you want to book, then click “Book.”
3. On the payment page, the option to use “Agoda Cash” to offset the cost will appear on the right side of the webpage or at the bottom of the app page.
4. Choose the amount of Agoda Cash you want to use (you can offset the entire or partial cost of the booking).
5. Complete the payment and confirm the booking.

For more information about Agoda Cash, please visit: [Agoda Official Policy](https://www.agoda.com?cid=1427616&tag=CHINESEANID_CHINESEANTXID).

## Is Agoda the Biggest Winner?

In practice, [Agoda](https://www.agoda.com?cid=1427616&tag=CHINESEANID_CHINESEANTXID) handles foreign transaction fees very quickly. Why can Agoda process such seemingly costly refunds so efficiently? The truth is, Agoda uses “Agoda Cash with limited validity” for compensation, which is quite clever. It effectively wins customer loyalty at a minimal cost. For regular Agoda users, applying for foreign transaction fee compensation for future bookings can be quite beneficial.

In any case, don’t let money slip away. Make it a habit to check your credit card statement each month for any foreign transaction fees charged by Agoda. Apply for a refund immediately, and over time, you can save a significant amount of money!

---

## 3 Secrets of the Law of Attraction: Attract What You Love! <a id="law-of-attraction"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/law-of-attraction
Date: 2022-02-28
Concepts: Career, Finance, Learning, Mindset, Productivity

### Summary
Our thoughts emit a frequency that attracts similar frequencies. Just like a magnet, we attract what we think about into our lives. This is the Law of Attraction.

### Content
You’ve probably heard of the Law of Attraction, popularized by Rhonda Byrne’s book *The Secret*. This book sold millions of copies within months of its release and has been translated into over 50 languages, becoming a classic on the topic. The author explains that our thoughts emit a frequency that attracts similar frequencies. Just like a magnet, we attract what we think about into our lives. This is the Law of Attraction.

## TL;DR Summary

The Law of Attraction is about aligning your mindset with your goals:
1.  **Clarify**: Use positive affirmations to state exactly what you want.
2.  **Visualize**: Create vision boards and feel the joy of achieving your goals.
3.  **Act**: Combine positive thinking with concrete actions; opportunity favors the prepared.

But did you know that practicing the Law of Attraction requires some techniques to make your desires come true more easily? Today, we'll share three steps to effectively harness the Law of Attraction. If you have new goals or dreams this year, let’s bravely place our orders with the universe together!

## Step 1: Positive Thinking + Affirmative Statements for Clear Desires

As mentioned in *The Secret*, "To change your circumstances, you must first change your thoughts." When making a wish, be sure to use positive thinking and affirmative statements to express your clear desires. For example, when changing to a new job and hoping to meet good colleagues or supervisors, your thoughts and wishes should be: "I believe I will meet great teammates!" (affirming the positive) instead of "I hope I don’t meet bad coworkers!" (avoiding negative thoughts). Or, if you want to save money to buy a house, your wish should be: "I will definitely buy this house by the age of XX" (affirming self-achievement) instead of "It might take a long time for my savings to buy this house" (expressing uncertainty). Remember to avoid using negative or doubtful statements. Dare to imagine and affirm that it will happen; this increases the chance of your wish coming true. Moreover, the clearer your wish, the easier it is to achieve. For instance, "I want to get richer" versus "I want to increase my income by $5,000 every month." The latter is more likely to be achieved!

## Step 2: Visualize Your Desires and Anticipate the Joy of Realization

After making a wish, write down or print your desire and place it somewhere visible in your daily life (setting it as your phone or computer wallpaper is also a good method). This process is called visualization. Visualization helps transform what you think into visible reality. When you see it often, you will be more confident that you are moving towards your dream.

Additionally, imagine the joy and excitement you will feel when your wish is realized! For example, if you wish to buy a house by the age of XX, picture yourself living in that ideal home with a beautiful forest view outside and a clean, comfortable interior. The satisfaction of living in your dream home will make you feel happy. Don’t forget, your emotions generate frequencies for the universe, and good feelings naturally attract good frequencies to you. Always take a moment to feel the happiness in your heart.

## Step 3: Focus on Your Desires + Continuous Effort, and Wait for Your Wish to Come True

The Law of Attraction is not just about whimsical thinking but a form of self-enhancement. Besides making a wish, you must focus on your goals and desires and make corresponding efforts. The process is more important than the result. For example, if you wish to find an ideal partner, you must first take the step to meet new people and write down the qualities you seek in a partner. After taking the first step, people with similar qualities will gradually come closer to you, and your wish will slowly come true!

## The Law of Attraction Happened to Me! A Real-Life Example Shared by a Friend:

In college, my psychology professor asked the class to write down their ideal job or life state five years after graduation. Studying administrative sciences and having a passion for music, I constantly thought about how I excelled in one field and loved the other. I wrote that I hoped to work in public service after graduation and pursue music-related activities on weekends.

As I wrote, I smiled and imagined such a wonderful life. It was just perfect! In my second year after graduation, I focused on civil service exams and tutoring. One day, a friend told me, "I saw a public department offering a contract position on a website. You should apply. The job content seems related to your major, and you might have a chance!"

While preparing for exams, I decided to give it a try. I successfully got the position and started a year of public service work. However, this experience made me realize that I didn’t enjoy the work mode in the public sector and felt a bit unhappy. My thoughts started drifting back to my passion for music.

After the contract ended, I decided to switch to a different field and began looking for a new job online. About four months later, something magical happened! One day, a music company I had always dreamed of working for posted a job opening. It was an administrative position matching my work experience, and I immediately applied. Eventually, I got the job and entered my dream music company, combining my administrative skills with my passion. Interestingly, I realized that I joined this company exactly five years after graduation, just as if the universe had planned it all!

## The Fascination of the Law of Attraction

In the book *The Alchemist*, it is mentioned, "When you truly desire something, the whole universe will conspire to help you achieve it." The most amazing aspect of the Law of Attraction is that when you have negative thoughts, unfortunate things often happen. But when you sincerely desire something and believe from the bottom of your heart that you will have it, putting in the effort to achieve it, you will ultimately get what you want. If you have ever failed in making a wish, ask yourself if your mindset was firm or if you didn't truly believe in it. Things you don’t believe in will never come true. "The outcome is often determined by your mindset and thoughts." By maintaining a positive and proactive attitude, you can effectively use the Law of Attraction, successfully place orders with the universe, and make your desires come true one by one! Let's place orders with the universe in the new year and feel the joy of making our wishes come true!

---

## Complete Beginner's Guide to Meditation: How to Meditate Successfully with 5 Science-Backed Steps <a id="meditation-101"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/meditation-101
Date: 2022-01-14
Tools: Headspace, Calm, Insight Timer
Concepts: Health, Learning, Productivity

### Summary
Most beginners quit meditation because they can't 'clear their mind.' This guide combines 2026 neuroscience research and AI meditation tools to give you a 5-step method that works from day one.

### Content
"My mind keeps wandering during meditation — does that mean I'm doing it wrong?"

This is the most common question I get. The answer: **No. In fact, it's the opposite — noticing that your mind wandered is proof that meditation is working.**

After 5 years of personal practice, I've seen the same pattern play out over and over: people try meditation, can't "empty their mind," and quit within two weeks. But the latest neuroscience research from 2025-2026 tells us that meditation is a trainable mental skill — and the results are more concrete and faster than you'd expect.

This article uses the latest research, practical steps, and AI meditation tools to help you get it right from day one.

### TL;DR

1. Meditation isn't about "clearing your mind" — it's training your brain's awareness muscle. Wandering thoughts are normal; bringing your attention back is the practice.
2. 2025-2026 research: meditation regulates the brain's waste-clearing mechanism and improves attention in just 30 days.
3. Five minutes a day is enough. Consistency beats duration.
4. AI meditation apps (Headspace Ebb, Calm, Insight Timer AI) dramatically lower the barrier for beginners.
5. Meditation has potential risks — certain groups should proceed with caution (see Risk Disclosure).

---

## Why You Need Meditation More Than Ever

The global meditation market was valued at $7.51 billion in 2025 and is projected to reach $17.78 billion by 2032 (according to a [Coherent Market Insights report](https://www.globenewswire.com/news-release/2025/09/04/3144679/0/en/Meditation-Market-Poised-for-Explosive-Growth-Projected-to-Hit-USD-17-78-Billion-by-2032-Says-Coherent-Market-Insights.html)). Behind this explosive growth is our collective need for mental detox in the age of information overload.

Before we dive in, let's bust three common myths:

**Myth 1: Meditation means emptying your mind.** It doesn't. Meditation trains your ability to *notice* thoughts and gently return your focus. A completely blank mind isn't the goal — it's impossible.

**Myth 2: You need to sit cross-legged for a long time.** Nope. Sitting in a chair with a straight back works just fine. Five minutes counts as a full session.

**Myth 3: You'll feel results immediately.** Not necessarily. Changes happen at the neural level first — your subjective experience lags behind. But science can now measure those changes.

Companies like Google, Apple, and Nike have long incorporated mindfulness into their employee wellness programs — not as a trend, but because the evidence is compelling.

---

## How Meditation Changes Your Brain: 2026 Science

Here are key studies published in 2025-2026 that turn "meditation works" from a feeling into data:

### Meditation Activates Your Brain's "Cleaning System"

[A December 2025 study from Vanderbilt University, published in PNAS](https://news.vumc.org/2025/12/10/study-finds-that-meditation-may-help-stimulate-the-brains-waste-removal-system-providing-restorative-benefits-like-sleep/), found that just 25 minutes of mindfulness meditation can regulate cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) flow patterns in a way that **resembles the brain's waste-clearing mechanism during sleep**. In simple terms, meditation may trigger a partial "self-cleaning" function while you're still awake.

### Meditation Directly Affects Emotion and Memory Centers

[A 2025 study from Mount Sinai](https://www.mountsinai.org/about/newsroom/2025/new-research-reveals-that-meditation-induces-changes-in-deep-brain-areas-associated-with-memory-and-emotional-regulation) used intracranial EEG recordings from 8 epilepsy patients with implanted neurostimulation devices to capture brain activity during loving-kindness meditation. They observed significant increases in gamma oscillations and decreases in beta bursts in the amygdala (emotion processing) and hippocampus (memory). While the subjects were a specialized group, this is one of the few studies that directly observed meditation's effects on deep brain structures.

### Meditation Reshapes How Your Brain Operates

[A January 2026 study from the Université de Montréal](https://nouvelles.umontreal.ca/en/article/2026/01/05/meditation-doesn-t-rest-the-brain-it-reshapes-it) found that meditation alters the brain's "criticality" — pushing it toward the optimal balance between order and chaos. The study recorded brain activity from 12 monks and found that different meditation types produce different effects: Vipassana (insight meditation) moves the brain closer to the critical point, while Samatha (calm-abiding) produces a more stable, focused state.

### Visible Results in 30 Days

[A July 2025 study from USC, published in eNeuro](https://gero.usc.edu/2025/07/08/mindfulness-meditation-improve-attention/), showed that 69 adults who used the Headspace app for 10-15 minutes of daily mindfulness meditation saw **significant improvements in attention control in just 30 days** — and the effect held **regardless of age**, whether participants were 18 or 80.

---

## 5-Step Meditation Guide for Beginners

Core principle: **There's no such thing as failing at meditation — there's only practice.** Every time you notice distraction and bring your attention back, you've completed a successful rep.

### Step 1: Choose Your Environment

Find a reasonably quiet spot. You don't need perfect silence — just put your phone on Focus Mode or Do Not Disturb to prevent interruptions. No cushion, incense, or special equipment required.

### Step 2: Find a Comfortable Posture

Sit in a chair with your feet flat on the floor, back naturally upright (not rigid), hands resting on your knees or thighs. No need to sit cross-legged. The key is a body that's stable yet relaxed.

### Step 3: Set a 5-Minute Timer

Start with just 5 minutes. Once the timer is set, you don't have to wonder "is it time yet?" — this eliminates time anxiety. As you get comfortable, gradually increase to 10 or 15 minutes.

### Step 4: Focus on Breathing, Notice and Return

Close your eyes and place your attention on your breath — feel the air moving through your nostrils, your belly rising and falling.

When you catch yourself thinking about tomorrow's meeting or what to have for lunch — that's completely normal. Gently guide your attention back to your breath. No self-judgment needed. **This act of "returning" is the workout for your brain.**

### Step 5: Pick a Fixed Time and Stack the Habit

Choose something you already do every day and meditate right after it (habit stacking): after brushing your teeth in the morning, or right before turning off the lights at night. Morning meditation boosts focus for the day; evening meditation helps your brain shift from high gear into rest mode.

> **Suggested Week 1 schedule**: 5 minutes daily for 7 consecutive days. Don't chase a feeling — just aim for "done." Starting week 2, try increasing to 8-10 minutes.

---

## AI Meditation App Comparison (2026 Update)

Going it alone can be frustrating. AI meditation tools significantly lower the barrier for beginners. Here's how the three major apps compare:

| Feature | [Headspace](https://www.headspace.com/) (Ebb AI) | [Calm](https://www.calm.com/) | [Insight Timer](https://insighttimer.com/) (AI Recommendations) |
|---------|---------------------|------|------------------------|
| AI Feature | Conversational AI companion that analyzes your mood and recommends personalized content | AI-powered personalized sleep and meditation recommendations | AI intention-setting engine that curates from 300K+ tracks |
| Best For | Beginners who want structured courses | Those focused on sleep and emotional regulation | Users who want to explore diverse styles |
| Content Volume | Moderate (mostly paid) | Moderate (mostly paid) | 300,000+ (many free) |
| Standout Feature | Ebb voice conversations (launched Dec 2025) | Sleep stories, dynamic soundscapes | World's largest free meditation community |

**My recommendations:**

- **Total beginner** → Headspace. The most clearly structured curriculum, and Ebb AI can guide you when you don't know which session to pick.
- **Mainly want better sleep** → Calm. Sleep stories and soundscapes are its strength.
- **Want to explore for free** → Insight Timer. 300,000+ sessions across every meditation tradition, plus the new [AI intention-setting feature](https://www.globenewswire.com/news-release/2026/01/06/3213643/0/en/Insight-Timer-Launches-New-Year-s-Resolution-and-Intention-Setting-Features-with-AI-Recommendation-Engine.html) launched in 2026 matches content to your goals.

---

## 3 Common Mistakes Beginners Make

### Mistake 1: Chasing a "Perfectly Blank Mind"

Believing your mind must be completely silent for meditation to "count." In reality, thoughts are your brain's default mode. The goal isn't to eliminate thoughts — it's to train the ability to notice them and choose not to follow them.

### Mistake 2: Too Much, Too Soon

Jumping straight into 20-30 minute sessions, suffering through a few, and giving up. From experience, 5 minutes of daily practice is far more valuable than occasional long sessions. Consistency is everything.

### Mistake 3: Judging Effectiveness by "Feel"

Deciding "I don't feel anything after a week" and concluding meditation doesn't work. But as the USC study showed, neural changes begin within 30 days — your subjective experience will catch up later. Keep practicing and let the data speak.

---

## Risk Disclosure

Meditation is safe for most people, but being upfront about risks is the responsible thing to do.

According to [a 2020 systematic review by Farias et al., published in Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica](https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32820538/) (analyzing 83 studies), approximately **8.3%** of meditators experienced adverse effects, including increased anxiety, depression, cognitive anomalies, or dissociation. Notably, the rate was only 3.7% in experimental studies but as high as 33.2% in observational studies, suggesting that practice context and method significantly influence risk.

**The following groups should meditate under professional guidance:**

- Individuals with PTSD
- Those with severe anxiety or depression
- People with dissociative symptoms or a history of psychiatric conditions

**Important reminders:**

- Meditation is not a substitute for medical treatment. Serious mental health conditions require consultation with a psychiatrist or clinical psychologist.
- If you experience intense discomfort during meditation (such as panic or dissociation), stop immediately.
- Apps and tools are supplements, not replacements for professional mental healthcare.

---

## Conclusion: Meditation Is a Skill, Not a Talent

Meditation doesn't require special talent — it's a trainable mental skill. Like going to the gym, you wouldn't expect a six-pack on day one, but if you keep showing up, changes begin happening before you even notice.

The USC study tells us: **In 30 days, at 10-15 minutes per day, your brain is already changing.** And all you need to start is 5 minutes.

Start your first 5 minutes today.

---

## Must-Know Free and Practical Project Management Tools - Slack/Trello/Todoist <a id="nice-free-tools-for-managing-your-work-and-life"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/nice-free-tools-for-managing-your-work-and-life
Date: 2021-12-19
Tools: Adobe XD, Google Calendar, Jira, Slack, Todoist, Trello
Concepts: Automation, Business, Finance, Learning, Management, Productivity, Project Management, Soft Skills, Travel

### Summary
For many PMs, managing multiple projects is inevitable. Learning how to control the timeline of each project is a valuable lesson. When individuals or teams use tools that clearly control project timelines, they can greatly improve team efficiency and reduce a lot of rework. This article will introduce three project timeline management tools that will not only make managing project timelines easier but also help organize tasks very systematically.

### Content
For many PMs, managing multiple projects is inevitable. Learning how to control the timeline of each project is a valuable lesson. When individuals or teams use tools that clearly control project timelines, they can greatly improve team efficiency and reduce a lot of rework. This article will introduce three project timeline management tools that will not only make managing project timelines easier but also help organize tasks very systematically.

## TL;DR Summary

Top 3 free tools for work/life management:
1.  **Slack**: Best for team communication and reducing email clutter.
2.  **Trello**: Best for visual project tracking (Kanban boards).
3.  **Todoist**: Best for personal task management and daily to-do lists.

## Benefits and Advantages of Using Project Management Tools

![](https://i.imgur.com/WEKv38Z.jpg)

PMs use project management tools in many situations. When do ordinary people use project management tools? In fact, project management tools are important for everyone. When handling various tasks in life, such as planning a camping trip or organizing a wedding, project management tools help us consider all aspects, provide necessary functions, plan all available resources, and take all stakeholders into account.

In addition to being able to track the progress and schedule of each project, project management tools strengthen the connection between each task and piece of information, making communication more efficient. Unlike files coming from all directions, project management tools offer a fixed project management space to share information and files, enabling team members to communicate and share more conveniently on the platform, resulting in better collaboration.

## Tips for Commonly Used Project Management Software

After understanding the many benefits and advantages that project management brings to our lives, let's introduce three commonly used project management software: Slack, Trello, and ToDoist. We'll not only show you how to use these tools but also introduce some must-know advanced features!

### Slack: Introduction, Usage Guide, and Advanced Features

![](https://i.imgur.com/giVHB1v.png)

Slack is an internal communication tool designed for business use, initially developed to replace email as the main internal communication tool for companies. But why do most companies choose Slack instead of LINE, which is also a well-known communication software?

Using LINE as an internal communication tool has several drawbacks:

1. LINE groups often get flooded with messages, making it hard to catch important updates.
2. To discuss sub-items of a project, new groups have to be created, resulting in too many groups for one project.
3. LINE is typically used for personal life, and mixing it with work groups can be inconvenient.

Slack, as a business communication tool, addresses these issues:

1. Slack allows you to discuss with team members or project personnel through workspaces and channels, sharing necessary documents in these channels.
2. In Slack channels, messages can be threaded, allowing discussions on subtopics without affecting the main conversation, making the layout more organized.
3. Slack is usually dedicated to business, making it clear to separate work from personal life.

An advanced feature of Slack is its ability to integrate with third-party software, including Gmail, Outlook, Google Calendar, or Trello! Simply go to "Browse Slack->Apps" and choose the app you want to install.

Slack offers both free and paid versions. The main difference is that the free version only retains the last 10,000 messages, so older messages might get lost. The paid version offers workflow automation and enhanced security and data protection.

Slack official website: [Slack](https://slack.com/intl/zh-tw/)

### Trello: Introduction, Usage Guide, and Advanced Features

![Trello](https://i.imgur.com/07WCond.jpg)

Trello is a very practical tool for tracking project progress, featuring a Kanban-style format with boards, lists, and cards. Similar to sticky notes, you can simply drag and drop to move projects to their current status, providing a clear overview of progress (e.g., not started, in progress, completed). It's a very intuitive project management tool.

Trello is suitable for both large projects like concert planning and small projects like organizing orientation activities. For instance, if you're planning an orientation event, you can set up stages such as planning, process, finance, and manpower allocation, with each stage as a separate list, creating a very straightforward workflow.

If you're unsure where to start, Trello offers official templates and user-shared templates. You can apply these templates to begin scheduling your projects. Additionally, Trello can integrate with third-party software like Google Drive, Slack, Jira, or Adobe XD, making it very convenient.

Trello also has an advanced feature called Butler, which automates repetitive actions on the board by detecting them and suggesting automation rules for subsequent tasks. For example, Butler can automatically add a meeting time for next Tuesday, tag it with discussion labels, set a reminder for meeting notes, and move the card to the top of the list.

Trello official website: [Trello](https://trello.com/zh-Hant)

### ToDoist: Introduction, Usage Guide, and Advanced Features

![ToDoist](https://i.imgur.com/1Gw1vb4.png)

ToDoist is a simple and convenient task management tool with a hierarchical task system that allows for layered management of large and small projects. It also has a filtering system to focus on specific tasks. A very useful advanced feature of ToDoist is its collection plugin, which helps quickly add emails and web pages to the to-do list for follow-up work.

ToDoist is more suitable for those accustomed to using calendars, as it can integrate with Outlook or Google Calendar, allowing comprehensive viewing of schedules and to-dos, helping you better manage your time and tasks.

ToDoist also has a unique motivational feature called Karma Review, where you earn Karma points by completing tasks. The more Karma points you earn, the more advanced features you unlock, such as task labeling or natural language parsing.

ToDoist official website: [ToDoist](https://todoist.com/zh-TW/home)

## Conclusion

Each tool serves different scenarios: Slack is great for team collaboration, Trello is ideal for breaking down tasks beyond the timeline, and ToDoist is perfect for managing tasks and schedules together. Choose the project management software that best fits your needs!

---

## Transform Your Life with Daily Rituals: Learn to Create Meaningful Practices <a id="sense-of-ritual-best-practice"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/sense-of-ritual-best-practice
Date: 2021-11-18
Concepts: Health, Productivity, Remote Work

### Summary
In recent years, we've started exploring ways to liberate our minds and spirits. The concept of rituals has entered our lives, representing our quest for spiritual fulfillment. Through rituals, we can truly live life, not just exist.

### Content
Every day I clock in at work and then stay at home scrolling through my phone. I feel so bored and disheartened." Do you feel the same, waking up every day filled with a sense of discontent?

In recent years, we've started to explore ways to release our mind and spirit. The concept of "rituals" has begun to appear in our lives. We seek spiritual fulfillment, and rituals are an expression of this pursuit, allowing us to live not just for survival, but to truly live life.

## TL;DR Summary

Why you need daily rituals:
1.  **Meaning**: Rituals turn mundane routines into meaningful moments.
2.  **Control**: They provide stability and a sense of control in chaotic times.
3.  **Action**: Start small (e.g., morning coffee, work-mode outfit) to build a positive cycle.

## What is a Sense of Ritual?

It means giving a special meaning to something, believing that this sense of ritual brings spiritual satisfaction.

There are many types of rituals, such as religious ceremonies that bring peace by believing in the blessings they offer. The sense of unity created by rituals makes people more committed and convinced of their importance.

For example, athletes forming a huddle to shout encouragement before a game, creating a sense of unity and confidence to face their opponents. Different rituals create different senses of ritual, such as unity, confidence, etc.

In essence, the sense of ritual comes from the inner strength brought by rituals, making people feel unique and sacred. We can apply this concept to daily life to face our lives with a more serious attitude, feeling the love and recognition of our spiritual values, and thus looking forward to a more exciting life.

## Creating a Sense of Ritual in Daily Life

Understanding the importance of a sense of ritual, we can apply it to our daily lives with common examples like bedtime prayers, morning coffee, or scented candles.

A sense of ritual adds anticipation and special meaning to an activity. Even if removed, it doesn’t affect daily routines. But like adding seasoning to life, the sense of ritual makes you fall in love with living.

### Taking Life Seriously, Even When Alone

Due to the pandemic, many people started working from home. Some might think they don't need to dress formally as they would at the office, leading to decreased work efficiency. Try adjusting small details and adding a sense of ritual to your life, such as:

- Wearing formal clothes even for remote work
- Separating rest areas from workspaces, avoiding using the computer in bed or resting in the work area

After practicing for a while, you'll notice your body naturally adjusting to high efficiency during work and fully relaxing during breaks, creating a positive cycle.

![Wearing formal clothes even for remote work](https://i.imgur.com/3OGOTJV.jpg)

### Plan Your Own Special Anniversaries

There are many common anniversaries like Valentine’s Day or wedding anniversaries. Adding your own special days can bring a different feeling.

For example, designate every Friday as a relaxation day. After a busy workweek, watch a movie you love on Friday night, immersing yourself in it and releasing the week’s accumulated stress.

These life rules will greatly improve your life and work quality. These processes don't require explanations to others but show a responsible attitude toward your own life.

**Respect your life, and life will give you the same value in return.**

![Adding your own special days can bring a different feeling.](https://i.imgur.com/RiGo0v1.jpg)

## The Positive Cycle of a Sense of Ritual

1. Start by examining your life
2. Create your own rituals
3. Feel a sense of accomplishment after completing tasks
4. Experience joy and recognition from your rituals
5. Gain stability and love from the effects of rituals
6. Reinforce your life with these benefits

**A sense of ritual is like a belief. The process is similar to many religious practices. Making rituals a belief in life will make you love your life even more!**

## Four Key Points to Incorporate a Sense of Ritual into Life

**1. Organize your life before adding rituals**
Everyone has their own pace of life. You need to identify your habits and plan your time to include rituals. Understanding your schedule helps you use and feel the benefits of rituals.

**2. Be consistent**
Research shows that it takes about 21 days to form a habit. Rituals are the same. Maintain them over time to integrate rituals into your life and create a positive cycle.

**3. Start with simple, easy-to-implement rituals**
Don’t complicate rituals at the beginning. They could be a few minutes or a small action. Overcomplicating them may create additional stress.

**4. The sense of ritual comes from internal recognition**
Everyone needs different rituals. Find what resonates with you. For example, many start their day with a cup of coffee, but this might not work for non-coffee drinkers. If life is like a dish, rituals are the seasoning—customize them to your taste.

**Don't overlook the details in life. Living a life with a sense of ritual proves that you haven't given up on life. Start organizing your life and create your unique rituals!**

---

## Why the Eisenhower Matrix Keeps Failing You — and How to Fix It in 2026 <a id="use-time-matrix-to-make-life-easier"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/use-time-matrix-to-make-life-easier
Date: 2021-11-13
Tools: Reclaim AI, TickTick, Notion, Motion, Todoist
Concepts: Productivity, Time Management, Project Management

### Summary
Everyone knows the Eisenhower Matrix. Few use it well. Here are 5 real reasons it fails and practical fixes for modern knowledge workers.

### Content
# Why the Eisenhower Matrix Keeps Failing You — and How to Fix It in 2026

[A survey of nearly 2,000 office workers](https://www.vouchercloud.com/resources/office-worker-productivity) found that the average person is only truly productive for **2 hours and 53 minutes** per day. Where does the rest go? Meetings, interruptions, messages, and all kinds of tasks that feel urgent but aren't.

You've probably tried the Eisenhower Matrix — sorting everything into urgent/important quadrants. Great in theory, but most people abandon it within days. That's not a "you" problem. The original framework has 5 structural flaws that don't hold up in modern work environments. This article diagnoses why it fails, then gives you practical fixes that actually work in 2026.

## TL;DR

- The Eisenhower Matrix theory is sound, but its original design has 5 structural gaps
- The deadliest flaw: "important but not urgent" tasks never scream for your attention, so they always get sacrificed
- The fix is tools and processes, not willpower
- Reclaim AI can auto-protect your Q2 time; TickTick has a built-in matrix view out of the box
- The most effective way to use the matrix is as a weekly review, not a per-task classification system

## 30-Second Refresher: What Is the Eisenhower Matrix?

[The Eisenhower Matrix](https://todoist.com/productivity-methods/eisenhower-matrix) traces back to a 1954 speech where President Eisenhower quoted: "What is urgent is not important, and what is important is never urgent." Stephen Covey later systematized it in *The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People* as a 2×2 matrix:

| | Urgent | Not Urgent |
|---|---|---|
| **Important** | Q1: Do it now | Q2: Schedule it |
| **Not Important** | Q3: Delegate or handle quickly | Q4: Delete it |

The core idea is simple: **highly effective people spend most of their time in Q2 (important but not urgent)**.

The theory is elegant. But does it actually work for you? Here are 5 real reasons it probably doesn't.

## 5 Real Reasons the Eisenhower Matrix Fails

### 1. "Important" Is Subjective — and You Can't Tell the Difference

Your colleague says "this is urgent," your boss says "that's critical too," a client asks "can you deliver by tomorrow?" — everything sounds equally urgent and important.

This is the matrix's most fundamental flaw: **it assumes you already know what's important to you**. Without a clear set of personal goals as your benchmark, everything looks equally important, and classification becomes a guessing game.

### 2. Q2 Always Gets Sacrificed — Because It Never Yells

You know you should learn that new skill, build team SOPs, or start exercising. But these things have no deadlines, no one's chasing you, and nothing bad happens immediately if you skip them.

Here's what your typical day actually looks like: morning Slack bombardment (Q3), then an urgent bug to fix (Q1), followed by three meetings in the afternoon (according to [HBR research](https://hbr.org/2017/07/stop-the-meeting-madness), 71% of senior managers consider meetings unproductive — many of them are Q3). By end of day, you're exhausted. Q2 gets skipped again.

[Microsoft's 2025 research](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/worklab/work-trend-index/breaking-down-infinite-workday) found that knowledge workers receive over **275 notifications per day** (including outside work hours). And [UC Irvine researcher Gloria Mark found](https://ics.uci.edu/~gmark/chi08-mark.pdf) it takes an average of **23 minutes** to refocus after each interruption. Do the math — you simply don't have uninterrupted time for Q2.

### 3. When Your Role Grows, 70% Lands in Q1

As your responsibilities expand, over 70% of your tasks can end up in the "urgent and important" quadrant.

Think about it: if you're a manager or PM, a delayed project is Q1, a customer complaint is Q1, a cross-team deadline is Q1. When 70% of your matrix is Q1, the classification tool becomes meaningless — you're just staring at a long list of "all urgent, all important."

### 4. "Delegate" Assumes You Have a Team — Many Don't

The matrix's advice for Q3 is to "delegate." But Eisenhower had an entire White House staff. What about you?

If you're a freelancer, solo founder, or student — there's no one to delegate to. This isn't a discipline problem. It's a hidden assumption baked into the framework: it was designed for people with organizational resources.

### 5. Classification Alone Doesn't Solve Execution

You spend 30 minutes sorting 20 tasks into four quadrants, then stare at the board — still unsure where to start.

That's because the matrix is a **classification tool**, not an **execution system**. It tells you what matters more, but not "what should I do between 2 PM and 4 PM." There's a massive gap between categorization and action, and the original matrix doesn't bridge it.

## The Fix: Making the Eisenhower Matrix Actually Work in 2026

These 5 problems don't mean you should ditch the matrix — the underlying logic is right. The problem is in the **execution layer**, and that's exactly what processes and tools can fix.

### Fix 1: Define "Important" with 3 Annual Goals

Can't tell what's important? Start with one question: **What are the 3 things you most want to advance this year?**

They don't need to be grand — maybe "learn a skill well enough to freelance," "exercise 3 times a week," or "save my first emergency fund."

Once you have these 3 anchors, the criteria becomes simple: **Does this task directly contribute to one of my three goals?** Yes = important. No = not important. Two seconds, done.

The biggest insight I got from this approach: many things I thought were "important" were actually just "important to someone else." Having your own goals gives you the confidence to say no.

### Fix 2: Use Tools to Force-Protect Q2 Time

The Q2 problem isn't that you don't know it's important — it's that Q2 never puts itself on your calendar. The fix is straightforward: **let tools claim that time for you**.

[Reclaim AI](https://reclaim.ai/) is one of the best options. It automatically blocks time on your Google Calendar based on your priorities. When a new meeting or Q1 event comes in, it doesn't just delete Q2 — it automatically reschedules to another open slot. The free tier protects up to 3 habits.

If you don't want to use a tool, the minimum viable approach is: **manually block two 2-hour slots per week on your calendar and mark them as "non-cancellable."** Treat them like meetings with your most important client — because that client is you.

### Fix 3: When Q1 Overflows, Cut Before Classifying

If 70% of your matrix is Q1, the problem isn't your classification method — it's that you've taken on too much.

Try this exercise: list everything you think is Q1, then ask yourself — **if I could only do 3 things today, which 3?** The rest gets postponed, declined, or done at lower quality.

It feels brutal, but that's reality: your time is a finite resource. Not choosing is just handing the choice to someone else.

### Fix 4: No One to Delegate To? Use Batching + Automation

No team to delegate Q3 to? Two strategies can dramatically reduce Q3 interference:

**Batch processing**: Collect all non-urgent tasks (replying to messages, processing invoices, organizing files) into a single time block. I use 4-5 PM daily. The key is not touching these tasks outside that window — resist the urge to check every notification.

**Automate repetitive work**: Let AI draft your routine email replies, auto-generate monthly reports from templates, and use calendar tools for scheduling. In 2026, these tools are mature enough to handle this well.

An underrated strategy is **setting response windows**: Add to your Slack or email signature, "I reply to non-urgent messages at 10 AM and 3 PM daily." It might feel awkward at first, but you'll quickly discover — truly urgent things? People will call you.

### Fix 5: Use the Matrix as a Weekly Review, Not Real-Time Classification

Stopping to classify every single task is impractical — it actually drains cognitive resources and becomes another form of procrastination.

A more effective approach: **spend 15 minutes each week reviewing where your time went**. You don't need precision — just roughly tag each major activity by quadrant.

You'll probably find that over half your time went to Q3. That's the problem — and you don't need a better classification system. You need fewer Q3 tasks.

The point of weekly review isn't perfect categorization — it's spotting **trends**: Is your Q2 percentage a little higher than last week? If yes, you're making progress.

## 2026 Tool Recommendations

Tools aren't magic, but the right ones can turn the fixes above from "know it but can't do it" into "happens automatically."

### Q2 Getting Squeezed → [Reclaim AI](https://reclaim.ai/) (Free / Starter $8/mo)

An AI calendar tool specifically built to solve the "Q2 disappears" problem. It auto-blocks time on your Google Calendar for Q2 tasks, and auto-reschedules when other events take over. Free tier protects up to 3 habits. Starter plan is $8/mo (annual).

### Want a Ready-Made Matrix → [TickTick](https://help.ticktick.com/articles/7055782071033135104) (Free / Premium ~$4/mo)

One of the few mainstream task managers with a [native Eisenhower Matrix view](https://help.ticktick.com/articles/7055782071033135104). Switch to matrix mode, drag tasks into quadrants. No labels or filters to set up — works out of the box. The matrix view is available on the free tier; Premium (~$4/mo) unlocks more advanced features.

### Tasks + Notes in One Place → Notion (Free / Plus $10/mo)

If you need task management and knowledge management in one workspace, Notion is the most flexible choice. The template gallery has free Eisenhower Matrix boards you can duplicate. But for pure matrix use, Notion might be overkill.

### Full AI Auto-Scheduling → Motion ($29/mo, annual)

The most powerful AI scheduling tool: input tasks and deadlines, and it auto-arranges your calendar. Great desktop experience (G2 rating 4.5/5), but the Android app is weaker. At $29/mo it's the priciest option and has a 2-3 week learning curve. Best for power users willing to invest.

### Quick Task Entry → Todoist (Free / Pro $5/mo)

Natural language task input is Todoist's biggest strength (e.g., "review progress every Friday at 3pm p1"). P1-P4 priorities naturally map to quadrants. AI Task Assist can auto-break large tasks into subtasks.

### Zero Cost → Google Calendar Color Coding

Don't want to pay or learn new tools? Use Google Calendar's color feature: Red = Q1, Blue = Q2, Yellow = Q3, Gray = Q4. One glance at the color distribution tells you where your time is going.

## Limitations — When Not to Use the Eisenhower Matrix

Every framework has boundaries. Being honest about them helps you use it better:

**Creative work doesn't fit neatly into quadrants.** Writing, design, research — you often don't know the value of exploratory work before you start. Forcing "important/not important" labels can kill your willingness to try new directions.

**Energy matters more than time.** The matrix only considers "what should be done," not "do you have the energy to do it?" An important task done while you're exhausted might produce worse results than doing it tomorrow morning in half the time.

**Relationships can't be quantified.** A colleague's request for help might land in Q3, but consistently ignoring coworkers erodes trust — and trust is a Q2-level asset. This tension is something the matrix can't resolve.

**Over-optimizing the system is its own form of procrastination.** If you spend more time designing the perfect classification system than actually executing tasks, you've fallen into the "productivity porn" trap.

## FAQ

### What's the difference between the Eisenhower Matrix and GTD? Can they work together?

The Eisenhower Matrix solves "what to do first" (prioritization). GTD solves "how to make sure nothing falls through the cracks" (workflow). They pair well: use GTD's capture and processing steps to lay all tasks out, then use the matrix to prioritize.

### How do I quickly tell if something is Q1 or Q3?

Two-second test: **If I don't do this, what happens in a month?** If the answer is "something seriously bad," it's Q1. If the answer is "probably nothing," it's Q3 — no matter how urgent it feels right now.

### I'm a freelancer with no one to delegate to. What do I do with Q3?

Replace delegation with batching + automation. Collect all Q3 into a fixed daily time block, and automate repetitive work with AI tools. Also, setting response windows ("I reply to non-urgent messages at 10 AM and 3 PM") significantly reduces Q3 interruptions.

### Q2 keeps getting crowded out. What can I do?

The most effective approach is tool-enforced protection — Reclaim AI auto-blocks Q2 time and reschedules when conflicts arise. The bare minimum: manually block calendar time and treat it like a client meeting you can't cancel. If Q2 gets skipped for two straight weeks, the problem likely isn't time management — it's that you've taken on too much.

### Does the Eisenhower Matrix work for personal life?

Absolutely — and personal life needs it even more. Without a boss setting deadlines, Q2 items (exercise, financial planning, nurturing key relationships) are the easiest things to perpetually postpone. A 15-minute weekly life review might be more effective than any productivity app.

## Conclusion

The Eisenhower Matrix has survived 70 years not because it's perfect, but because its core insight is right: **the things that truly matter rarely scream for your attention, and the things that scream rarely matter.**

The problem was never the theory — it's the execution. The original framework was built for 1950s organizational managers. In 2026, you need to add goal anchors, tool-enforced time protection, and batch processing as modern patches to make it actually work.

If you only do one thing, do this: **spend 15 minutes reviewing last week's time and roughly tag each activity by quadrant.** You'll likely find that more than half your time went to Q3.

Seeing the problem is where change begins.

---

## Master Your Money and Life: Top Tips from Amazon’s Bestsellers <a id="learn-to-financial-freedom-from-amazon-bestsellers"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/learn-to-financial-freedom-from-amazon-bestsellers
Date: 2021-08-15
Tools: Amazon
Concepts: Business, Finance, Learning, Management, Mindset

### Summary
Instead of discussing the Holy Grail of Wealth Freedom, this article summarizes the key messages from several reputable authors of Amazon’s investment bestsellers, providing us with a more stable concept of financial management and the path to financial freedom.

### Content
Instead of discussing the Holy Grail of Wealth Freedom, this article summarizes the key messages from several reputable authors of Amazon’s investment bestsellers, providing us with a more stable concept of financial management and the path to financial freedom.

## TL;DR Summary

Key conceptual takeaways from top financial bestsellers:
1.  **Dave Ramsey**: Live debt-free. Build an emergency fund. Don't compare yourself to "fake rich" neighbors.
2.  **Tony Robbins**: Diversify asset allocation (Security/Growth/Dream buckets). Compound interest is your best friend.
3.  **Morgan Housel**: Wealth is what you don't see (savings). Survival > maximizing returns. Manage your behavior, not just your portfolio.

## The Total Money Makeover: A Proven Plan for Financial Fitness

- Author: Dave Ramsey
- Link: [Amazon](https://amzn.to/3iLlvUQ)

This book provides 7 simple steps to reverse your financial decline. Through these methods, you can regain a financially secure life and start planning for the future, moving towards a comfortable and meaningful life and retirement.

> Fact: The typical millionaire lives in a middle-class home, drives a car that's paid off and is at least two years old, and buys jeans at Wal-Mart.

The most important point of this book is: learn to live your own life. You may feel that people around you are doing better than you, leading to low self-esteem, jealousy, and nervousness, which can easily cause many misjudgments in your decision-making. But in fact, most people actually "look" better than they really are. Debt and leverage have created this situation, but these are definitely not without risks. You can't understand everyone's true situation, but you don't need to. Don't judge yourself by comparison. Don't compare with others, just compare with yourself!

In addition, it must be emphasized that many people now advocate borrowing money for investment, but in fact, there will be some survivor bias. Compared with the huge risk, it is more appropriate to repay large debts as soon as possible and shorten the loan time as much as possible.

### Keynotes

1. Your financial situation is not as good as you thought, what should you do?
2. Debt exists in life for granted; we must understand the limitations and risks it brings.
3. Step 1: Prepare emergency reserves.
4. Step 2: Start trying to repay the debt in one go from small to large.
5. Step 3: Expand emergency reserves.
6. Step 4: Use 15% of income to invest, for example, in funds.
7. Step 5: If you have children, plan the cost of raising them to college and how to prevent them from being in debt.
8. Step 6: Find a way to repay the biggest debt as soon as possible.
9. Step 7: Follow your own plan and use your wealth appropriately.

## Money: Master the Game: 7 Simple Steps to Financial Freedom

- Author: Tony Robbins
- Link: [Amazon](https://amzn.to/3siebmQ)

As long as you work hard, are willing to save, and follow discipline, even if you start slowly, everyone can achieve wealth freedom. Find ways to diversify risks, diversify investments, seek advice from trustworthy people, prepare appropriate hedging methods, and respond to different market cycles.

It mentions a way to diversify investment: divide your funds into three buckets,

1. Security bucket: The most conservative investment, capital preservation, such as bonds.
2. Growth bucket: More risk, more rate of return, such as the stock market.
3. Dream bucket: Put part of the income from other investments into the Dream bucket and try the life you want to experience more!

> If you want to change your life, you have to change your strategy, you have to change your story, and you have to change your state.

Most importantly, your goal is to live the life you want, not just to have large savings. If you do not configure the Dream bucket, your savings and investment will become meaningless. The most important thing is to exchange money for meaningful and valuable experiences and to continue to grow!

### Keynotes

1. Don't underestimate the power of compound interest.
2. Even if there is only a small amount of money, it is still necessary to invest continuously and periodically.
3. Do your homework before investing in all projects!
4. Set your goals first, and then think about how to invest.
5. The road to wealth and freedom is very long, take your time, time will always be your powerful friend.
6. Diversify investment projects and try to maintain balance.
7. Seek advice from reliable and experienced investors, and make sure that you are prepared to avoid risks and respond to market changes at any time.

## The Psychology of Money: Timeless Lessons on Wealth, Greed, and Happiness

- Author: Morgan Housel
- Link: [Amazon](https://amzn.to/3m37K5U)

In the real world, people’s financial decisions are always more irrational than expected. Many decisions, such as when you are about to go bankrupt, betting a lot on lotteries, using leveraged gambling, etc., are very irrational, but for the individual, this action seems to make some sense. The same is true for investment. People's investments are usually influenced by their own life experiences and personality, rather than a calm analysis of the market situation. For example, those who have experienced financial turmoil and those who have been stable and long-term as soon as they entered the market have very different investment strategies and ideas. The total decision actually involves many psychological factors.

> Not all success is due to hard work, and not all poverty is due to laziness. Keep this in mind when judging people, including yourself.

We should learn to understand the fact that success requires luck and learn to fear losing what we already have, and manage risks. Don't be greedy; not only did you not make a small amount of money but instead lost the cost of survival.

> Life isn't any fun without a sense of enough. Happiness, as it's said, is just results minus expectations.

So, how to maintain the original wealth? History tells us that people who can survive in the market for a long time have one thing in common: fear, which prevents them from being eliminated by the market. When you learn to be afraid of losing what you already have, you will have a different perspective and may have the opportunity to make better decisions.

Failure is inevitable. From another perspective, failure is the only way to success. Accept it. Every small failure will lay the foundation for more success. Every small success will enable you to bear greater failure.

### Keynotes

1. Everyone has their own experience of the market and money.
2. Personal experience affects financial decisions.
3. The economic concepts we currently use are still very immature.
4. The proportion of luck to financial success is much higher than you think.
5. Rather than sticking to a specific case, try more broad and diversified methods to get more possibilities.
6. Jealousy makes you reckless.
7. It is easier to accumulate wealth than to maintain wealth.
8. You may be wrong half of your time and decision-making, but you can still accumulate wealth.

## Conclusion

In fact, there are many books on the market related to money, financial management, and investment. This time I chose these three books to share mainly because the concepts of these three books are relatively solid and stable, suitable for most of us "ordinary people." Many concepts you may have heard, for example, prepare emergency reserves, the power of compound interest, do not use leveraged investment, etc. But the market opportunities are unlimited, and now there is so much flooding information on the Internet, it is easy to cause FOMO (Fear Of Missing Out), deep fear of not keeping up with the trends, suddenly entering the market, and even borrowing money to invest in high-risk projects. The market is indeed endless, and many masters can indeed seize these opportunities. But for ordinary people, it is perhaps most important to lay a solid foundation, build the foundation for a better life, and then seek better opportunities.

---

## Best resources for learning negotiation <a id="best-resources-to-learn-negotiation"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/best-resources-to-learn-negotiation
Date: 2021-07-31
Tools: Coursera, MasterClass, Udemy
Concepts: Business, Career, Learning, Negotiation, Soft Skills

### Summary
Many people don’t realize that negotiation is a science, and world-class universities like Harvard dedicate more than a semester to teaching it. Negotiations are a part of everyday life. Imagine how much your life could improve by mastering better negotiation techniques. This article summarizes the top recommended resources for learning negotiation skills in 2026. Through self-study, you too can become a negotiation expert!

### Content
Many people don’t realize that negotiation is a science, and world-class universities like Harvard dedicate more than a semester to teaching it. Negotiations are a part of everyday life, whether it’s transactions, salary discussions, market value evaluations, or conflict resolution. Imagine how much your life could improve by mastering better negotiation techniques. This article summarizes the top recommended resources for learning negotiation skills in 2026. Through self-study, you too can become a negotiation expert!

## TL;DR Summary

To master negotiation in 2026, combine structured online learning with practical reading:
1.  **Top Course**: Harvard's "Negotiation Mastery" (Comprehensive but expensive) or Coursera's "Successful Negotiation" (Accessible and structured).
2.  **Top Book**: "Never Split the Difference" by Chris Voss for real-world, high-stakes tactics.
3.  **Practice**: Use low-stakes daily interactions to practice before high-stakes salary or business talks.

---

## Online Courses

After reading various articles and watching videos on the Internet, you might start to get a feel for negotiation. At this point, I suggest participating in these prestigious and popular courses to learn negotiation techniques and knowledge more systematically. Below are the most recommended online negotiation courses in 2026:

- [Harvard Negotiation Course](https://online.hbs.edu/courses/negotiation/): Professor Michael Wheeler’s negotiation class is highly coveted by students worldwide. Harvard offers an online version of this course, which lasts for 8 weeks and costs $1600.

- [Successful Negotiation: Essential Strategies and Skills(Coursera)](https://www.coursera.org/learn/negotiation-skills): Taught by Professor George Siedel of the University of Michigan, this 7-week course (75 minutes per week) breaks down the negotiation process into four steps: planning strategy, identifying key factors, executing the negotiation smoothly, and evaluating its effectiveness.

- [Negotiation Secrets for Master Negotiators(Udemy)](https://www.udemy.com/course/negotiation-secrets-for-master-negotiators/): Another 1.5-hour course that includes essential skills for negotiation preparation. These skills can help you overcome anxiety and successfully complete negotiations, allowing you to start using practical tools and techniques immediately.

- [Negotiation Fundamentals: How To Negotiate Effectively(Udemy)](https://www.udemy.com/course/negotiation-fundamentals-how-to-negotiate-effectively/): This 1.5-hour course teaches you how to make decisions, become more powerful in negotiations, identify and use pressure points, handle different negotiation styles, and most importantly, achieve win-win situations!

## Books

After absorbing a lot of knowledge from the courses, reading books can help solidify and deepen that knowledge. By learning through practical cases, you can gain a better understanding of real-life negotiations. Additionally, reading can help you organize your thoughts and prepare for your next negotiation.

- [Ask for More: 10 Questions to Negotiate Anything](https://amzn.to/3g0SsLc): This book focuses on managing emotions during negotiations. Emotions always fluctuate during negotiations, and they directly impact our decision-making and performance. “Reflecting on ourselves in the mirror, looking out the window to understand others.” This book is straightforward to read!

- [Getting More: How You Can Negotiate to Succeed in Work and Life](https://amzn.to/37EUcVN)： This book discusses 12 main negotiation skills and provides various case simulations. The structure is clear and easy to understand.

- [Never Split the Difference: Negotiating As If Your Life Depended On It](https://amzn.to/37EX3hA): This approachable book emphasizes that emotions are crucial in decision-making. Understanding and mastering both your own emotions and those of the other party during negotiations is very important.

## TV Series and articles

Before you dive into learning, consider relaxing with a TV series. [SUITS](https://www.imdb.com/title/tt1632701/) is a legal drama set in a New York law firm. The story begins with Mike Ross, who, without a law license, impressively convinces Harvey Specter to hire him after crashing an interview.

The main attraction of the show is the various business negotiations and the commanding presence Harvey Specter displays. While the series may deviate from reality, watching Harvey’s performances at the negotiating table will definitely give you a sense of effective negotiation techniques.

If you don’t have time to watch the series, there are many articles online that share insights on how to negotiate like Harvey. For example:

* [How To Negotiate Like Harvey Specter Part I](https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/20140814142934-347559225-how-to-negotiate-like-harvey-specter/)
* [How To Negotiate Like Harvey Specter Part II](https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/20141204130253-347559225-how-to-negotiate-like-harvey-specter-part-ii/)
* [6 Negotiation Lessons from Harvey Specter of ‘Suits’](https://www.scotwork.com.au/negotiation-blog/2018/6-negotiation-lessons-from-harvey-spectre-of-suits/)

There are countless articles and videos related to negotiations. Many of them list guidelines that might seem obvious. You might think, “Huh? Isn’t this common sense?” Yes, much of it may seem like common sense, but do you really consider these guidelines and knowledge when you negotiate?

## Conclusion

The above learning resources may have some overlapping content and concepts, but they are complementary overall. It won’t take too much time to understand and learn from all these resources. After reading the books, you should have a deep understanding of negotiation techniques and knowledge. However, that’s not enough—try to incorporate these skills into your daily negotiations. Negotiation is everywhere in your life, and I believe you will soon become a master negotiator!

---

## How to Land a Front-End Engineer Job in 3 Months <a id="how-to-become-a-frontend-engineer"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/how-to-become-a-frontend-engineer
Date: 2021-07-24
Tools: Claude, Cursor, GitHub, Next.js, React, Tailwind CSS, TypeScript, Udemy
Concepts: AI, Automation, Backend, Business, Career, Frontend, Learning

### Summary
In this article, we will cover how a rookie can become a competitive front-end engineer—an engineer with a certain level of code quality, familiarity with a front-end framework, and popularity in the job market.

### Content
In this article, we will cover how a rookie can become a competitive front-end engineer—an engineer with a certain level of code quality, familiarity with at least one front-end framework, and competitiveness in the job market.

## In-Demand Skills

Check the [Frontend Roadmap](https://github.com/kamranahmedse/developer-roadmap#frontend-roadmap) to learn the techniques you need to tackle to become a front-end engineer.

Additionally, you can search for front-end job descriptions on job websites. The skills that appear repeatedly are the necessary technologies for a front-end engineer position. Most often, these include HTML, CSS, JavaScript, Ajax, React (or another framework), and tools like Bootstrap, jQuery, etc.

## Initial Understanding of Basic Skills

First, try to understand the purpose of these skills. If you find it difficult to digest the terms, you can check YouTube or the [Udemy Free Learning Center](https://www.udemy.com/courses/free/) for related courses. Look for courses/instructors with the best reviews and ratings that suit your learning style.

## Start Learning

You may hear advice like "learn HTML/CSS/JavaScript by yourself on [MDN](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/)!" While it’s true that there are abundant resources available for self-study, as a novice, diving into the [MDN](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/) documentation might be overwhelming.

It's recommended to follow an instructor through an online course. The advantage of taking a course is that you can follow along and practice. This hands-on experience helps you build a sense of accomplishment. Seeing what you create will inspire more ideas.

Once you have a good grasp of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript, you can delve deeper into JavaScript. [JavaScript: Understanding the Weird Parts](https://www.udemy.com/course/the-complete-javascript-course/) is highly recommended for those who want to understand JavaScript in-depth. It covers advanced topics like object prototypes and closures, as well as common JavaScript errors and how to avoid them. This course will help you build a solid understanding of JavaScript’s features and underlying concepts.

After building a strong foundation, start learning a front-end framework. If you’re unsure where to start, I recommend React/Redux. [Stephen Grider](https://www.udemy.com/user/sgslo/) is one of the most acclaimed instructors, and his course [Modern React with Redux](https://www.udemy.com/course/react-redux/) is highly popular. This course will help you quickly understand React and Redux and allow you to implement a small project or design your own work using the knowledge you’ve gained.

If you prefer Vue, you can choose [Vue JS Essentials with Vuex and Vue Router](https://www.udemy.com/course/vue-js-course/) by [Stephen Grider](https://www.udemy.com/course/vue-js-course/).

After completing these courses, think about how to build a new project using the skills you’ve learned. Start from scratch and avoid relying too much on sample code provided by the courses. You may find that your CSS knowledge needs reinforcement. To strengthen your CSS skills, consider taking [Advanced CSS and Sass: Flexbox, Grid, Animations and More!](https://www.udemy.com/course/advanced-css-and-sass/) and try to apply more advanced techniques in your project.

## Prepare for Interviews

With all these skills under your belt, you will be a very competitive engineer in the job market. Prepare your resume, organize your portfolio, and get ready for the next chapter of your career!

During this time, revisit the [Frontend Roadmap](https://github.com/kamranahmedse/developer-roadmap#frontend-roadmap) to see where you stand and what you need to do to keep progressing. Make a detailed plan for continuous growth, which will also help in preparing for interviews.

---

## Here's how you can crack the PMP exam! <a id="how-to-get-pmp-2021"></a>
URL: https://www.shareuhack.com/en/posts/how-to-get-pmp-2021
Date: 2021-07-18
Tools: Udemy
Concepts: Business, Learning, Management, Productivity, Project Management, Soft Skills

### Summary
The PMP certification exam was last updated in 2021 and has been superseded by the 2026 update (PMBOK 8). This article remains for reference, but new candidates should refer to the latest guide.

### Content
> **🛑 注意：舊版內容提示**
>
> 本指南針對 PMP 考試的 2021 版本。自 2026 年 7 月 9 日起，PMP 考試已更新以符合 **PMBOK 第八版**。
>
> 🚀 **[點此查看最新 2026 PMP 考試指南](/posts/pmp-exam-update-2026-pmbok8)**

<!-- en-US -->

Anyone interested in obtaining the PMP certification should be aware that the exam was majorly updated in 2021 and again in **2026**. This article provides the historical context and foundational knowledge for the 2021 revision. For the most current requirements, see our latest guide.

## What is PMP?

This article will not elaborate on what PMP is. If you’re interested, please refer directly to the PMI official [Introduction](https://www.pmi.org/certifications/project-management-pmp).

## How to apply for the PMP exam?

For any information related to PMP registration, always refer to the [PMI official website](https://www.pmi.org/) to ensure the information is up-to-date and accurate. You can refer to PMI’s [how-to guide](https://www.pmi.org/certifications/project-management-pmp/earn-the-pmp/how-to-apply) for more details. 

Here is a simplified summary of what you will need:

1. Confirm eligibility for the exam.
2. Register an account on the PMI website.
3. Start the application process.

### Step 1: Confirm Eligibility

You must meet one of the following sets of criteria:

First set:

1. A four-year bachelor’s degree.
2. 36 months of leading project experience.
3. 35 hours of project management education.

Second set:

1. A high school diploma or an associate degree.
2. 60 months of leading project experience.
3. 35 hours of project management education.

### Step 2: Register an Account on pmi.org and Start the Application Process

Filling out forms can be tedious, but I encourage all candidates to independently follow the website instructions to apply. After all, as a professional project manager, this should be a basic skill, right?


One thing worth mentioning is that you will need to document your project experience when applying for the exam. You can refer to PMI’s [Your PMP Application Checklist](https://www.pmi.org/-/media/pmi/documents/public/pdf/certifications/your-pmp-application-checklist.pdf?v=598ade6b-8bd6-4ef5-a7d6-1d363a2b93d0) as a basis for preparing your materials.

If you are determined to obtain the PMP certification, it is recommended to join as a paying member after registering your account. The membership fee is US$129/year with a one-time application fee of US$10. The main benefit is that the exam fee for members is US$405, compared to US$555 for non-members, so joining as a member is actually more economical. Additionally, most importantly, members can download the PMBOK® Guide PDF for free.

## What Changes Were Made to the PMP Exam Starting in 2021 and Why?

The role of project managers, as well as project management methods and thinking, are continuously evolving over time.

PMI continuously observes and analyzes the work content and methods of project managers and reviews whether the exam knowledge content is outdated and needs updating. For example, the old version focused only on the predictive waterfall model, but the new version emphasizes agile management more, reflecting this in the updated exam.

The old exam content was limited to the project lifecycle, emphasizing five processes, ten knowledge areas, and various sub-processes. The new exam content focuses on the following three domains:

1. People (42%): Emphasizes leadership soft skills to adapt to today’s fast-changing environment and embrace change!
2. Process (50%): Emphasizes the techniques of managing projects.
3. Business Environment (8%): Emphasizes the link between the project and organizational strategy.

This change is welcomed. Facing the dynamic changing environment, the new focus on these domains indeed reflects the current situation better. We can expect more scenario-based questions related to these three domains in the new exam, with more concepts related to agile or hybrid approaches. According to the official statement, half of the questions will be in a predictive manner, while the other half will be agile/hybrid.

## PMBOK 6 vs. PMBOK 7

The official PMBOK 7 has been published. What should you do if you prepared using PMBOK 6?

The answer is, nothing needs to be done.

So far, the official exam reference list still uses the sixth edition. PMBOK has always been just one of the references. You can rest assured to follow the preparation methods below.

The main differences between PMBOK 6 and 7 are:

1. Inclusion of Systems Thinking to enhance the holistic view of project management.
2. Emphasis on value delivery over outcomes.
3. The sixth edition emphasizes ten knowledge areas (Integration, Scope, Schedule, Cost, Quality, Resource, Communications, Risk, Procurement, Stakeholder), while the seventh edition emphasizes eight project performance domains (Team, Stakeholders, Life cycle, Planning, Uncertainty and ambiguity, Delivery, Performance, Project work).

## Preparation Methods

How should you prepare for the new exam?

For new candidates, the preparation methods are not significantly different. Attend the necessary courses and thoroughly read the materials. These materials will be updated according to the latest PMI rules. Here are the recommended preparation methods:

### Preparation Materials

1. [PMP Examination Content Outline](https://www.pmi.org/-/media/pmi/documents/public/pdf/certifications/pmp-examination-content-outline.pdf?v=ef41743a-9156-4137-a9a6-fd31e19a9668): The official exam outline provided by PMP, which details the exam content.

2. PMI Official PMBOK 6 + 7 + APG (Agile Practice Guide): PMI members can download the PDF files for free.

3. [PMP Exam Prep Seminar-2021 Exam Content with 35 PDUs](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-pmbok6-35-pdus/): Joseph Phillips’ course on Udemy. By completing the course, assignments, and tests, you can earn 35 PDUs, which meet the basic training requirements for applying for the PMP exam. The instructor continuously updates the latest PMP-related content, so there’s no need to worry about outdated information. After reviewing the course, it is clear and easy to understand, even for those without a strong professional background. However, experienced project managers might find it somewhat less engaging. It is recommended to quickly go through the course to gain PDUs and get an overview of the knowledge framework.

4. [PMP Exam Cram Session-Updated for the current PMP Exam](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-exam-cram-session-pmbok6/): Another course by Joseph on Udemy, similar to a cram session, includes 135 practice questions.

5. [PMP Exam-PMI New Format 2024 Mock Simulator (PMBOK7 Updated)](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-exam-situational-question-practice-test-200-q-pmbok6/): Simulation questions for PMBOK 7, providing more practice questions on AGILE/HYBRID/PREDICTIVE aspects.

### Preparation method

1. First, go through the [PMP Examination Content Outline](https://www.pmi.org/-/media/pmi/documents/public/pdf/certifications/pmp-examination-content-outline.pdf?v=ef41743a-9156-4137-a9a6-fd31e19a9668) to understand the exam outline and scope. If you have some project management experience, you should feel relieved after reading it, realizing that these questions won’t be too challenging for you.

2. Complete the [PMP Exam Prep Seminar - Complete Exam Coverage with 35 PDUs](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-pmbok6-35-pdus/) course to learn the entire knowledge framework and earn enough PDUs to apply for the exam. It is also recommended to skim through the PMBOK. For experienced project managers, this content will be a breeze, but you still need to familiarize yourself with the system’s terminology. Adjust the course speed to 1.5x to finish it faster. Depending on individual circumstances, this course can typically be completed within 1-2 months.

3. Quickly review the official materials again. After completing the course, your grasp of the knowledge system should be strong. There’s no need to go into too much detail. Refer back to the materials as needed when practicing questions.

4. Start practicing simulation questions. There are many free test resources available online. Below are some listed resources. When practicing, don’t focus too much on whether each answer is correct. The key is to have a clear understanding of the questions. If there are unclear parts, refer back to the PMBOK or discuss in related [Facebook](https://www.facebook.com/groups/839989579444112) or [Linkedin](https://www.linkedin.com/search/results/groups/?keywords=PMP) groups. Communities are usually willing to help. As for how many questions you need to practice, the ones listed in this article’s learning resources are sufficient. Additional practice is mainly to boost confidence and reduce anxiety.

5. Before the exam, do a final review with the [PMP Exam Cram Session - Updated for the current PMP Exam](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-exam-cram-session-pmbok6/) and practice with the [PMP Exam-PMI New Format 2024 Mock Simulator (PMBOK7 Updated)](https://www.udemy.com/course/pmp-exam-situational-question-practice-test-200-q-pmbok6/). This preparation will ensure you can take the exam confidently.

### Free simulation test resources

1. [pmppracticeexam.org](https://www.pmppracticeexam.org/)

2. [Edwel Programs](https://www.edwel.com/Free-Resources/PMP-Certification-Practice-Exam.aspx)

3. [PM Exam Simulator](https://free.pm-exam-simulator.com/)

---